PG - M.Sc. - Psycology - 36333 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
[ACCREDITED WITH ‘A+’ Grade by NAAC (CGPA:3.64) in the Third Cycle

and Graded as Category-I University by MHRD-UGC]
(A State University Established by the Government of Tamilnadu)
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION
M.Sc. PSYCHOLOGY
III SEMESTER
363 33
PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Copy Right Reserved For Private use only

Author:
Dr. K. Jayanthi Rani
Assistant Professor
Department of Psychology
Ethiraj College for Women
Chennai.
“The Copyright shall be vested with Alagappa University”
All rights reserved. No part of this publication which is material protected by this copyright notice may be reproduced or transmitted
or utilized or stored in any form or by any means now known or hereinafter invented, electronic, digital or mechanical, including
photocopying, scanning, recording or by any information storage or retrieval system, without prior written permission from the
Alagappa University, Karaikudi, Tamil Nadu.
SYLLABI – BOOK MAPPING TABLE
PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Syllabi Mapping in
Book
BLOCK I: ABNORMAL BEHAVIOUR AND DISORDERS
UNIT I Pages 1-7
Meaning of abnormal behavior-Need for classification- Historical
views of abnormal behavior- Humanitarian approaches,
Contemporary views of abnormal behavior- Causal factors:
Biological, Psychosocial and Sociocultural
UNIT II Pages 8-14
Anxiety disorders: Specific phobias, Social phobias, Panic disorder
with and without agoraphobia-Generalized anxiety disorder-
Obsessive-compulsive disorder- Causal factors of Anxiety
disorders and treatment.
UNIT III Pages 15-26

Unipolar mood disorders – Major depression, Dysthymia, Causal
factors, Treatment and outcome, Bipolar disorders – Bipolar-I,
Bipolar-II and Cyclothymic, Causal factors of Bipolar disorders,
Treatment and outcome.
UNIT IV Pages 27-56
Somatoform disorders: Hypochondriasis- Somatization disorder,-
Pain disorder,-Conversion disorder and Body dysmorphic disorder-
Dissociative disorders: Depersonalization disorder,- Dissociative
Amnesia, Dissociative Identity Disorder, Causal factors, Treatment
and Outcome of Dissociative disorders.
BLOCK II: PERSONALITY DISORDERS
UNIT V Pages 57-79
Sexual Desire disorders, Sexual Arousal disorders, Orgasmic
disorders and Sexual pain disorders.
BLOCK II: FUNDAMENTAL OF TECHNICAL ANALYSIS AND
DERIVATIVES
UNIT VI Pages 80-86
Schizophrenia: Clinical picture-Subtypes of Schizophrenia:
Paranoid, Disorganized, Catatonic- Undifferentiated-
Residual type and other psychotic disorders- Causal factors-
Treatment and Outcome.
UNIT VII Pages 87-97
Clinical Features- Categories of personality disorders: Paranoid,
Schizoid, Schizotypal, Histrionic, Narcastic, Antisocial,
Borderline, Avoidant, Dependent and Obsessive compulsive,
Causal factors of personality disorders, Treatment and Outcome
BLOCK III: THERAPY AND ASSWSMENT
UNIT VIII Pages 98-118

Psychological approaches- Behaviour therapy, Cognitive and
Cognitive-Behaviour therapy- Humanistic-Experiential therapy,-
Psychodynamic therapy- Marital and Family therapy- Eclecticism
and Integration..
UNIT IX Pages 119 -129

Universal Interventions, Selective Interventions, Indicated
Interventions and Deinstitutionalization.
UNIT X Pages 130-142
Assessing psychological disorders: Clinical interview - Physical
examination – Behavioural assessment – Psychological testing.
Diagnosis: Classification issues - DSM IV – ICD 10.
BLOCK IV: DISORDERS

UNIT XI Pages 143-162
Generalized anxiety disorder: Clinical description – Causes –
Treatment Panic disorder with and without agoraphobia: Clinical
description – Causes – Treatment Specific phobia: Clinical
description – Causes – Treatment Post-traumatic stress disorder:
Clinical description – auses – Treatment Obsessive-compulsive
disorder: Clinical description – Causes – Treatment.
UNIT XII Pages 163-174
Mood disorders: Depressive disorders – Bipolar disorder –
Causes – Treatment. Sucide –Risk factors – Treatment.
UNIT XIII Pages 175-182

Bulimia nervosa – Anorexia Nervosa – ingeeating
disorder – Causes and treatment of eating disorders
.
UNIT XIV Pages 183-190
Dys-somnias – Primary insomnia – Primary Hypersomnia –
Narcolepsy –Breathing related sleep disorders – Circadian rhythm
sleep disorders – Treatment: Psychological and Behavioural
treatment.
CONTENTS
Pages
BLOCK I: BEHAVIOURS AND DISORDERS
UNIT 1: ABNORMAL BEHAVIOUR 1-7
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Objectives
1.3 Meaning
1.3.1 Definition
1.3.2 Indicators of abnormality
1.3.2.1 Subjective distress
1.3.2.2 Maladaptiveness
1.3.2.3 Statistical Deviance
1.3.2.4 Violations of the standards of society
1.3.2.5 Social discomfort
1.3.2.6 Irrationality and unpredictability
1.3.2.7 Dangerousness
1.4 Historical Conceptions of Abnormal Behaviour
1.5 Biological Viewpoint
1.5.1 Genetic Vulnerabilities
1.5.2 Brain Dysfunction and Neural Plasticity
1.5.3 Imbalances of Neurotransmitters and Hormones
1.5.4 Temperament
1.6 Psychosocial Viewpoint
1.6.1 The psychodynamic perspective
1.6.2 The behavioural perspective
1.6.3 The Cognitive-Behavioural Perspective
1.7 Sociocultural Viewpoint
1.7.1 Early Deprivation and trauma
1.7.2 Problems in parenting style
1.7.3 Marital Discord and Divorce
1.7.4 Low socioeconomic status and unemployment
1.8 Let's Sum It Up
1.9 Unit End Exercises
1.10 Answers to Check Your Progress
1.11 Suggested Readings
UNIT II: ANXIETY DISORDERS 8-14

2.1 Introduction
2.2 Objectives
2.3 Panic Disorders & Agoraphobia
2.3.1 Biological Causal Factors
2.3.2 Psychological causal factors
2.3.2.1 Cognitive theory of Panic
2.3.2.2 Comprehensive learning theory of panic disorder
2.3.2.3 Anxiety sensitivity and perceived control
2.3.2.4 Cognitive biases
2.3.3 Treatments
2.4 Specific Phobias
2.4.1 Psychological Causal Factors
2.4.1.1 The Psychoanalytic Viewpoint
2.4.1.2 Phobias as learned behaviour
2.4.3 Treatments
2.5 Social Phobia
2.5.1.1 Social Phobia as learned behaviour
2.5.1.2 Social fears and phobia in an evolutionary context
2.5.1.3 Being exposed to uncontrollable and unpredictable
2.5.3 Treatments
2.6 Generalized Anxiety Disorder
2.6.1.1 The psychoanalytic viewpoint
2.6.1.2 Perceptions of uncontrollability and unpredictability
2.6.1.3 A sense of mastery: A possibility of immunizing against anxiety
2.6.1.4 The reinforcing properties of worry
2.6.1.5 The negative consequences of worry
2.6.1.6 Cognitive biases for threatening information.
2.6.3 Treatments
2.7 Obsessive Compulsive Disorders
2.7.1.1 OCD as learned Behaviour
2.7.1.2 OCD and Preparedness
2.7.1.3 Cognitive causal factors
2.7.3 Treatments
2.8 Let Us Sum Up
2.9 Unit-End Exercises
UNIT - III SOMATOFORM AND DISSOCIATIVE DISORDERS 15-26

3.1 Introduction
3.2 Objectives
3.3 Somatic Symptom Disorder:
3.4 Illness Anxiety Disorder:
3.5 Conversion Disorder (Functional Neurological Symptom Disorder):
3.6 Factitious Disorder:
3.7 Depersonalisation/Derealisation Disorder
3.8 Dissociative Amnesia:
3.9 Dissociative Identity Disorder:
3.10 Let’s Sum Up
3.11 Unit End Exercises:
3.12 Answers To Check Your Progress:
UNIT IV: PERSONALITY DISORDERS 27-56

4.1 Introduction
4.2 Objectives
4.3 Clinical Features
4.4 Types
4.4.1 CLUSTER “A” PERSONALITY DISORDERS
4.4.2 CLUSTER “B” PERSONALITY DISORDERS
4.4.3 CLUSTER “C” PERSONALITY DISORDERS
4.5 Causal Factors In Personality Disorder
4.6 Treatment:
4.7 Anti-Social (Psychopathic) Personality:
4.8 Clinical Picture:
4.9 Causal Factors:
4.10 Treatment:
4.11 Let Us Sum Up:
4.12 Unit-End Exercises:
4.13 Answers to Check Our Progress:
UNIT V: SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION 57-79

5.1 Introduction
5.2 Objectives
5.3 Sexual Desire Disorders
5.3.1 Male Hypoactive Sexual Desire Disorder
5.3.2 Female Sexual Interest/Arousal Disorders
5.4 Sexual Arousal Disorders
5.4.1 Erectile Disorder
5.5 Orgasmic Disorders
5.5.1 Premature (Early) Ejaculation
5.5.2 Delayed Ejaculation Disorder
5.5.3 Female Orgasmic Disorder
5.6 Sexual Pain Disorders
5.6.1 Genito-Pelvic Pain or Penetration Disorder
5.7 Let Us Sum Up
5.9 Answer To Check Your Progress
UNIT VI : SCHIZOPHRENIA AND PERSONALITY 80-86
DISORDERS
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Objectives
6.3 Schizophrenia: Clinical Picture
6.4 Subtypes Of Schizophrenia
6.4.1 Paranoid
6.4.2 Disorganized
6.4.3 Catatonic
6.4.4 Undifferentiated
6.4.5 Residual Type And Other Psychotic Disorders
6.5 Causal Factors
6.6 Treatment And Outcome
6.7 Let Us Sum Up
6.9 Answer to Check Your Progress
UNIT VII: PERSONALITY DISORDERS 87-97

7.1 Introduction
7.2 Objectives
7.4 Categories of Personality Disorders
7.4.1 Paranoid Personality Disorder
7.4.2 Schizoid Personality Disorder
7.4.3 Schizotypal Personality Disorder
7.4.4 Histrionic Personality Disorder
7.4.5 Narcissistic Personality Disorder
7.4.6 Antisocial Personality Disorder
7.4.7 Borderline Personality Disorder
7.4.8 Avoidant Personality Disorder
7.4.9 Dependent Personality Disorder
7.4.10 Obsessive Compulsive Personality Disorder
7.5 Causal Factors Of Personality Disorders
7.6 Treatment and Outcome
7.7 Let Us Sum Up
BLOCK III: THERAPY AND ASSESSMENT

UNIT VIII: THERAPY 98-118
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Objectives
8.3 Psychological Approaches
8.4 Behavior Therapy
8.4.1 EXPOSURE THERAPY
8.4.2 AVERSION THERAPY
8.4.3 MODELING
8.4.4 SYSTEMATIC USE OF REINFORCEMENT
8.4.5 TREATMENT OUTCOMES
8.4.6 EVALUATING BEHAVIOUR THERAPY
8.5 Cognitive and Cognitive-Behavior Therapy
8.5.1 RATIONAL EMOTIVE BEHAVIOR THERAPY
8.5.2 BECK’S COGNITIVE THERAPY
8.5.3 Differences between REBT & Cognitive Therapy
8.5.4 Strengths of CBT
8.5.5 Limitations of CBT
8.6 Humanistic-Experiential Therapy
8.6.1 CLIENT CENTERED THERAPY
8.6.2 MOTIVATIONAL INTERVIEWING
8.6.3 GESTALT THERAPY
8.6.4 EVALUATING HUMANISTIC-EXPERIENTIAL THERAPIES
8.7 Psychodynamic Therapy
8.7.1 FREUDIAN PSYCHOANALYSIS
8.7.2 EVALUATING PSYCHODYNAMIC THERAPIES
8.8 Marital and Family Therapy
8.8.1 COUPLE THERAPY
8.8.2 FAMILY THERAPY
8.9 Eclecticism And Integration
8.10 Let Us Sum Up
UNIT IX: PREVENTION 119-129

9.1 Introduction
9.2 Objectives
9.3 Universal Interventions
9.3.1. Biological strategies
9.3.2. Psychosocial strategies
9.3.4 Socio-Cultural strategies
9.4 Selective Interventions
9.4.1. School-Based Interventions
9.4.2 Intervention programs for High-Risk Teens
9.4.3 Parent Education and Family-based Intervention
9.4.4 Extracurricular Strategies
9.4.5 Internet-based Intervention Programs
9.4.6 Comprehensive Prevention Strategies
9.5 Indicated Interventions
9.5.1 Inpatient Mental Health Treatment in Contemporary Society
9.5.2 The Mental Hospital as a Therapeutic Community
9.5.3 Aftercare Programs
9.5 Deinstitutionalization
9.6 Let Us Sum Up
UNIT X: ASSESSMENT AND DIAGNOSIS 130-142

10.1 Introduction
10.2 Objectives
10.3 Assessing Psychological Disorders
10.3.1 Clinical Interview
10.3.2 PHYSICAL EXAMINATION
10.3.3 Behavioural Assessment
10.3.4 Psychological Testing
10.4 Diagnosis
10.4.1 CLASSIFICATION ISSUES
10.4.2 DSM IV – TR
10.4.3 ICD 10
10.5 Let Us Sum Up
BLOCK IV: DISORDERS

UNIT XI: ANXIETY DISORDERS 143-162
11.1 Introduction
11.2 Objectives
11.3.1 Clinical Description
11.3.2 Causes
11.3.3 Treatment
11.4 Panic Disorder with and Without Agoraphobia
11.4.2 Causes
11.4.3 Treatment
11.5 Specific Phobia
11.5.2 Causes
11.5.3 Treatment
11.6 Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder
11.6.2 Causes
11.6.3 Treatment
11.7 Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder
11.7.2 Auses
11.7.3 Treatment
11.8 Let Us Sum Up
UNIT XII: MOOD DISORDERS 163-174

12.1 Introduction
12.2 Objectives
12.3 Mood Disorders
12.4 Depressive Disorders
12.5 Causes
12.6 Treatment
12.7 Suicide
12.8 Risk Factors
12.9 Treatment
12.10 Let Us Sum Up
UNIT XIII: EATING DISORDERS 175-182

13.1 Introduction
13.2 Objectives
13.3 Bulimia Nervosa
13.4 Anorexia Nervosa
13.5 Binge Eating Disorder
13.6 Causes of Eating Disorders
13.7 Treatment of Eating Disorders
13.1.1 Medical Complications of Eating Disorder
13.7.2 Treatment of Anorexia Nervosa
13.7.3 Treatment of Bulimia Nervosa
13.7.4 Treatment of Binge Eating Disorder
13.8 Let Us Sum Up
UNIT XIV : SLEEPDISORDERS 183-190

14.1 Objectives
14.2 Dys-Somnias
14.3 Primary Insomnia
14.4 Primary Hypersomnia
14.5Narcolepsy
14.6Breathing Related Sleep Disorders
14.7Circadian Rhythm Sleep Disorders
14.8Treatment
14.8.1 Psychological Treatment
14.8.2 Behavioural Treatment
14.9 Let Us Sum Up
Model Question Paper 191

BLOCK I: BEHAVIOURS AND Abnormal Psychology
NOTES
DISORDERS
UNIT 1: ABNORMAL BEHAVIOUR
Structure
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Objectives
1.3 Meaning
1.3.1 Definition
1.5.4 Temperament
1.7 Sociocultural Viewpoint
1.7.1 Early Deprivation and trauma
1.8 Let's Sum It Up
1.1 Introduction
Abnormal psychology also called psychopathology deals with
understanding the nature, causes, and treatment of mental disorders. This
field of psychology surrounds us every day, one hears of it through
newspapers, on the web or in a movie. Some commonly known disorders
are depression, schizophrenia, phobias and panic attacks. The issues of
abnormal psychology capture our interest, demand our attention, and
trigger our concern.
1.2 Objectives
On Completion of this unit, you will:
 Understand the meaning of abnormal behaviour
 Know how abnormal behaviour was conceived in the past
 Understand different viewpoints of abnormal behaviour
Self-Instructional Material
1
Abnormal Psychology 1.3 Meaning
NOTES 1.3.1 Definition
According to the DSM 5, a mental disorder is defined as a syndrome that is
present in an individual and that involves clinically significant disturbance
in behaviour, emotional regulation, or cognitive functioning. These
disturbances are thought to reflect a dysfunction in biological,
psychological or developmental processes that are necessary for mental
functioning. Thus, abnormality is associated with significant decrease in
social, occupational and other activities that are important for human
functioning.
The more that someone has a difficulty in the following areas, the more
likely that they have a mental disorder.
If people suffer from psychological pain we can consider this as an
indication of abnormality. For example, people with depression clearly
report being distressed. However there can be instances where worry is
common and normal, such as when you have to study for a test. Therefore,
although subjective distress may be an element of abnormality, in many
cases it is neither a sufficient condition nor a necessary condition for
abnormality.
Maladaptive behaviour is often an indicator for abnormality. It interferes
with our ability to enjoy our occupations and relationships. A depressed
person may withdraw from family and friends.
If something is statistically rare and undesirable we are more likely to
consider it abnormal than something that is statistically common but
undesirable. But this has to be understood right, for example, severe
intellectual disability is considered abnormal while being a genius or being
rude is not an abnormality.
Breaking cultural rules, laws, norms and moral standards may indicate
signs of abnormality. Much depends on the degree of violation of the rule.
Parking in the wrong spot may be against the law but it is not abnormal
while a mother killing her children is a sign of abnormal behaviour.
When someone violates an unwritten social rule that causes discomfort to
someone else, it may be considered abnormal. If a stranger decides to sit
next to you in an empty bus, you will be uncomfortable. But again, much
depends on circumstances.
Irrational and unpredictable behaviour makes no sense and can indicate
possible abnormality.The most important factor is our evaluation of
whether the person can control their behaviour.
It is quite reasonable to think that a person who can pose as a danger to
themselves or other people has an abnormality .Psychologists are required
to hospitalize such people and alert the police.
One must note that no single indicator is sufficient in and of itself to
determine abnormality.
2
Check your Progress – 1 Abnormal Psychology
Note: a. Write your answer in the space given below
NOTES
b. Compare your answer with those given at the end of the unit.
1. Name the indicators of abnormality.
2. Define mental disorders according to the DSM 5.

Throughout history the dominant social, economic and religious views
have had a great influence on how people perceived abnormal behaviour.
In the ancient world superstitious explanations for mental disorders were
popular. In the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries it was widely believed that
mental disorders were attributed by demonic possessions.
However, Hippocrates denied that Gods and demons caused illnesses and
insisted that mental disorders had natural causes and required proper
treatment. He also believed that dreams are important to understand the
patients’ personality. He also recognised the importance of environment for
mental health and thus removed some patients from their families.
The Greek and Roman were among the few to treat people with mental
disorders with appropriate care. They provided pleasant surroundings with
constant activities like parties, dances and massages. They also followed
the principle of contrariiscontrarius (opposite by opposite). For example,
having their patient drink chilled wine while taking a warm bath. Chinese
physician, Chung Ching conducted treatments that were similar to
Hippocrates. Other references to mental health disorders were also made in
the Indian texts of CharakaSamhitha and Sushruta Samhita.
In Europe during the Middle age and Renaissance period, there was a
general movement away from superstitions and toward reasoned scientific
studies. Mental asylums were created in the 16th century, however, it lead
to the isolation and maltreatment of the patients. Some patients were
displayed to the public in return for money. Slowly by the eighteenth
century efforts were made for the better care of patients by providing them
with better living conditions and humane treatment.
In the 19th and 20th century rapid growth of abnormal psychology was
observed. This can be because of the growth of technology and scientific
advancements. Thus the treatment of individuals with mental illnesses was
advanced. Because of the works of several renowned psychologists like
Pavlov and Freud, the gradual acceptance of patients with mental illnesses
as people who need care and attention, was possible. Successful application
of biomedical methods to disorders and the growth of scientific research
into the biological, psychological and sociocultural roots of abnormal
behaviour were observed.
3
Abnormal Psychology Check your Progress – 2
NOTES
3. What were Hippocrates’ contributions to psychopathology?
4. Describe the methods used by the Greeks and Romans to treat

people with mental disorders.

The biological viewpoint focuses on mental disorders as diseases whose
primary symptoms are cognitive, behavioural and emotional in nature.
Disorders are thus viewed as abnormalities in the nervous system,
endocrine system.
The four categories of the biological viewpoint include:
Genes are very long molecules of DNA that we inherit from our parents.
Genes are present in fibrous structures called the chromosomes. There is
substantial evidence that most mental disorders show at least some genetic
influence. Abnormalities in the structure of chromosomes can be associated
with major disorders. Anomalies in the sex chromosome may cause
abnormal sexual behaviours. Generally disorders are influenced by several
genes, thus no single gene anomaly can cause a mental disorder because of
their small effects. Genes tend to indirectly influence behaviour, they can
get ‘turned on’ or ‘turned off’ in response to the environment.
Subtle deficiencies of brain can cause brain disorders. This has been
discovered due to the advancement in technology and brain scans to study
the function and structure of the brain. The brain has an ability to change
its organization and function in response to pre and post natal experiences,
stress, diet, disease and other environmental conditions. This ability is
called plasticity. The brain is immensely affected by the experiences of
young infants and children. The plastic nature of the brain can be beneficial
or detrimental based on an individuals’ experiences.
Neurotransmitters are chemical substances that are released by neurons in
order to pass messages to other neurons. There are different kinds of
neurotransmitters; some can cause a neural impulse while others can inhibit
an impulse.
● Norepinephrine plays an important role in emergency responses to
dangerous and stressful situations.
● Dopamine influences pleasure and cognitive processing and has
been implicated in schizophrenia.
● Serotonin is responsible for the way we think and process
information thus it plays an important role in emotional disorders
like anxiety and depression
● GABA is an inhibitory neurotransmitter, thus it is used to reduce
anxiety and other emotional states.
Hormones are chemicals that are secreted directly into the bloodstream by
Self-Instructional Material endocrine glands. They cause the flight or fight response, physical growth
4
and other physical expressions of mental states. Malfunctioning in Abnormal Psychology
hormone release can cause various forms of psychopathology such as
NOTES
depression and post-traumatic stress disorder.
1.5.4 Temperament
Temperament refers to a child’s reactivity and characteristic ways of self-
regulation. Temperament is believed to be biologically programmed.
Temperament causes differences in emotional and arousal responses to
various situations. Early temperament is thought to be the basis of our
personality. Not surprisingly temperament may also cause the development
for various psychopathologies later in life. Children who are fearful and
very anxious may become behaviourally inhibited as they grow older.
In general there are many more psychological interpretations of abnormal
behaviour than biological perspectives. It reflects a wide range of opinions
on how to understand human motives, desires, thoughts and perceptions.
The psychosocial perspective can be further subdivided into three different
perspectives:
This perspective emphasizes the role of unconscious motives and thoughts
that govern behaviour of human beings. According to this perspective
abnormal behaviour is because of the hurtful memories, forbidden desires
and repressed experiences in the unconscious mind. The unconscious
continues to express itself in dreams, fantasies and slips of tongue. When
such unconscious material is brought to the consciousness it can lead to
irrational and maladaptive behaviour. Sigmund Freud is considered the
founder of the psychoanalytic school of thought.
The behavioural perspective emerged as a reaction against the unscientific
methods of the psychodynamic approach. Behavioural scientists believed
that the study of subjective experiences cannot be tested by other
investigators. They resorted to laboratory research rather than clinical
practice. Behaviorists focus on the effects of environmental conditions
when subjected to various stimuli. The central theme of this perspective is
learning- the modification of behaviour based on its consequences.
This approach focused on cognitive processes and their impact on
behaviour. It involved the study of information processing mechanisms like
attention, memory, thinking, planning and decision making. Thus, the
cognitive behavioural perspective on abnormal behaviour generally focuses
on how thoughts and information processing can become distorted and
leads to maladaptive emotions and behaviour.
Check your Progress – 3
5. What is a gene?
6. What are the categories of explanation of abnormal behaviour from

the biological viewpoint?
5
Abnormal Psychology 1.7 Sociocultural Viewpoint
NOTES According to this viewpoint our life experiences and interaction with the
society help us face challenges resourcefully and may lead to resilience
during stress in the future. Unfortunately some of our experiences as a
child may be unhelpful and may influence us later in life. Social factors are
influences in the environment that consists of unpredictable and
uncontrollable negative events.
Different social factors that can have a detrimental effect on a child’s
socioemotional development are listed below.
1.7.1Early Deprivation and trauma
Children who do not receive adequate food, shelter, love and attention may
be left with deep and irreversible psychological scars. This kind of
treatment is usually observed in foster homes and other institutions for
children. Sometimes deprivation can occur in families where the parents
suffer from mental disorders themselves thus are unwilling to provide care
to the child.
Deviations in parenting can also have profound impacts on a child’s ability
to cope with life’s difficulties. This may cause the child to be vulnerable to
various forms of psychopathology. For example, children who are anxious,
irritable and impulsive may cause the parents to become anxious and
irritable thus further worsening the condition of the child. Parenting styles
like authoritarian and neglectful parents may result in aggressive behaviour
of children and cause them to resort to drug and alcohol abuse.
A disturbed family structure serves as a high risk factor to
psychopathology. Marital discord can affect the offspring’s marriage and
may lead to negative interaction styles. Divorce of parents and have
traumatic effects on the child. It can lead to a feeling of insecurity,
disloyalty and delinquency.
The lower economic class have a higher incidence of mental and physical
disorders. For example antisocial disorder occurs in the lower
socioeconomic backgrounds thrice as often as it occurs in better economic
conditions. People with mental disorders are usually prejudiced and slide
down the economic ladder because of the lack of opportunities.
Unemployment, financial hardships, self-devaluation and emotional
distress is associated with enhanced chance of psychopathology.
Other social factors that can cause abnormal behaviors include prejudice,
discrimination and strained relationship among peers.
Cultural variables such as over and undercontrolledbehaviour can also
contribute to mental disorders. Although many serious mental disorders are
fairly universal, the form some mental disorders take varies widely among
different cultures.
1.8 Let's Sum It Up
Understanding of abnormal behaviour has not evolved smoothly or
uniformly over the centuries; the steps have been uneven, with gaps in
between. Central to the field of abnormal psychology is knowing the
6
causes which might help in prevention and reversal of conditions that led to Abnormal Psychology
them or maintain them. Different viewpoints explain the potential causes of
NOTES
abnormal behaviour. In recent years, we have come to recognize the need
for an integrative biopsychosocial model that acknowledges the biological,
psychological and sociocultural factors all interact and play a role in
psychopathology and treatment.
1. Define abnormality.
2. Briefly explain the various indicators of an abnormality.
3. Give an account of the historical conceptions of abnormal behaviour.
4. Explain in detail the psychosocial and sociocultural viewpoint of
psychopathology.
5. What is the meaning of temperament?
1.10 ANSWERS TO CHECK YOUR PROGRESS
1. Subjective distress, maladaptiveness, statistical deviance, violations of
the standards of society, social discomfort, irrationality and
unpredictability and dangerousness.
2. Abnormal psychology also called psychopathology deals with

understanding the nature, causes, and treatment of mental disorders.
3. Hippocrates denied that Gods and demons caused illnesses and insisted
that mental disorders had natural causes and required proper treatment. He
also believed that dreams are important to understand the patients’
personality. He also recognized the importance of environment for mental
health and thus removed some patients from their families.
4. The Greek and Roman were among the few to treat people with mental
disorders with appropriate care. They provided pleasant surroundings with
constant activities like parties, dances and massages. They also followed
the principle of contrariiscontrarius (opposite by opposite).For example
having their patient drink chilled wine while taking a warm bath
5. Genes are very long molecules of DNA that we inherit from our parents.
Genes are present in fibrous structures called chromosomes.
6. Genetic Vulnerabilities, brain dysfunction and neuroplasticity

imbalances of neurotransmitters and hormones and temperament are the
components of the biological viewpoint.
7. It reflects a wide range of opinions on how to understand human

motives, desires, thoughts and perceptions.
1. Butcher, J.N. (2014). Abnormal Psychology. New Delhi: Pearson
Education.
2. Butcher, J.N., Hooley, J. M., Mineka, S &Dwivedi, C.B. (2017).
Abnormal Psychology 16th ed. Noida: Pearson.
3. Sarason, G.I. &Sarason, R.V. (2007). Abnormal Psychology: The
Problem of Maladaptive Behaviour (II Edition). Pearson Education,
Inc. and Dorling Kindersley Publication Inc.
7
Anxiety Disorders
UNIT II: ANXIETY DISORDERS
NOTES Structure
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Objectives
2.3.2.4 Cognitive biases
2.3.3 Treatments
2.4.3 Treatments
2.5 Social Phobia
2.5.1.3 Being exposed to uncontrollable and unpredictable
2.5.3 Treatments
2.6.1.3 A sense of mastery: A possibility of immunizing against
anxiety
2.6.3 Treatments
2.7.3 Treatments
2.8 Let Us Sum Up
2.1 Introduction
Self-Instructional Material Anxiety is a general feeling of apprehension of possible danger. Anxiety
disorders create many personal, economic, and health problems for those
8
who are affected. It is one of the earliest disorders that a person may be Anxiety Disorders
affected with. It is more oriented to the future and is much more than fear.
NOTES
Fear occurs when the person is in immediate danger. Anxiety involves a
negative mood, worry about future possible threats and self-preoccupation.
At a behavioural level anxiety might create a strong tendency to avoid
situations where danger is perceived.
A phobia is a persistent and disproportionate fear of some specific object or
situation that presents little or no actual danger and yet leads to a great deal
of avoidance of these fearful situations.
2.2 Objectives
On completion of this unit you will be able to:
 Understand the different types of anxiety disorders and their nature
 Know the causes of various anxiety disorders
 Be aware of the different treatments available for different types of
anxiety disorders
Panic disorder is characterized by the occurrence of panic attacks that
often seem out of the blue (from nowhere). According to the DSM 5 the
person must have experienced recurrent, unexpected attacks and must have
been persistently concerned about having another attack for at least a
month (anticipatory attack).Panic attacks are fairly brief but intense, the
symptoms develop abruptly and the attacks subside within 20-30 minutes.
They sometimes occur in the least expected situations like while relaxing
or during sleep (nocturnal panic)
Agoraphobia is a type of anxiety disorder in which the person fears and
avoids places or situations that might cause panic and feel trapped, helpless
or embarrassed. In agoraphobia the most commonly feared and avoided
situations include streets and crowded places. Standing in line becomes
especially difficult. People with agoraphobia are also frightened by their
own sensations and thus avoid activities that might arouse them such as
exercise or watching a scary movie. Agoraphobia is a frequent
complication of panic disorder.
Panic disorders generally begin in the 20’s to 40's but sometimes may
begin in the late teenage. It is twice as prevalent in women as in men. Men
who are prone to panic disorders are more likely to self-medicate with
nicotine or alcohol in order to cope with the disorder. This is because of the
societal expectations laid on men.
The vast majority of people with panic disorders have at least one
comorbid disorder such as generalized anxiety disorder, social phobia,
specific phobia or depression. Panic disorder is also a strong predictor for
suicidal behaviour. The first attack usually follows a feeling of distress or
high stress.
The biological causal factors of panic disorders include genetic factors,
panic in the brain caused by the amygdala and certain biochemical
abnormalities.
1. Define agoraphobia.
2. What are the biological causal factors of panic disorders? Self-Instructional Material
Anxiety Disorders 2.3.2 Psychological causal factors
NOTES
This theory proposes that people with panic disorders are hypersensitive to
their body sensations and are highly likely to interpret their sensations
extremely seriously.
This theory suggests that the initial panic attacks become associated with
initially neural internal and external cues through conditioning.
A belief that certain bodily symptoms are dangerous and can cause anxiety
can increase the likelihood of panic attacks. Greater effects of panic
symptoms are seen in people with low perceived control.
2.3.2.4 Cognitive biases and maintenance of panic can increase a person's
probability of having a panic disorder.
2.3.3 Treatments
Treatments include behavioural and cognitive behavioural therapy and
different categories of medication.
A specific phobia is a strong and persistent fear triggered by a specific
object or situation and leads to significant distress and/or impairment in the
person's ability to function. They often show an immediate fear response
that resembles a panic attack. Blood-injection-injury phobia can induce
unique physiological responses to the sight of blood or injury. People show
an initial acceleration followed by a dramatic drop in both heart rate and
blood pressure. This is accompanied with fainting, dizziness and nausea.
Nomophobia is when an individual experiences discomfort, anxiety and
nervousness when they are unable to use their phones. This phobia is
highly prevalent in the youth.
Phobias are more common in women than in men. Animal phobias
generally affect women and begin in early childhood.

3. Name some specific phobias.
4. What is a specific phobia?
According to this viewpoint phobias represent a defense against anxiety
that occurs due to repressed impulses from the id.Because these impulses
are too dangerous to know they are exerted into an external object that is
symbolic to the real impulse
When a neutral stimulus is paired with a traumatic or painful event,
phobias can be learned through classical conditioning. Vicarious
conditioning occurs when a person develops a phobia simply by watching
other phobic people behave fearfully with the phobic object.
Genetics and a person's temperament can affect the possibility of acquiring
Self-Instructional Material a phobia. Behaviourally inhibited toddlers at 21 months of age are at a
higher risk of developing multiple specific phobias by age 7-8 yrs.
10
2.4.3 Treatments Anxiety Disorders
The most effective treatment is exposure therapy which is a form of
NOTES
behaviour therapy that involves controlled exposure to the stimulus that
elicits the phobic fear. One variant of this procedure is called participant
modelling in which the therapist calmly models ways of interacting with
the phobic stimulus or situation. This enables the client to learn that the
stimulus is not threatening. For small animal phobias, flying phobia,
claustrophobia and blood injury phobia, exposure is often highly effective
when administered in a single long session.
2.5 Social Phobia
Social anxiety disorder or social phobia is the disabling fear of one or more
specific social situations. Examples include urinating in a public restroom,
public speaking, writing or eating in public. A person fear that they may be
exposed to negative comments or may act in a humiliating or embarrassing
manner. People with social phobia either avoid these situations or endure
them with great distress. Performance situations (public speaking) or non-
performance situations (eating in public) are the two subtypes of social
phobia.
Approximately 12 percent of the population meets the category for social
phobia at some poi8nt in their lives. Social phobia is more common in
women than men. It typically begins around adolescence or early
adulthood. In one study it was observed approximately 12.8 percent of
social phobia occurred in high school students with depression and less
academic performance.
Social phobias generally originate from simple instances of direct or
vicarious classical conditioning such as such as experiencing a perceived
social defeat, or witnessing the target of anger or criticism. A history of
severe teasing during childhood can cause social phobia.
Social phobia is the fear of the members of one’s own species. Social
phobia may be the byproduct of dominance hierarchies that are common
social arrangements in primates. Aggression between members can lead the
defeated individual to display submissive behaviour and fear.
2.5.1.3 Being exposed to uncontrollable and unpredictable stressful
events (such as parental separation, divorce, family conflict or sexual
abuse) may play an important role in social phobia.
Behavioural inhibition, increased neuroticism and introversion can cause
social phobia. Infants that are easily distressed, shy and avoidant are more
likely to become avoidant and fearful in their childhood.
2.5.3 Treatments
Cognitive and behavioural therapies as well as medications like
antidepressants can help treat social phobia.
Chronic, excessive and unreasonable anxiety causes generalized anxiety
disorder (GAD).This must occur on more days than not for a period of 6
months. It must be difficult to control and the worry must be about a
number of different things. People suffering from GAD live in a relatively
future oriented mood state, chronic tension, worry that they cannot control. Self-Instructional Material
The most common areas of worry include family, work, finances and
Anxiety Disorders personal illness. This can lead to a difficulty in making effective decisions.
Approximately 3 percent of the population suffers from GAD in any 1 year
NOTES
period. GAD is twice as common in women. Age of onset of GAD is
difficult to determine because people believe that they have had it all their
lives. GAD often occurs with other disorders like anxiety and mood
disorders, panic disorder and major depressive disorder.
5. Write about the age and onset of GAD.
6. What are the biological factors that affect social phobia?

According to this viewpoint generalized anxiety results from an
unconscious conflict between ego and id impulses that is not adequately
dealt with because the person’s defense mechanisms have either broken
down or have never developed. Freud believed that it was primarily sexual
or aggressive impulsive that were blocked by the defenses thus leading to
GAD.
Uncontrollable and unpredictable aversive events are much more stressful
than controllable and predictable aversive events, so it's not surprising that
the former create more fear and anxiety.
2.6.1.3 A sense of mastery: A possibility of immunizing against anxiety
A person's history of control over important aspects of their environment
strongly influences the reactions to anxiety provoking situations.
The worry process is now considered the central feature of GAD. Benefits
that people with GAD might derive from worrying includes: Superstitious
avoidance of catastrophe, avoidance of deeper emotional topics, coping and
preparation.
Some of worry’s effects are clearly negative. Worry is certainly not an
enjoyable activity and can actually lead to a greater sense of danger and
anxiety because of all the possible outcomes the worried person imagines.
People who worry about something are more likely to have more negative
intrusive thoughts.
People with GAD process threatening information with biases. Anxious
people tend to allocate their attention towards threatening cues when both
threatening and non-threatening cues are present in the environment. They
are more likely to think that bad things are going to happen.
Genetic factors, neurotransmitter and neurohormone abnormalities,
neurobiological differences between anxiety and panic are the biological
causal factors of GAD.
2.6.3 Treatments
Self-Instructional Material Medications such as Xanax or Klonopin are generally used or misused to
relieve tension and to relax. Yoga and meditation can help decrease
12
anxiety. Cognitive behavioural therapy has become increasingly effective. Anxiety Disorders
Training in deep muscle relaxation and cognitive restructuring can also
NOTES
help.
Obsessive Compulsive disorder is defined by the occurrence of both
obsessive thoughts and compulsive behaviours performed in an attempt to
neutralize such thoughts. Obsessions are persistent and recurrent intrusive
thoughts, images or impulses that are experienced as disturbing,
inappropriate and uncontrollable. Compulsions involve repetitive
behaviours that are performed as lengthy rituals (hand washing, checking,
putting things in order over and over again) Compulsions may involve
more covert mental rituals such as praying, counting or saying certain
words over and over again. The rituals can be mild or intense.
Approximately 2-3 percent of people meet the criteria for OCD at some
point in their lifetime and approximately 1 percent meet the criteria in a
given year. Divorced, separated and unemployed people are more likely to
have OCD.OCD typically begins in adolescence and or early adulthood but
may also occur ion children. In most cases OCD has a gradual onset and
once it becomes severe it tends to be long lasting. OCD often co occurs
with anxiety disorders like social phobia, panic disorder, GAD and PTSD.
Neutral stimuli become associated with frightening thoughts or experiences
through classical conditioning and thus elicit anxiety. Once having made
this connection people might believe that performing rituals might decrease
their anxiety. This model predicts that exposure to fearful situations or
objects can decrease OCD.
The preparedness concept considers the evolutionary adaptive nature of
fear and anxiety. OCD have obsessions and compulsions focused on dirt,
contamination and other potentially dangerous situations that may have
deep evolutionary roots.
When most people attempt to suppress unwanted thoughts they sometimes
experience an increase in the same thoughts. Thought suppression lead to
the general increase in OCD symptoms.
Genetic factors, brain abnormalities and neurotransmitter abnormalities can
cause OCD.
2.7.3 Treatments
Behavioural and cognitive behavioral therapy as well as medications like
clomipramine can help in the treatment of OCD.
2.8 Let Us Sum Up
Anxiety disorders are believed to be acquired through conditioning or other
learning mechanisms. However, some people are more vulnerable than
others to acquiring such responses (due to temperamental or experiential
factors). We also seem to have an evolutionarily based preparedness to
acquire readily fears of objects or situations that posed a threat to our
ancestors.
Many people with anxiety disorders are unaware of the treatment options
available to them. Because of the prevalence of this condition, people Self-Instructional Material
Anxiety Disorders should be made aware of the different treatment options, pros and cons and
make an informed decision to find relief from anxiety symptoms.
NOTES
1. Define anxiety.
2. What is agoraphobia?
3. Define OCD and state its causal factors.
4. Write a note on social phobia.
5. What is the most effective treatment for specific phobias?
2.10 Answers To Check Your Progress
1. Agoraphobia is a type of anxiety disorder in which the person fears and
avoids places or situations that might cause panic and feel trapped, helpless
or embarrassed. In agoraphobia the most commonly feared and avoided
situations include streets and crowded places.
2. The biological causal factors of panic disorders include genetic factors,
panic in the brain caused by the amygdala and certain biochemical
abnormalities.
3. Claustrophobia, nomophobia and arachnophobia are examples of
different specific phobias.
4. A specific phobia is a strong and persistent fear triggered by a specific
object or situation and leads to significant distress and/or impairment in the
person's ability to function.
5. Approximately 3 percent of the population suffers from GAD in any 1
year period. GAD is twice as common in women. Age of onset of GAD is
difficult to determine because people believe that they have had it all their
lives.
6. Behavioural inhibition, increased neuroticism and introversion can cause
social phobia. Infants that are easily distressed, shy and avoidant are more
likely to become avoidant and fearful in their childhood.
Education.
14
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
UNIT - III SOMATOFORM AND
NOTES
DISSOCIATIVE DISORDERS
Structure
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Objectives
3.5 Conversion Disorder (Functional Neurological Symptom
Disorder):
3.7 Depersonalisation/Derealisation Disorder
3.10 Let’s Sum Up
3.1 Introduction
Sometimes we feel like walking in a daze, especially during times of stress.
At other times we may have felt that we weren’t really present in the
situation. These are examples of dissociating with the situation. Somatic
symptoms refers to physical sensations, experiences or movements (eg.,
pain, fatigue, nausea, dizziness etc.) Around 80% of the population says
that they have experienced such symptoms in the past week (Hiller et al,
2006). But when the concern about these symptoms are severe, and lead to
significant distress and impairment in their daily work and functioning, a
somatic symptom disorder may be diagnosed.
SOMATIC SYMPTOM DISORDER AND RELATED DISORDERS:
Soma means “body”. So people with Somatic Symptom Disorder
experience bodily symptoms that causes them significant psychological
distress and impairment. This includes bodily symptoms combined with
abnormal thought processes, feelings or behaviour as a response to these
symptoms. These symptoms are usually common and mostly go away by
itself. But in 25% of the cases these symptoms persist and prompt people to
visit a doctor. In almost half of the cases, there is no medical explanation
for the symptoms. Many people are satisfied when the tests come back
negative. But a few of them persist in visiting the doctor for their physical
symptoms sure that there’s something wrong with them.
3.2 Objectives
By the end of this unit you’ll be able to:
 List the four disorders included under Somatic symptom and related
disorder in DSM-5.
● Explain Causes and Treatment of Somatic Symptom Disorder.
● Summarize Conversion Disorder.
● Describe Dissociative Disorders.
● Describe the treatments for Dissociative Disorder.
Somatic Symptom Disorder is regarded as the most major diagnosis in its
category. This has the diagnosis of previous disorders that were considered Self-Instructional Material
15
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders separate in DSM-IV. The old disorders of Hypochondriasis, Somatization
NOTES
Disorder and Pain Disorder have all disappeared in the DSM-V. Most of the
people who would have been diagnosed within any of the above disorders
will now be diagnosed with Somatic Symptom Disorder. (For Example:
75% of the people who were previously diagnosed with Hypochondriasis
will now be diagnosed with Somatic Symptom Disorder).
Diagnosis: (DSM-V)
1. Individuals must have chronic somatic symptoms that are
distressing to them.
2. They must also have excessive thoughts, feelings or behaviours
related to somatic symptoms or associated health concerns. Like,
continuous thoughts about the seriousness of their symptoms, high
level of anxiety about their health, and lots of time spent on
worrying and concern of these symptoms.
3. Although one somatic symptom will not be continuously present,
the state of being symptomatic (having at least one symptom)
remains persistently (typically more than 6 months).
DSM-5 criteria for this diagnosis may result in a wide variety of people
being assigned the same diagnosis. Estimates suggest that this diagnosis
could be applied to 5-7 % of the general population. This is because it has
very loose definition and is flawed according to the previous chair of task
force of DSM-IV. This is because in this DSM-5, only one symptom is
required. So, if any person is distressed from any physical problem (that
involves a single symptom and is medically explained) the diagnosis of
somatic symptom disorder is possible.
Causes:
Earlier it was thought that the symptoms developed due to unresolved or
unacceptable unconscious conflicts as part of a defense mechanism. As
somatic symptom disorder is a new diagnosis under DSM-5it has not been
investigated much. Nonetheless, cognitive-behavioural perspectives on
hypochondriasis and somatoform disorders (which are part of this new
diagnosis) are most likely valid for this disorder too as the core features are
quite similar. First, the focus of attention is on the body and its changes
(hypervigilance and increased awareness of bodily changes). Second, the
person sees bodily sensations as somatic symptoms that are physical
symptoms attributed to illness. Third, the person worries excessively about
these symptoms (catastrophizing cognition can be seen). Fourth, the person
becomes distressed and seeks medical treatment for their perceived
physical problems.
Figure 3.1: Simplified Model of Somatic Symptom Disorder
16
People with this disorder tend to be hypersensitive to bodily changes. They Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
also experience these sensations an intense, disturbing and highly

NOTES
aversive. They also consider these symptoms as catastrophically fatal and
often overestimate the medical severity of their condition.
According to the information given above, it can be seen that somatic

symptom disorder is of both perception (of benign sensations) and
cognition. The individuals with this disorder mostly have an attentional

bias for illness-related information and they seem to label their physical
sensations as symptoms and perceive these symptoms as dangerous. Once
the misinterpretation sets in, they start looking for confirming evidence as
they seem to think that being healthy means being completely symptom-
free. They also have low expectations for their ability to cope up with an
illness. It is also believed that an individual’s past experiences with
illnesses (either personally or through media) can also set in dysfunctional
assumptions regarding illness and symptoms. An example of a
dysfunctional assumption: “Bodily changes are usually a sign of serious
disease, because every symptom should have an identifiable cause” (a sign
of top-down process).
Negative affect could be a risk-factor for this disorder. However, this alone
is not sufficient. Other characteristics like Absorption (a tendency to be
absorbed in one’s own experiences) and Alexithymia (a condition that is
characterized by having difficulties in identifying one’s feelings).People
who don’t have any medical condition tend to score high on these three
traits.
17
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
NOTES
They repeatedly seek medical advice for their symptoms and thus, their
medical costs are higher. High levels of functional impairments can be
common and many are severely disabled by their physical symptoms.
Patients with somatic symptom disorder seem to be most likely in female
and have high levels of comorbid depression and anxiety.
In DSM-IV, many who were diagnosed with hypochondriasis also reported

higher childhood sickness and missed a lot of school. Also, their families
tended to have an excessive amount of diseases while they were growing
up (which may have led to strong memories of pain and illness). It is
important to keep in mind that people with somatic symptom disorder are
not malingering- constantly faking symptoms to attain a certain goal. These
are people who actually experience physical problems that cause them
great concern. These may be caused by brain processes that occur below
their conscious awareness.
1. What is Somatic Symptom Disorder?
Treatment:
Cognitive Behavioural Model provides a good explanation for the causes
of this disorder. CBT (Cognitive Behavioural Therapy) might be a good
treatment approach for people with somatic symptom disorder. The
cognitive aspects of this method might help the person focus on assessing
their beliefs about illness and modifying misinterpretations of the bodily
sensations that they feel. The behavioural aspects may include making the
person focus on other parts of their body so that they can understand that
their selective attention might also play a role in their symptoms. This
approach also helps in reducing anxiety and depression levels. In a recent
study, patients reported considering alternative reasons for the presence of
symptoms (a headache doesn’t necessarily mean that they have a brain
tumor).
The duration of CBT is usually brief (6-16 sessions). These sessions can
also be in group format. Treatment programs can include relaxation
training, support and validation that the pain is real, scheduling daily
activities, cognitive restructuring and reinforcement of “no-pain”
behaviours (for patients with pain). In addition to all of this, pain-killers
and antidepressants reduce the amount of pain felt.
Illness anxiety disorder is also new to DSM-5. In this disorder people, have
high anxiety and distress about having or developing a serious illness but
there are very few or mild somatic symptoms. Estimates state that around
25% of people diagnosed with hypochondriasis will be diagnosed with
illness anxiety disorder. The remaining 75% of people will be diagnosed
with somatic symptom disorder.
The key difference between somatic symptom disorder and illness anxiety
disorder is that when hypochondriasis is accompanied by significant
18
somatic symptoms then it is classified under somatic symptom disorder and Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
when hypochondriasis is without any physical symptoms (or very mild

NOTES
symptoms), then diagnosis will be illness anxiety disorder.
3.5 Conversion Disorder (Functional Neurological Symptom
Disorder):
Another disorder that can come under somatic symptoms and related
disorders is conversion disorder. Although this term conversion disorder is
new, earlier it was one of several disorders that came under hysteria.
This disorder is characterized by the presence of neurological symptoms in
the absence of a neurological diagnosis. To put it simply, the patient has
symptoms that strongly suggest medical or neurological deficits, butthe
pattern of symptoms is not consistent with known neurological disorder or
medical problem. Some examples include partial paralysis, blindness,
deafness, and episodes of limb shaking with the loss of consciousness that
resemble seizures. Keep in mind that this diagnosis can only be made after
medical and neurological tests. It is also important to emphasize that the
person is not faking the symptoms intentionally. On the other hand, a host
of psychological factors play a role because most of the episodes are
succeeded by emotional or interpersonal conflicts or stressors.
Early observations by Freud brought to light that most of the people
diagnosed with this showed a marked lack of concern or anxiety over their
health (they weren’t worried if they will lose their sight or if their arms will
be paralyzed) and la belle indifférence-French for “the beautiful
indifference” was the term to refer to it. But later research proved that only
20% of the patients feel this way. Hence, this term is no longer popularly
used (like it used to be) to refer to this disorder or explain this disorder.
Symptoms:
It is useful to think of all the symptoms under 4 categories:
1. Sensory
2. Motor
3. Seizures
4. Mixed of the three
1. Sensory symptoms or deficits:
Conversion disorder can involve any sensory modality (pathway). It can be
diagnosed as a conversion disorder because of how the symptoms in the
affected area are inconsistent with how the sensory pathways anatomically
work. Some common deficits are in the visual system (like tunnel vision
and blindness), auditory system (like deafness) or in the sensitivity to touch
(especially anesthesia). One of the most common is glove anaesthesia, in
which the person cannot feel the fingers in the hand that has the glove
worn, although the loss of sensation makes no sense anatomically.
With conversion blindness, the person reports not being able to see, but can
navigate correctly in a room full of objects. Similarly, a person reporting
conversion deafness says that they cannot hear but can orient themselves
when someone calls their name out. From both these we understand that
the sensory information is registered but is somehow screened from
conscious recognition (explicit perception).
2. Motor symptoms or deficits:
Motor conversion covers a large area of symptoms. Conversion paralysis is
mostly confined to one limb (arm or leg) and it’s usually a selective loss of
function in that area. For example, a person who cannot write with one arm
19
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders may be able to scratch with those same muscles or a person who abruptly
NOTES
wakes up from sleep may be able to use their “paralyzed” limb (for
example: the person cannot walk but can walk when there is an
emergency).
The most common speech-related conversion disorder is aphoniain which
then person can only talk in whispers but can cough normally. Another
common motor symptom is globus, which involves the sensation of a lump
in the throat.
3. Seizures:
This is a relatively common form of conversion symptoms in which the
person goes through epileptic-like seizures although they are not the true
seizures, as the patients usually do not have any EEG abnormality, loss of
memory or confusion after the episode. Patients with conversion seizures
show excessive thrashing about and writhing that is not seen in true
epileptic seizures.
Diagnosis:
The symptoms of conversion disorder look very similar to that of other
medical conditions so one should go through careful medical and
neurological testing to avoid misdiagnosis. Other criteria that should also
be considered when diagnosing are:
1. The frequency rate for the dysfunction to conform clearly to the
symptoms of the disease that is stimulated. There is no wasting
away of the limb that is “paralyzed” in conversion cases except in
long standing ones.
2. The nature of the dysfunction is highly selective. As mentioned
above, the “blind” people do not bump into obstacles or people and
the “paralyzed” limb has selective functions.
3. Under hypnosis or narcosis (a sleep-like state by using drugs), the
symptoms can be removed, shifted, or re-induced at the suggestion
of the therapist.
Causes:
Conversion disorder is said to develop in people under stressful conditions
or internal conflicts. Freud called it conversion hysteria in the belief that
this occurred due to the body’s repressed sexual needs. Thus, in his view,
the repressed desire threatens to become conscious, so the body
unconsciously converted it into physical symptoms, thereby allowing the
person to avoid the internal conflict. Freud noted two gains from having
this disorder: Primary gain would be the avoidance of intrapsychic
conflict and the Secondary gain would be the attention from loved ones.
Though Freud’s reasons are no longer valid, his clinical study on the gains
is still incorporated. There is some negative reinforcement that the person
receives from having physical disabilities, for example, to avoid stressful
situations and to gain attention from loved ones.
Given the weightage of importance to stressful life situations as the onset
of conversion disorder, it is unfortunate that the exact cause and timing for
these psychological stress factors is still unknown. But studies have shown
that the greater negative impact of previous life events, increase the
severity of the conversion disorder symptoms.
Treatment:
The best way to treat conversion disorder is very limited and only
based on a few well-controlled studies. Some hospitals use the behavioural
approach to treat patients with motor conversion in which specific
20
exercises for those limbs were involved and reinforcements were given for Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
their efforts. Any sort of negative reinforcement was removed to eliminate

NOTES
sources for secondary gain. Cognitive-Behaviour approach was used, some
used hypnosis, and there are some that consider hypnosis with other
therapeutic techniques can be useful.

2. What are the clinical features of conversion disorder?

The disorders discussed above assume that all the patients experience some
sort of physical symptom. But in this disorder, the person is faking
symptoms of a real disorder. In factitious disorder the person intentionally
produces psychological or physical symptoms, the goal being to obtain and
maintain a “sick role” for the attention and care of the family. The key
point to note is the deceptive behaviour is present even in the absence of
external rewards.
The difference between factitious disorder and malingering is that, in
factitious disorder the person receives no tangible external rewards. On the
other hand, a person who’s malingering is intentionally or grossly
exaggerating the symptoms of a disorder and is motivated by external
rewards, attention, avoiding work, military life etc,.
A dangerous variant of factitious disorder is factitious disorder imposed on
another (sometimes referred to as Munchausen’s syndrome by proxy).
Here, the person seeking medical help has intentionally produced a medical
or psychiatric illness (or the appearance of one) in another person. The
most common example is that of a mother producing an illness in her child,
by withholding food, adding blood to urine and so on. When the child is
hospitalized, the person might also tamper with the intravenous (IV) line
making the child sicker. This disorder may be suspected when there are
atypical lab reports, or frequent and urgent visits to the hospital. Most of
these people have extensive knowledge about medical problems and are
highly resistant to admitting that they are wrong.

3. What are the possible reasons for a person to deliberately pretend to have
medical problems?
DISSOCIATIVE DISORDERS:
Dissociative disorders are a group of conditions involving disruptions in a
person’s normally integrated functions of consciousness, memory, identity
or perception. The concept of dissociation was first promoted by French
neurologist Pierre Janet. We all dissociate at some point, mild dissociative
symptoms occur when we daydream and lose track of time, and also track
of what was going on, when we miss a part of a conversation that we are
engaged in. Dissociation only becomes pathological when then dissociative Self-Instructional Material
21
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders symptoms are perceived as ‘disruptive, invoking a loss of needed
NOTES
information, as producing discontinuity of experience’ or as ‘recurrent,
jarring involuntary intrusions into executive functioning and sense of self’.
Much of our mental life involves automatic non-conscious processes that
occur below the radar of self-awareness. Most of this extends to implicit
memory and implicit perception, by remembering things that they cannot
consciously recall (implicit memory) and respond to senses (implicit
perception) as if they have experienced this before. This type of
responding is common in people having conversion disorders (like the
person who is blind but can respond to certain visual stimuli).
In people with dissociative disorder this type of processing is interrupted
and not well-coordinated or integrated. When this happens, the person may
be unable to understand and access information in the forefront of their
conscious (such as their identity, or certain memories), that other people
can. The usual ongoing mental capacity seems to be interrupted, sometimes
for the sole purpose of preventing a severe psychological threat, which
brings with it the pathological symptoms that seem to be the key feature of
dissociative disorder.
Like somatic symptom disorder, dissociative disorders appears to also be a
way to avoid stress and anxiety of managing life problems that
overwhelmed then person’s coping mechanisms. In the case of DSM which
explains dissociative disorders, the person avoids stress by pathological
dissociation- in essence, by escaping from their autobiographical memory
or personal identity.
3.7 Depersonalisation/Derealisation Disorder:
In Derealisation one’s sense of the reality of the outside world is
temporarily lost and in Depersonalisation one’s sense of one’s own self
and one’s own reality is temporarily lost.
These are very common occurrences during/after panic attacks. As many as
50-74% of the general population have had mild experiences usually after
periods of severe stress, sleep deprivation, or sensory deprivation. But
when these episodes become persistent and recurrent and interfere with
normal functions then depersonalisation and derealisation disorder may be
diagnosed. The people diagnosed may feel a sense of them not belonging in
their own body, but floating somewhere. The one thing that distinguishes
this from psychotic disorders, is when the person is going through an
episode of depolarisation, reality testing (the knowledge of what is real and
unreal) remains intact.
Emotional experiences are known to be more attenuated or reduced in
people diagnosed with this disorder. When shown an emotional clip, the
participants with depersonalization, showed higher subjective and objective
memory fragmentation than the controls. Memory fragmentation is marked
by difficulties in coherent and accurate sequence of events, which shows
that time distortion, is key feature of depersonalization.
Occasional depersonalisation and derealisation symptoms are also
sometimes reported by people with schizophrenia, borderline personality
disorder, panic disorder and so on. But keep in mind that only recurrent or
persistent symptoms result in this disorder. Comorbid symptoms include
mood and anxiety disorders. Avoidant, borderline obsessive compulsive
disorders are elevated in people with depersonalisation and derealisation.
22
This disorder can begin in childhood, with a mean age of onset being 16 Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
years. Only a minority of people develop this disorder after 25.

NOTES
Treatment:
This disorder might be fairly resistant to treatment. Although, treatment
might work for the associated disorders of anxiety and depression. Many
types of antidepressant drugs have been tried with modest effects.
However, some don’t show a difference between a drug and a placebo. A
recent treatment that shows promise is rTMS (repetitive transcranial
magnetic stimulation) to the tempo-parietal region of the brain. After 3
weeks of treatment, half of the subjects showed significant reductions in
their episodes of depersonalization/derealisation.
Dissociative amnesia is mostly limited to the failure to recall certain
memories that are not part of normal forgetting. These gaps in memories
are usually due to traumatic and stressful events, like wartime combat,
catastrophic events or traumatic events. Amnesiac episodes can last for a
few days to years. In a typical dissociative amnesia, people cannot
remember certain aspects of their personal life history and facts about their
identity. Thus, these gaps are mostly, lack of recall of episodic (events)
memory or autobiographical (personal experience to events) memory.
Semantic and procedural memories seem intact.
In rare cases then person may still further retreat from real-life problems by
going into an amnesiac stage called Dissociative Fugue (fugue means
flight). It is a defense by flight- where the person might not only be
amnesiac but also retreat or run away from home surroundings. This is
accompanied by confusion of their personal identity or the assumption of a
new identity (but here the alternate identity do not alternate with the actual
identity, like they do in dissociative identity disorder). In the fugue state,
the individuals are unaware of memory loss prior to this, but the memories
made in this state remain intact. Also, their behaviour is normal during this
state and unlikely to be figured out. But their lifestyle in this state is
drastically different from their previous one. Days, months or years later,
when the person emerges from this state, they may be in an unfamiliar
environment doing unfamiliar things. Most of the cases with recovery only
recovered after constant questioning and reminders of who they are.
The patterns of dissociative amnesia are very similar to those in conversion
disorder. But unlike the latter in which the person copes up with being
physically weak and sick, in dissociative amnesia the person unconsciously
forgets the situation that is stressful or leaves the scene. The stress becomes
so intolerable that large chunks of their personality and their memories of
the stressful situation is suppressed.
Though its known that semantic memory is intact and only
autobiographical memory is compromised, some cases have shown that
implicit memory (cannot be expressed verbally) is intact. For example: A
German man in the United States has been wandering around in unfamiliar
streets after being shot and robbed. He eventually reached a motel and
asked to call the police as he could not remember his identity. He spoke
English with a German accent but denied that he spoke German. When
instructed in English he could do tasks well but could not follow
instructions when it was in German. In Spite of his extensive Self-Instructional Material
23
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders autobiographical and German language loss, he could perform well in
NOTES
memory tasks that were implicit. His ability to learn German-English word
pairs were higher than the controls, suggesting that his implicit knowledge
of the German language was intact.
Treatment:
It is important that the person remains in a safe environment. Sometimes,
removing them from what they perceive as a threatening situation might
help in the spontaneous recovery of their memory. Hypnosis, as well as
drugs like benzodiazepines, barbiturates, is often used to facilitate recall, or
repressed memories.
Dissociative Identity Disorder (DID) formerly known as Multiple
Personality Disorder, is a dramatic dissociative disorder. There have been
subtle changes in the criteria for diagnosing DID in DSM-5, with the
requirements being the person should have two or more distinct personality
changes with recurrent bouts of amnesia, the personality changes can be
self-reported or witnessed by another person.
Another inclusion in the DSM-5 is the inclusion of trance which is said to
occur when a person experiences a marked alteration in their state of
consciousness or identity. Associated with a narrowing awareness of the
surroundings or stereotyped behaviours that are out of one’s own control.
A possessive trance is similar except the alteration of consciousness is that
of a new identity and the person is said to have been possessed by a spirit.
It is common to see amnesia in both the types of trances. When trances are
entered voluntarily, for religious or spiritual reasons, these are not
pathological. But when it occurs involuntarily, and causes distress in
everyday functioning, it is a critical problem.
In a typical case of DID, each identity might have a different name and
different personal history, or self-image. Some identities maybe completely
distinct from each other and others partially distinct. In most cases, the one
identity that appears most frequently is known as the host identity and the
other identities (that are not the host) are known as alter identities. Alter
identities may differ in their age, name, sex, handedness, handwriting and
so on. Needs and behaviours inhibited by the host can be noted and seen in
one or more alter identities. Alter identities also take control at different
point of times and switches typically occur very quickly (in a few seconds),
although gradual and slow switches can also occur. When switches occur,
amnesia of events that happened to them when another identity took place
can be seen, but this amnesia is not symmetrical. Some identities may
know more about the alters than other identities. DID usually starts in
childhood and is more commonly seen in females than males. Females also
have more alters than males.
Interidentity memory is a key feature of DID. Here, implicit memory can
be shared by the identities, even when complete amnesia was reported by
the identity before a memory task that tests this (implicit memory).
Additional symptoms: Depression, self-harm behaviours, erratic
behaviour, headaches, hallucinations, posttraumatic symptoms, and other
amnesia and fugue symptoms.A study conducted showed that PTSD is
mostly seen along with DID.
Causal Factors:
24
Mostly DID follow a series of childhood abuse and trauma. Studies among Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders
the prevalence of childhood abuse as a causal factor for DID have shown
NOTES
that abuse and trauma in childhood might have played a role.
There are two theories that many professionals believe in for the onset of
DID:
1. Posttraumatic theory: The vast majority of patients report
memories of severe and horrific tales of abuse in childhood.
According to this theory, DID is coping mechanism of the child
against that traumatic memory. Lacking other sources of escape, the
child dissociates and escapes into fantasy. If the child is fantasy-
prone the child may remain in the same state and thus accept
different identities.
2. Socio-cognitive Theory: According to this theory, it develops
when a highly suggestible person learns to adopt and enact different
people and overtime learn to integrate them into their own lives.
Important to note is that this theory does not suggest that the person
does this intentionally or consciously.
Treatment:
There has been no conclusive research on the best way to treat a patient
with DID. Most therapists goal is to integrate the other alter identities to
that of the host. But there is resistance of the patients with DID, who
consider dissociation as a protective measure. If integration occurs
successfully, then there is a unified personality, although partial integration
is common. Treatment generally improves the functional and symptom
improvement of the person.
The treatment of DID is psychodynamic and insight-oriented, mostly
focusing on overcoming the trauma or conflicts that led to the disorder.
Most of the patients are hypnotizable and can easily recover past traumatic
memories of childhood, they can be made aware that the dangers that they
faced are no longer present (but keep in mind that patients who are
hypnotized can be easily influenced so the recalled memories may not have
actually happened). Most therapists can make contact with the alter
identities in this hypnotized state. Successful negotiation between all the
alter identities and host identity, is a critical feature that the therapist has to
develop along with treatment process. In general, it has been found that for
the treatment to be successful, it should last longer (spanning years)
especially if it is a severe case.
4. What is Depersonalisation/ Derealisation disorder?
5. How is Dissociative Amnesia different from normal retrograde
or anterograde amnesia?
6. What is DID?
3.10 Let’s Sum Up
Somatic symptom and related disorders included disorders that focused on
the extreme distress caused by the patient by physical and somatic
symptoms that they catastrophically assess. These included: Somatic
symptom disorder, Illness anxiety disorder, Factitious disorder and
Conversion disorder. Dissociative disorders focused on the
unconsciousness that disrupts and does not let the conscious mind access
25
Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders information (memory).These included: Depersonalization/ Derealisation,
NOTES
Dissociative amnesia, Dissociative identity disorder.
1. Write a note on somatic symptom disorder.
2. Describe dissociative disorders.
3. What are the symptoms of conversion disorder?
4. Write a note on factitious disorder.
1.Somatic symptom disorder is an integration of hypochondriasis,
somatization diorder and pain disorder. It involves the catastrophic reasons
behind somatic symptoms (physical ain/symptoms) and lack of normal
functioning due to the distress over their health.
2. Conversion disorder involves patterns of symptoms or deficits, that
affect sensory or voluntary motor functions. Although it sounds like a
medical condition, it is not observed in neurological and medical tests.
Patients with this disorder show very little anxiety to their disorder and it’s
commonly referred to as la belle indifference.
3. A person might fake symptoms of an illness for monetary gain,
sympathy, affection and care from a loved one.
4.Depersonalisation- One’s sense of one’s own self and one’s own reality
is temporarily lost.
Derealisation- One’s sense of the reality of the outside world is
temporarily lost.
5. Retrograde amnesia refers to the inability to recall memories of the
past.
Anterograde amnesia refers to the inability of the brain to no longer form
new memories.
Dissociative amnesia is limited to the failure to recall previously stored
personal information (retrograde amnesia) when that failure cannot be
explained by normal forgetting. It is usually limited to mostly episodic and
autobiographical memory traces.
6. DID stands for Dissociative Identity Disorder. This disorder results in
people dissociating themselves into many identities (also known as alters,
with different personalities) after possibly a traumatic or stressful event in
their life.
Education.
26
Personality Disorders
UNIT IV: PERSONALITY DISORDERS
NOTES
Structure
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Objectives
4.4 Types
4.4.3 CLUSTER “C” PERSONALITY DISORDERS
4.5 Causal Factors In Personality Disorder
4.6 Treatment:
4.9 Causal Factors:
4.10 Treatment:
4.11 Let Us Sum Up:
4.1 Introduction:
Each of us has a personality—a set of uniquely expressed characteristics
that influence our behaviors, emotions, thoughts, and interactions. Our
particular characteristics, often called personality traits, lead us to react in
fairly predictable ways as we move through life. Yet our personalities are
also flexible. We learn from experience. As we interact with our
surroundings, we try out various responses to see which feel better and
which are more effective. This is a flexibility that people who suffer from a
personality disorder usually do not have. People with a personality disorder
display an enduring, rigid pattern of inner experience and outward behavior
that impairs their sense of self, emotional experiences, goals, capacity for
empathy, and/or capacity for intimacy. Put another way, they have
personality traits that are much more extreme and dysfunctional than those
of most other people in their culture, leading to significant problems and
psychological pain for themselves or others.
▸ PERSONALITY DISORDER DEFINITION:
An enduring, rigid pattern of inner experience and outward behavior that
repeatedly impairs a person’s sense of self, emotional experiences, goals,
capacity for empathy, and/ or capacity for intimacy.
The symptoms of personality disorders last for years and typically become
recognizable in adolescence or early adulthood, although some start during
childhood. These disorders are among the most difficult psychological
disorders to treat. Many people with the disorders are not even aware of
their personality problems and fail to trace their difficulties to their
maladaptive style of thinking and behaving.
It is common for a person with a personality disorder to also suffer from
another disorder, a relationship called comorbidity. For example, many
people with avoidant personality disorder, who fearfully shy away from all
relationships, may also display social anxiety disorder. Perhaps avoidant
personality disorder predisposes people to develop social anxiety disorder.
Or perhaps social anxiety disorder sets the stage for the personality Self-Instructional Material
27
Personality Disorders disorder. Then again, some biological factor may create a predisposition to
NOTES
both the personality disorder and the anxiety disorder. Whatever the reason
for the relationship, research indicates that the presence of a personality
disorder complicates a person’s chances for a successful recovery from
other psychological problems.
4.2 Objectives:
At the end of the unit you will:
 Know the difference between Personality disorders and other
disorders.
 Gain knowledge about different Personality disorders
 Understand about Antisocial disorder.
4.3 Clinical Features:

According to DSM 5 criteria for diagnosing a personality disorder, the
person’s enduring pattern of behavior must be pervasive and inflexible, as
well as stable and long duration. It must also cause either clinically
significant distress or impairment in functioning and must be manifested in
at least two of the following areas: cognition, affectivity, interpersonal
functioning, or impulse control. Other people tend to find the behavior of
the individuals with personality disorders confusing, exasperating,
unpredictable, and to varying degrees as unacceptable. Personality
disorders typically do not stem from debilitating reactions to stress just like
PTSD or many cases major depression. These disorders stem from largely
from the gradual development of inflexible and distorted personality and
behavioural patterns that result in maladaptive way of thinking, perceiving
things about the world.
4.4 Types:
The types are grouped into three categories or clusters:
The first cluster contains personality disorders that cause “odd” and
“suspiciousness” behavior.
DISORDERS:Paranoid Personality Disorder, Schizoid Personality
Disorder, Schizotypal Personality Disorder and Antisocial
Personality Disorder.
The second cluster causes “dramatic, emotional and impulsive” behavior.
DISORDERS:Borderline Personality Disorder, Histrionic
Personality Disorder and Narcissistic Personality Disorder.
The third is a cluster that causes behavior driven by high anxiety.
DISORDERS: Avoidant Personality Disorder, Dependent
Personality Disorder and
Obsessive compulsive Personality Disorder Personality Disorder.
The cluster of “odd” personality disorders consists of the paranoid,
schizoid, and schizotypal personality disorders.
People with these disorders typically have odd or eccentric behaviors that
are similar to but not as extensive as those seen in schizophrenia, including
extreme suspiciousness, social withdrawal, and peculiar ways of thinking
and perceiving things. Such behaviors often leave the person isolated.
Some clinicians believe that these personality disorders are related to
schizophrenia. In fact, schizotypal personality disorder is listed twice in
28
DSM-5—as one of the schizophrenia spectrum disorders and as one of the Personality Disorders
personality disorders (APA, 2013). Directly related or not, people with an

NOTES
odd cluster personality disorder often qualify for an additional diagnosis of
schizophrenia or have close relatives with schizophrenia.
Clinicians have learned much about the symptoms of the odd cluster
personality disorders but have not been so successful in determining their
causes or how to treat them. People with these disorders rarely seek
treatment.
PARANOID PERSONALITY DISORDER:
People with paranoid personality disorder deeply distrust other people and
are suspicious of their motives. Because they believe that everyone intends
them harm, they avoid close relationships. They find “hidden” meanings,
which are usually belittling or threatening, in everything.
Quick to challenge the loyalty or trustworthiness of acquaintances, people
with paranoid personality disorder remain cold and distant. A woman
might avoid confiding in anyone, for example, for fear of being hurt, or a
husband might, without any justification, persist in questioning his wife’s
faithfulness. Although inaccurate and inappropriate, their suspicions are
not usually delusional; the ideas are not so bizarre or so firmly held as to
clearly remove the individuals from reality. They may experience transient
psychotic symptoms. People with this disorder are critical of weakness and
fault in others, particularly at work. They are unable to recognize their own
mistakes, though, and are extremely sensitive to criticism. They often
blame others for the things that go wrong in their lives, and they repeatedly
bear grudge. They do appear to be at elevated liability for schizophrenia.
CAUSAL FACTOR:
Some have argued for partial genetic transmission that may link the
disorder to the schizophrenia, but results examining this issue are
inconsistent. There is modest genetic liability that may occur through the
heritability of high levels of antagonism (low agreeableness) and
neuroticism (angry-hostility) which are the primary traits in paranoid
personality disorder. Psychosocial causal factors that are suspected to play
a role includes parental neglect or abuse and exposure to violent adults,
although any links between early adverse experiences and adult paranoid
personality disorders are clearly not specific to this one disorder.
TREATMENT FOR PARANOID PERSONALITY DISORDER
People with paranoid personality disorder do not typically see themselves
as needing help, and few come to treatment willingly. Furthermore, many
who are in treatment view the role of patient as inferior and distrust and
rebel against their therapists. Thus it is not surprising that therapy for this
disorder, as for most other personality disorders, has limited effect and
moves very slowly.
Object relations therapists—the psychodynamic therapists who give center
stage to relationships—try to see past the patient’s anger and work on what
they view as his or her deep wish for a satisfying relationship.
Cognitive and behavioral techniques have also been used to treat people
with paranoid personality disorder and are often combined into an
integrated cognitive-behavioral approach. On the behavioral side, therapists
help clients to master anxiety-reduction techniques and to improve their
skills at solving interpersonal problems. On the cognitive side, therapists
guide the clients to develop more realistic interpretations of other people’s
29
Personality Disorders words and actions and to become more aware of other people’s points of
NOTES
view. Antipsychotic drug therapy seems to be of limited help.
1. What is the difference between paranoid personality with
paranoid schizophrenia?
2. What are the primary causes of paranoid personality disorder?
SCHIZOID PERSONALITY DISORDER:
People with schizoid personality disorder persistently avoid and are
removed from social relationships and demonstrate little in the way of
emotion. Like people with paranoid personality disorder, they do not have
close ties with other people. The reason they avoid social contact, however,
has nothing to do with paranoid feelings of distrust or suspicion; it is
because they genuinely prefer to be alone. They are usually unable to form
social relationships and usually lack much interest in doing so.
They seek out jobs that require little or no contact with others. They have
solitary interests. When necessary, they can form work relations to a
degree, but they prefer to keep to themselves. Many live by themselves as
well. Not surprisingly, their social skills tend to be weak. If they marry,
their lack of interest in intimacy may create marital or family problems.
People with schizoid personality disorder focus mainly on themselves and
are generally unaffected by praise or criticism. They rarely show any
feelings, expressing neither joy nor anger. They seem to have no need for
attention or acceptance; are typically viewed as cold, humorless, or dull.
They generally show apathetic mood. In terms of five factor model, they
show extremely high levels of introversion (especially low on warmth,
gregariousness, and positive emotions) and they are low on openness to
feeling (one facet of openness to experience). Men are slightly more likely
to experience it than are women, and men may also be more impaired by it.
CAUSAL FACTORS:
Like Paranoid personality disorder, Schizoid personality disorder has not
been the focus of such research attention. This is hardly surprising since
people with schizoid personality disorder are not exactly the people we
might expect to volunteer for a research study. It is considered to be a
likely precursor to the development of schizophrenia, but this viewpoint
has been challenged and any genetic link that may exist is very modest.
Schizoid personality traits have also been shown to have only modest
heritability. Some theorists have suggested that the severe disruption in
sociability seen in schizoid personality disorder may be due to severe
impairment in an underlying affiliative system. Cognitive theorists propose
that individuals with schizoid personality disorder exhibit cool and aloof
behaviour because of maladaptive underlying schemas that lead them to
view themselves as self-sufficient loners to view others as intrusive.
TREATMENT FOR SCHIZOID PERSONALITY DISORDER:
Their social withdrawal prevents most people with schizoid personality
disorder from entering therapy unless some other disorder, such as
alcoholism, makes treatment necessary. These clients are likely to remain
emotionally distant from the therapist, seem not to care about their
treatment, and make limited progress at best.
30
Cognitive-behavioral therapists have sometimes been able to help people Personality Disorders
with this disorder experience more positive emotions and more satisfying
NOTES
social interactions. On the cognitive end, their techniques include
presenting clients with lists of emotions to think about or having them
write down and remember pleasurable experiences. On the behavioral end,
therapists have sometimes had success teaching social skills to such clients,
using role-playing, exposure techniques, and homework assignments as
tools. Group therapy is apparently useful when it offers a safe setting for
social contact, although people with schizoid personality disorder may
resist pressure to take part. As with paranoid personality disorder, drug
therapy seems to offer limited help.
SCHIZOTYPAL PERSONALITY DISORDER:
People with schizotypal personality disorder display a range of
interpersonal problems marked by extreme discomfort in close
relationships, very odd patterns of thinking and perceiving, and behavioral
eccentricities. They have cognitive and perceptual distortions, as well as
oddities and eccentricities in their communication and behavior. They are
excessively introverted. Anxious around others, they seek isolation and
have few close friends. Some feel intensely lonely.
The disorder is more severe than the paranoid and schizoid personality
disorders. Under extreme stress, they may experience transient psychotic
symptoms. The symptoms may include ideas of reference—beliefs that
unrelated events pertain to them in some important way—and bodily
illusions, such as sensing an external “force” or presence. A number of
people with this disorder see themselves as having special extrasensory
abilities, and some believe that they have magical control over others.
Examples of schizotypal eccentricities include repeatedly arranging cans to
align their labels, organizing closets extensively, or wearing an odd
assortment of clothing. The emotions of these individuals may be
inappropriate, flat, or humorless. People with schizotypal personality
disorder often have great difficulty keeping their attention focused.
Oddities in thinking, speech, and other behaviors are the most stable
characteristics of schizotypal personality disorder. Many researchers
conceptualize schizotypal personality disorder as attenuated form of
schizophrenia. According to five factor model (introversion and
neuroticism), the other aspects related to cognitive and perceptual
distortions are not adequately explained by this model. This final
pathological trait is psychoticism, which consists of three facets: unusual
beliefs and experiences, eccentricity, and cognitive and perceptual
dysregulation.
Correspondingly, their conversation is typically vague, even sprinkled with
loose associations. They are likely to choose undemanding jobs in which
they can work below their capacity and are not required to interact with
other people. Surveys suggest that 3.9 percent of adults—slightly more
males than females display schizotypal personality disorder.
CAUSAL FACTORS:
In the original proposal of DSM-5, Schizotypal personality was the only
categorical disorder retained from Cluster A. The heritability of this
disorder is moderate. The biological associations of Schizotypal personality
disorder with schizophrenia are remarkable. A number of studies on
patients, as well as on college students, with schizotypal personality
disorder have shown the same deficit in the ability to track a moving target
31
Personality Disorders visually that is found in schizophrenia. They also show numerous mild
NOTES
impairments in cognitive functioning including deficits in their ability to
sustain attention and deficits in working memory. In addition, individuals
with Schizotypal personality disorder, like patients with Schizophrenia,
show deficits in their ability to inhibit attention to a second stimulus that
rapidly follows presentation of first stimulus. For example, normal
individuals presented with weak auditory stimulus about 0.1 second before
loud sound that elicits a startle response show a smaller startle response
show a smaller startle response than those not presented with weak
auditory stimulus first. This normal inhibitory effect is reduced in people
with schizotypal personality disorder and with schizophrenia, a
phenomenon that may be related to high levels of distractibility and
difficulty staying focused. They also show language abnormalities. A
genetic relationship to schizophrenia has long been suspected. This
disorder appears to be a part of spectrum of liability for schizophrenia that
often occurs in some of the first degree relatives of people with
schizophrenia. Teenagers who have schizotypal personality disorder have
been shown to be at increased risk for developing schizophrenia and
schizophrenias spectrum disorder in adulthood. It has also been proposed
that there is second subtype of schizotypal personality disorder that is not
genetically linked to schizophrenia. This subtype is characterized by
cognitive and perceptual deficits and is instead linked to a history of
childhood abuse and early trauma. In adolescence it has been associated
with elevated exposure to stressful life events.
TREATMENT FOR SCHIZOTYPAL PERSONALITY DISORDER
Therapy is as difficult in cases of schizotypal personality disorder as it is in
cases of paranoid and schizoid personality disorders. Most therapists agree
on the need to help these clients “reconnect” with the world and recognize
the limits of their thinking and their powers. The therapists may thus try to
set clear limits—for example, by requiring punctuality—and work on
helping the clients recognize where their views end and those of the
therapist begin. Other therapy goals are to increase positive social contacts,
ease loneliness, reduce overstimulation, and help the individuals become
more aware of their personal feelings.
Cognitive-behavioral therapists further combine cognitive and behavioral
techniques to help people with schizotypal personality disorder function
more effectively. Using cognitive interventions, they try to teach clients to
evaluate their unusual thoughts or perceptions objectively and to ignore the
inappropriate ones. Therapists may keep track of clients’ odd or magical
predictions, for example, and later point out their inaccuracy. When clients
are speaking and begin to digress, the therapists might ask them to sum up
what they are trying to say. In addition, specific behavioral methods, such
as speech lessons, social skills training, and tips on appropriate dress and
manners, have sometimes helped clients learn to blend in better with and be
more comfortable around others. Antipsychotic drugs have been given to
people with schizotypal personality disorder, again because of the
disorder’s similarity to schizophrenia. In low doses the drugs appear to
have helped some people, usually by reducing certain of their thought
problems.
32
Check your Progress – 2 Personality Disorders
Note: a. Write your answer in the space given below NOTES

3. Which personality disorder is known as the attenuated form of

schizophrenia?
The cluster of “dramatic” personality disorders includes the antisocial,
borderline, histrionic, and narcissistic personality disorders. The behaviors
of people with these problems are so dramatic, emotional, or erratic that it
is almost impossible for them to have relationships that are truly giving and
satisfying. These personality disorders are more commonly diagnosed than
the others. However, only the antisocial and borderline personality
disorders have received much study, partly because they create so many
problems for other people. The causes of the disorders, like those of the
odd personality disorders, are not well understood. Treatments range from
ineffective to moderately effective.
HISTRIONIC PERSONALITY DISORDER:
People with histrionic personality disorder, once called hysterical
personality disorder, are extremely emotional—they are typically described
as “emotionally charged”—and continually seek to be the center of
attention. Their exaggerated moods and neediness can complicate life.
Approval and praise are their lifeblood; they must have others present to
witness their exaggerated emotional states. Vain, self-centered, demanding,
and unable to delay gratification for long, they overreact to any minor
event that gets in the way of their quest for attention. Some make suicide
attempts, often to manipulate others. People with histrionic personality
disorder may draw attention to themselves by exaggerating their physical
illnesses or fatigues. They may also behave very provocatively and try to
achieve their goals through sexual seduction. These qualities do not lead to
stable and satisfying relationships because others tire of providing this
level of attention. Most obsess over how they look and how others will
perceive them, often wearing bright, eye catching clothes. They exaggerate
the depth of their relationships, considering themselves to be the intimate
friends of people who see them as no more than casual acquaintances.
Often they become involved with romantic partners who may be exciting
but who do not treat them well. This disorder was once believed to be more
common in women than in men. Research, however, has revealed gender
bias in past diagnoses. When evaluating case studies of people with a
mixture of histrionic and antisocial traits, clinicians in several studies gave
a diagnosis of histrionic personality disorder to women more than men, this
is because it -involves maladaptive variants of female related traits such as
over dramatization, vanity, seductiveness, and over-concern about physical
appearance Surveys suggest that 1.8 percent of adults have this personality
disorder, with males and females equally affected.
CAUSAL FACTORS:
Very little systematic research has been conducted on histrionic personality
disorder, perhaps as a result of the difficulty researchers have had in
differentiating it from other personality disorders and/or because many do
not believe it is a valid diagnosis. Reflecting this, histrionic personality
disorder was one of the four diagnoses that was recommended for removal
33
Personality Disorders in DSM-5. Histrionic personality disorder is highly comorbid with
NOTES
borderline, antisocial, narcissistic and dependent personality disorder
diagnoses.
There is some genetic link with antisocial personality disorder, the idea
being that there may be some common underlying predisposition that is
more likely to be manifested in women a histrionic personality disorder and
in men as antisocial personality disorder. Histrionic personality disorder
may be characterized as involving extreme versions of two common,
normal personality traits, extraversion and to a lesser extent, neuroticism-
two normal personality traits known to have a partial genetic basis. In
terms of the five-factor model, the very high levels of extraversion of
patients with histrionic personality disorder include high levels of
gregariousness, excitement seeking, and positive emotions. Their high
levels of neuroticism, particularly involve the depression and self-
consciousness facets; they are also high on openness to fantasies. Cognitive
theorists emphasize the importance of maladaptive schemas revolving
around the need for attention to validate self-worth.
TREATMENT FOR HISTRIONIC PERSONALITY DISORDER
People with histrionic personality disorder are more likely than those with
most other personality disorders to seek out treatment on their own.
Working with them can be very difficult, however, because of the
demands, tantrums, and seductiveness they are likely to deploy. Another
problem is that these clients may pretend to have important insights or to
change during treatment merely to please the therapist. To head off such
problems, therapists must remain objective and maintain strict professional
boundaries. Cognitive therapists have tried to help people with this disorder
to change their belief that they are helpless and also to develop better, more
deliberate ways of thinking and solving problems. Psychodynamic therapy
and various group therapy formats have also been used. In all these
approaches, therapists ultimately aim to help the clients recognize their
excessive dependency, find inner satisfaction, and become more self-
reliant. Clinical case reports suggest that each of the approaches can be
useful. Drug therapy appears less successful except as a means of relieving
the depressive symptoms that some patients have.
ANTISOCIAL PERSONALITY BEHAVIOR:
Individuals with ASPD continually violate and show disregard for the
rights of others through deceitful, aggressive or antisocial behaviour,
typically without remorse or loyalty to anyone. They tend to be impulsive,
irritable and aggressive and to show a pattern of generally irresponsible
behaviour. This pattern of behaviour must have been occurring since the
age of 15, and before age 15 the person must had symptoms of conduct
disorder, a similar disorder occurring in children and young adolescents
who show persistent patterns of aggression toward people, animals,
destruction of property, deceitfulness, or theft.
4. Name the common, extreme versions of personality traits in Histrionic

Personality disorder.
34
BORDERLINE PERSONALITY DISORDER: Personality Disorders
People with borderline personality disorder display great instability,

NOTES
including major shifts in mood, an unstable self-image, and impulsivity.
Originally, it was most often used to refer to a condition that was thought
to occupy the “border” between neurotic and psychotic disorders. Later, it
was identified with schizotypal personality disorder. These characteristics
combine to make their relationships very unstable as well. People with
borderline personality disorder swing in and out of very depressive,
anxious, and irritable states that last anywhere from a few hours to a few
days or more. Their emotions seem to be always in conflict with the world
around them. They are prone to bouts of anger, which sometimes result in
physical aggression and violence. Just as often, however, they direct their
impulsive anger inward and inflict bodily harm on themselves. Many seem
troubled by deep feelings of emptiness.
Another important feature of BPD is impulsivity characterized by rapid
responding to environmental triggers without thinking about long term
consequences. Borderline personality disorder is a complex disorder, and it
is fast becoming one of the more common conditions seen in clinical
practice. Self-mutilation is another characteristic feature of this disorder.
Many of the patients who come to mental health emergency rooms are
people with this disorder who have intentionally hurt themselves. Their
impulsive, self-destructive activities may range from alcohol and substance
abuse to delinquency, unsafe sex, and reckless driving. Many engage in
self-injurious or self-mutilation behaviors, such as cutting or burning
themselves or banging their heads, such behaviors typically cause immense
physical suffering, but those with borderline personality disorder often feel
as if the physical discomfort offers relief from their emotional suffering. It
may serve as a distraction from their emotional or interpersonal upsets,
“snapping” them out of an “emotional overload”. Many try to hurt
themselves as a way of dealing with their chronic feelings of emptiness,
boredom, and identity confusion. Scars and bruises also may provide them
with a kind of concrete evidence of their emotional distress. Suicidal
threats and actions are also common. Studies suggest that around 75
percent of people with borderline personality disorder attempt suicide at
least once in their lives; as many as 10 percent actually commit suicide. It
is common for people with this disorder to enter clinical treatment by way
of the emergency room after a suicide attempt.
People with borderline personality disorder frequently form intense,
conflict-ridden relationships in which their feelings are not necessarily
shared by the other person. They may come to idealize another person’s
qualities and abilities after just a brief first encounter. They also may
violate the boundaries of relationships. They quickly feel rejected and may
become furious when their expectations are not met, yet they remain very
attached to the relationships. In fact, they have recurrent fears of impending
abandonment and frequently engage in frantic efforts to avoid real or
imagined separations from important people in their lives. Sometimes they
cut themselves or carry out other self -destructive acts to prevent partners
from leaving.
People with borderline personality disorder typically have dramatic identity
shifts. Because of this unstable sense of self, their goals, aspirations,
friends, and even sexual orientation may shift rapidly. They may at times
have no sense of themselves at all, leading to the feelings of emptiness
35
Personality Disorders described earlier. According to surveys, 5.9 percent of the adult population
NOTES
display borderline personality disorder. Close to 75 percent of the patients
who receive the diagnosis are women and have cognitive symptoms. These
include relatively short or transient episodes in which they appear to be out
of contact with reality and experience delusions or other psychotic like
symptoms such as hallucinations. The course of the disorder varies from
person to person. In the most common pattern, the person’s instability and
risk of suicide peak during young adulthood and then gradually wane with
advancing age. Given the chaotic and unstable relationships characteristic
of borderline personality disorder, it is not surprising that the disorder tends
to interfere with job performance even more than most other personality
disorders do.
CAUSAL FACTORS:
Research suggests that genetic factor play a significant role in the
development of BPD. This heritability may be partly a function of the fact
that personality traits of affective instability and impulsivity, which are
both very prominent in BPD, are themselves partially heritable. There is
some preliminary evidence that certain parts of the 5-HTT gene implicated
in depression also be associated with BPD. Recent research also suggests a
link with other gene involved in regulating dopamine transmission. People
with BPD often appear to be characterized by owed functioning of the
neurotransmitter serotonin, which is involved in inhibiting behavioural
responses. This may be why they show impulsive-aggressive behaviour, as
in acts of self-mutilation. Patients also show disturbances in the regulation
of noradrenergic neurotransmitters that are similar to those seen in chronic
stress conditions such as PTSD. In particular, their hyper responsive
noradrenergic system may be related to their hypersensitivity to
environmental changes.
Moreover, certain brain areas that ordinarily serve to inhibit aggressive
behavior when activated by serotonin seem to show decreased activation in
BPD. In addition, research suggests certain structural brain abnormalities in
BPD, including reductions in both hippocampal and amygdala volume,
features associated with aggression and impulsivity. Much theoretical and
research attention has also been directed to the role of psychosocial causal
factors in BPD. Although the vast majority of this research is retrospective
in nature relying on people’s memories of their past to discover the
antecedents of the disorder, two prospective community based studies have
shown that childhood adversity and maltreatment is linked to adult BPD.
People with this disorder, usually report a large number of negative-even
traumatic-events in childhood. These experiences include abuse and
neglect, and separation and loss.
Patients with BPD reported significantly higher rates of abuse than did
patients with other personality disorders. Overall, about 90 per cent of
patients with BPD reported some type of childhood abuse or neglect.
Majority of children who experience early abuse and neglect do not end up
with any serious personality disorders or other psychopathology. Most
studies, unfortunately cannot tell us that such early childhood trauma plays
a causal role. First, majority of evidence comes from retrospective self-
reports of individuals who are known for their exaggerated and distorted
views of other people. Second, childhood abuse is certainly not a specific
risk factor for borderline pathology because it is also reported at relatively
36
high rates with some other personality disorders as well as with other Personality Disorders
disorders such as dissociative identity disorder. Paris offered an interesting

NOTES
multidimensional diathesis stress theory of BPD. He proposes that people
who have high levels of two normal personality traits-impulsivity and
affective instability- may have a diathesis to develop BPD, but only in the
presence of certain psychological risk factors such as trauma, loss and
parental failure. When such non-specific pathological risk factors occur in
someone who is affectively unstable, he or she may become dysphoric and
labile and, if he or she is also impulsive, may engage in impulsive acting
out to cope with this negative mood. Thus, the dysphoria and impulsive
acts for each other. Paris also proposed that children who are impulsive and
unstable tend to be” difficult” or troublesome children. Moreover, if the
parents themselves have personality pathology, they may be especially
insensitive to their difficult child, leading to vicious cycle in which the
child’s problems are exacerbated by inadequate parenting, which in turn
leads to increased dysphoria, and so on. He further suggests that BPD may
be more prevalent in our society than in many other cultures, and more
prevalent today in the past, because of the weakening of family structure in
our society.
TREATMENT FOR BORDERLINE PERSONALITY DISORDER:
It appears that psychotherapy can eventually lead to some degree of
improvement for people with borderline personality disorder. It is,
however, extraordinarily difficult for a therapist to strike a balance between
empathizing with the borderline client’s dependency and anger and
challenging his or her way of thinking. The wildly fluctuating interpersonal
attitudes of clients with the disorder can also make it difficult for therapists
to establish collaborative working relationships with them. Moreover,
clients with borderline personality disorder may violate the boundaries of
the client–therapist relationship (for example, calling the therapist’s
emergency contact number to discuss matters of a less urgent nature). Over
the past two decades, an integrative treatment for borderline personality
disorder, called dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) has been receiving
considerable research support and is now considered the treatment of
choice in many clinical circles. DBT, grows largely from the cognitive-
behavioral treatment model. It includes a number of the same cognitive and
behavioral techniques that are applied to other disorders: homework
assignments, psychoeducation, the teaching of social and other skills,
modelling by the therapist, clear goal setting, reinforcements for
appropriate behaviors, and collaborative examinations by the client and
therapist of the client’s ways of thinking.
DBT also borrows heavily from the humanistic and contemporary
psychodynamic approaches, placing the client–therapist relationship itself
at the center of treatment interactions, making sure that appropriate
treatment boundaries are adhered to and providing an environment of
acceptance and validation of the client. Indeed, DBT therapists regularly
empathize with their borderline clients and with the emotional turmoil they
are experiencing, locate kernels of truth in the clients’ complaints or
demands, and examine alternative ways for them to address valid needs.
Antidepressant, antibipolar, antianxiety, and antipsychotic drugs have
helped calm the emotional and aggressive storms of some people with
borderline personality disorder. However, given the numerous suicide
37
Personality Disorders attempts by people with this disorder, the use of drugs on an outpatient
NOTES
basis is controversial.
5. What are the characteristics of Borderline personality disorder?

NARCISSISTIC PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with narcissistic personality disorder show an exaggerated
sense of self-importance, a preoccupation with being admired and a lack of
empathy for the feeling of others. Numerous studies support the notion of
two subtypes of narcissism: grandiose and vulnerable narcissism. People
with narcissistic personality disorder are generally grandiose, need much
admiration, and feel no empathy with others. According to DSM-V criteria,
manifested by traits related to grandiosity, aggression, and dominance.
Convinced of their own great success, power, or beauty, they expect
constant attention and admiration from those around them. They behave in
stereotypical ways to gain the acclaim and recognition they crave.
People with narcissistic personality disorder have a grandiose sense of self-
importance. They exaggerate their achievements and talents, expecting
others to recognize them as superior, and often appear arrogant. They are
very choosy about their friends and associates, believing that their
problems are unique and can be appreciated only by other “special,” high-
status people. Because of their charm, they often make favourable first
impressions, yet they can rarely maintain long-term relationships. People
with narcissistic personality disorder are seldom interested in the feelings
of others. They may not even be able to empathize with such feelings.
Many take advantage of other people to achieve their own ends, perhaps
partly out of envy; at the same time, they believe others envy them. Though
grandiose, some react to criticism or frustration with bouts of rage,
humiliation, or embitterment. Others may react with cold indifference. And
still others become extremely pessimistic and filled with depression. They
may have periods of zest that alternate with periods of disappointment.
Vulnerable narcissists have a very fragile and unstable sense of self-
esteem, and for these individuals, arrogance and condescension is merely a
façade for intense shame and hypersensitivity to rejection and criticism.
They have become completely absorbed and preoccupied with fantasies of
outstanding achievements but at the same time experience profound shame
about their ambitions. They may avoid interpersonal relationships due to
fear of rejection or criticism. In terms of the five-factor model, both
subtypes are associated with high levels of interpersonal antagonism/low
agreeableness, low altruism and tough mindedness. However, grandiose
narcissist is exceptionally low in certain facets of neuroticism and high in
extraversion. Vulnerable narcissist has very high levels of negatively
affectivity/neuroticism. Thus, spouse describes patients with either
grandiosity or vulnerability as being bossy, intolerant, cruel, demanding,
etc. Only those high on grandiosity were additionally described as being
aggressive, assertive, outspoken, with those high on vulnerability were
described as worrying, emotional, defensive, anxious, etc. Some may
fluctuate between both types. They also share another central trait- they are
38
unwilling or unable to take perspective of others. If they do not receive the Personality Disorders
validation they desire, they are inclined to be hypercritical or retaliatory.

NOTES
As many as 6.2 percent of adults display narcissistic personality disorder,
up to 75 percent of them men. It is thought to be rare. Narcissistic-type
behaviors and thoughts are common and normal among teenagers and do
not usually lead to adult narcissism.
CAUSAL FACTOR:
Little empirical data on the environmental and genetic factors involved in
the etiology of narcissistic personality disorder. A key finding has been that
the grandiose and vulnerable forms of narcissism have not generally been
associated with childhood abuse, neglect, or poor parenting. Indeed, there
is some evidence that grandiose narcissism is associated with parental
overvaluation. By contrast, vulnerable narcissism has been associated with
emotional, physical and sexual abuse, as well as parenting styles
characterized as intrusive, controlling and cold.
TREATMENT FOR NARCISSISTIC PERSONALITY DISORDER
Narcissistic personality disorder is one of the most difficult personality
patterns to treat because the clients are unable to acknowledge weaknesses,
to appreciate the effect of their behavior on others, or to incorporate
feedback from others. The clients who consult therapists usually do so
because of a related disorder such as depression. Once in treatment, the
clients may try to manipulate the therapist into supporting their sense of
superiority. Some also seem to project their grandiose attitudes onto their
therapists and develop a love-hate stance toward them. Psychodynamic
therapists seek to help people with this disorder recognize and work
through their basic insecurities and defenses. Cognitive therapists, focusing
on the self-centered thinking of such individuals, try to redirect the clients’
focus onto the opinions of others, teach them to interpret criticism more
rationally, increase their ability to empathize, and change their all-or-
nothing notions
4.4.3 CLUSTER “C” PERSONALITY DISORDERS:
The cluster of “anxious” personality disorders includes the avoidant,
dependent and obsessive-compulsive personality disorders. People with
these patterns typically display anxious and fearful behavior. Although
many of the symptoms of these personality disorders are similar to those of
the anxiety and depressive disorders, researchers have not usually found
direct links between this cluster and those disorders. As with most of the
other personality disorders, research support for the various explanations is
very limited. At the same time, treatments for these disorders appear to be
modestly to moderately helpful— considerably better than for other
personality disorders.
AVOIDANT PERSONALITY DISORDER:
People with avoidant personality disorder are very uncomfortable and
inhibited in social situations, overwhelmed by feelings of inadequacy, and
extremely sensitive to negative evaluation. They are so fearful of being
rejected that they give no one an opportunity to reject them—or to accept
them either. Unlike schizoid personalities, people with avoidant personality
disorder do not enjoy their aloneness. Feeling inept and socially inadequate
are the two most prevalent and stable features of avoidant personality
disorder.
At the center of this withdrawal lies not so much poor social skills as a
dread of criticism, disapproval, or rejection. They are timid and hesitant in
39
Personality Disorders social situations, afraid of saying something foolish or of embarrassing
NOTES
themselves by blushing or acting nervous. Even in intimate relationships
they express themselves very carefully, afraid of being shamed or
ridiculed.
People with this disorder believe themselves to be unappealing or inferior
to others. They exaggerate the potential difficulties of new situations, so
they seldom take risks or try out new activities. They usually have few or
no close friends, though they actually yearn for intimate relationships, and
frequently feel depressed and lonely. As a substitute, some develop an
inner world of fantasy and imagination. The key difference between the
loner with schizoid personality disorder and the loner who is an avoidant is
that the latter is shy, insecure and hypersensitive to criticism, whereas
someone with a schizoid personality disorder is more aloof, cold and
relatively indifferent to criticism. The person with avoidant personality also
desires interpersonal contact but avoids it for fear of rejection, whereas in
schizoid personality disorder there is a lack of desire or ability to form
social relationships.
Avoidant personality disorder is similar to social anxiety disorder, and
many people with one of these disorders also experience the other. The
similarities include a fear of humiliation and low confidence. Some
theorists believe that there is a key difference between the two disorders—
namely, that people with social anxiety disorder primarily fear social
circumstances, while people with the personality disorder tend to fear close
social relationships. Other theorists, however, believe that the two
disorders reflect the same psychopathology and should be combined.
A less clear distinction is that between avoidant personality disorder and
generalized social phobia. Numerous studies have found substantial
overlap between these disorders, which led to the conclusion that avoidant
personality disorder simply maybe somewhat more severe manifestation of
generalized social phobia. This is consistent with the findings that there are
cases of generalized social phobia without avoidant personality disorder
but very few cases of avoidant personality disorder without generalized
social phobia. Around 2.4 percent of adults have avoidant personality
disorder, men as frequently as women. Many children and teenagers are
also painfully shy and avoid other people, but this is usually just a normal
part of their development.
CAUSAL FACTOR:
Some research suggests that avoidant personality may have its origins in
innate “inhibited” temperament that leaves the infant and child shy and
inhibited in novel and ambiguous situations. A large twin study in Norway
has shown that traits prominent in avoidant personality disorder show a
modest genetic influence and that the genetic vulnerability for avoidant
personality disorder is at least partially shared with that for social phobia.
Moreover, there is also evidence that fear of being negatively evaluated,
which is prominent in avoidant personality disorder, is moderately
heritable; introversion and neuroticism are both elevated and they too are
moderately heritable. This genetically and biologically based inhibited
temperament may often serve as the diathesis that leads to avoidant
personality disorder in some children who experience emotional abuse,
rejection, or humiliation from parents who are not particularly affectionate.
40
Such abuse and rejection would be especially likely lead to anxious and Personality Disorders
fearful attachment patterns in temperamentally inhibited children.

NOTES
TREATMENT FOR AVOIDANT PERSONALITY DISORDER
People with avoidant personality disorder come to therapy in the hope of
finding acceptance and affection. Keeping them in treatment can be a
challenge, however, for many of them soon begin to avoid the sessions.
Often they distrust the therapist’s sincerity and start to fear his or her
rejection. Thus, as with several of the other personality disorders, a key
task of the therapist is to gain the person’s trust. Beyond building trust,
therapists tend to treat people with avoidant personality disorder much as
they treat people with social anxiety disorder and other anxiety disorders.
Such approaches have had at least modest success. Psychodynamic
therapists try to help clients recognize and resolve the unconscious
conflicts that may be operating. Cognitive therapists help them change their
distressing beliefs and thoughts and improve their self-image. Behavioral
therapists provide social skills training as well as exposure treatments that
require people to gradually increase their social contacts. Group therapy
formats, especially groups that follow cognitive and behavioral principles,
have the added advantage of providing clients with practice in social
interactions. Antianxiety and antidepressant drugs are sometimes useful in
reducing the social anxiety of people with the disorder, although the
symptoms may return when medication is stopped.
6. Which causal factor often acts as a diathesis that lead to avoidant
personality disorder?
DEPENDENT PERSONALITY DISORDER
People with dependent personality disorder have a pervasive, excessive
need to be taken care of. As a result, they are clinging and obedient, fearing
separation from their parent, spouse, or other person with whom they are in
a close relationship and show submissive behavior. They rely on others so
much that they cannot make the smallest decision for themselves.It is
normal and healthy to depend on others, but those with dependent
personality disorder constantly need assistance with even the simplest
matters and have extreme feelings of inadequacy and helplessness. Afraid
that they cannot care for themselves, they cling desperately to friends or
relatives. People with avoidant personality disorder have difficulty
initiating relationships. In contrast, people with dependent personality
disorder have difficulty with separation. They feel completely helpless and
devastated when a close relationship ends, and they quickly seek out
another relationship to fill the void. Many cling persistently to relationships
with partners who physically or psychologically abuse them. Lacking
confidence in their own ability and judgment, people with this disorder
seldom disagree with others and allow even important decisions to be made
for them. They may depend on a parent or spouse to decide where to live,
what job to have, and which neighbours to befriend. Because they so fear
rejection, they are overly sensitive to disapproval and keep trying to meet
other people’s wishes and expectations, even if it means volunteering for
unpleasant or demeaning tasks.
41
Personality Disorders Many people with dependent personality disorder feel distressed, lonely,
NOTES
and sad; often they dislike themselves. Thus they are at risk for depressive,
anxiety, and eating disorders. Their fear of separation and their feelings of
helplessness may leave them particularly prone to suicidal thoughts,
especially when they believe that a current relationship is about to end. For
years, clinicians have believed that more women than men display this
pattern, but some research suggests that the disorder is just as common in
men. This gender difference is not due to a sex bias in making diagnosis
but rather to higher prevalence in women of certain personality traits such
as neuroticism and agreeableness.
It is common for people with dependent personality disorder to have a
comorbid diagnosis of mood and anxiety disorder. Some features of
dependent disorder overlap with those of borderline, histrionic and
avoidant personality disorder but there are differences as well. For
example, both borderline and dependent personalities fear abandonment.
However, borderline personality, who usually has intense and stormy
relationships reacts with feelings of emptiness, rag if abandonment occurs,
whereas dependent personality reacts initially with submissiveness and
then finally with an urgent seeking of new relationship. Histrionic and
dependent personalities have strong needs for reassurance and approval,
but histrionic personality is much more gregarious, flamboyant, and
actively demanding of attention whereas dependent personality is more
docile and self-effacing. It is also hard to distinguish between dependent
and avoidant personality disorder. Dependent personality have great
difficulty in separating in relationships because they feel incompetent on
their own and have a need to be taken care, whereas, avoidant personalities
have trouble initiating relationship because they fear criticism or rejection.
We should also remember that avoidant personality occurs with dependent
personality disorder rather frequently. In terms of five-factor model,
dependent personality disorder is associated with high levels of neuroticism
and agreeableness.
CAUSAL FACTORS:
Some evidence suggests that there is a modest genetic influence on
dependent personality traits. Moreover, several other personality traits such
as neuroticism and agreeableness that are also prominent in dependent
personality disorder also have a genetic component. It is possible that
people with these partially genetically based predispositions to dependence
and anxiousness may be especially prone to the adverse effects of parents
who are authoritarian and overprotective. This might lead children to
believe that they are reliant on others for their own well-being and are
incompetent on their own. Cognitive theorists describe the underlying
maladaptive schemas for these individuals as involving core beliefs about
weakness and competence and needing others to survive.
TREATMENT FOR DEPENDENT PERSONALITY DISORDER
In therapy, people with dependent personality disorder usually place all
responsibility for their treatment and well-being on the clinician. Thus a
key task of therapy is to help patients accept responsibility for themselves.
Because the domineering behaviors of a spouse or parent may help foster a
patient’s symptoms, some clinicians suggest couple or family therapy as
well, or even separate therapy for the partner or parent. Treatment for
dependent personality disorder can be at least modestly helpful.
42
Psychodynamic therapy for this pattern focuses on many of the same issues Personality Disorders
as therapy for depressed people, including the transference of dependency

NOTES
needs onto the therapist. Cognitive-behavioral therapists combine the
behavioral and cognitive interventions to help the clients take control of
their lives. On the behavioral end, the therapists often provide assertiveness
training to help the individuals’ better express their own wishes in
relationships. On the cognitive end, the therapists also try to help the
clients challenge and change their assumptions of incompetence and
helplessness. Antidepressant drug therapy has been helpful for people
whose personality disorder is accompanied by depression. As with
avoidant personality disorder, a group therapy format can be helpful
because it provides opportunities for the client to receive support from a
number of peers rather than from a single dominant person. In addition,
group members may serve as models for one another as they practice better
ways to express feelings and solve problems.
7. What are the features which overlap between Histrionic and

Dependent personality disorder?
OBSESSIVE-COMPULSIVE PERSONALITY DISORDER
People with obsessive-compulsive personality disorder are so preoccupied
with order, perfection, and control that they lose all flexibility, openness,
and efficiency. Their concern for doing everything “right” impairs their
productivity.When faced with a task, people who have obsessive-
compulsive personality disorder may become so focused on organization
and details that they fail to grasp the point of the activity. As a result, their
work is often behind schedule (some seem unable to finish any job), and
they may neglect leisure activities and friendships. People with this
personality disorder set unreasonably high standards for themselves and
others. Their behavior extends well beyond the realm of conscientiousness.
They can never be satisfied with their performance, but they typically
refuse to seek help or to work with a team, convinced that others are too
careless or incompetent to do the job right. Because they are so afraid of
making mistakes, they may be reluctant to make decisions. They also tend
to be rigid and stubborn, particularly in their morals, ethics, and values.
They live by a strict personal code and use it as a yardstick for measuring
others. They may have trouble expressing much affection, and their
relationships are sometimes stiff and superficial. In addition, they are often
stingy with their time or money. Some cannot even throw away objects that
are worn out or useless. Research, indicates that rigidity, stubbornness and
perfectionism, as well as reluctance to delegate, are the most prevalent and
stable features of OCPD. According to surveys, as many as 7.9 per cent of
the adult population display obsessive-compulsive personality disorder,
with white, educated, married, and employed people receiving the
diagnosis most often. Men are twice as likely as women to display the
disorder. Many clinicians believe that obsessive-compulsive personality
disorder and obsessive-compulsive disorder are closely related. Certainly,
the two disorders share a number of features, and many people who suffer
from one of the disorders meet the diagnostic criteria for the other disorder.
43
Personality Disorders However, it is worth noting that people with the personality disorder are
NOTES
more likely to suffer from either major depressive disorder, generalized
anxiety disorder, or a substance use disorder than from obsessive
compulsive disorder. In fact, researchers have not consistently found a
specific link between obsessive-compulsive personality disorder and
obsessive-compulsive disorder.
It is important to note that people with OCPD do not have true obsessions
or compulsive rituals that are the source of extreme anxiety or distress in
people with OCD. People with OCPD have lifestyles characterized by over
conscientiousness, high neuroticism, inflexibility and perfectionism but
without the presence of true obsessions or compulsive rituals. Indeed, only
about 20% of patients with OCD have comorbid diagnosis of OCPD.
People with OCD are more likely to be diagnosed with avoidant or
dependent personality disorder than with OCPD and there are only three
symptoms of OCPD that seem to occur at elevated rates in people with
OCD relative to controls: Perfectionism, Preoccupation with details,
Hoarding.
CAUSAL FACTORS:
Theorists who take a five factor dimension approach to understanding
OCPD note that these individuals have excessively high levels of
conscientiousness. This leads to extreme devotion to work, perfectionism,
and excessive controlling behaviour. They are also high on assertiveness
and low on compliance. Another influential biological dimensional
approach- that of Cloninger- posits three primary dimensions of
personality: novelty seeking, reward dependence and harm avoidance.
Individuals with obsessive compulsive personalities have low levels of
novelty seeking and reward dependence but high levels of harm avoidance.
Recent research has also demonstrated that the traits of OCPD traits show a
modest genetic influence.
TREATMENTS FOR OBSESSIVE-COMPULSIVE PERSONALITY
DISORDER
People with obsessive-compulsive personality disorder do not usually
believe there is anything wrong with them. They therefore are not likely to
seek treatment unless they are also suffering from another disorder, most
frequently an anxiety disorder or depression, or unless someone close to
them insists that they get treatment. People with obsessive-compulsive
personality disorder often respond well to psychodynamic or cognitive
therapy. Psychodynamic therapists typically try to help these clients
recognize, experience, and accept their underlying feelings and insecurities
and perhaps take risks and accept their personal limitations. Cognitive
therapists focus on helping the clients to change their dichotomous
thinking, perfectionism, indecisiveness, procrastination, and chronic
worrying. A number of clinicians, report that people with obsessive-
compulsive personality disorder, like those with obsessive compulsive
disorder, respond well to serotonin-enhancing antidepressant drugs;
however, researchers have yet to study this issue fully.
44
Check your Progress – 7 Personality Disorders

8. What is the difference between OCD and OCPD?
4.5 Causal Factors In Personality Disorder:

There's no clear reason why some people develop a personality disorder
and others don't. Most researchers think that a complex mix of factors is
involved, such as:
THE ENVIRONMENT WE GROW UP IN:
The environment we grow up in and the quality of care we receive can
affect the way our personality develops. We may be more likely to develop
personality disorder if we've experienced: an unstable or chaotic family
life, such as living with a parent who is an alcoholic or who struggles to
manage a mental health problem, little or no support from caregiver, if we
experienced a traumatic event or situation, a lack of support or bad
experiences during our school life, in our peer group or wider community.
If we had a difficult childhood or experiences like these, we might have
developed certain beliefs about how people think and how relationships
work. We might have developed certain strategies for coping which aren't
helpful in our adult life.
Not everyone who experiences a traumatic situation will develop these
problems. The way we and others reacted to it, alongside the support and
care we received to help we cope, will have made a lot of difference.
Similarly, not everyone who develops a personality disorder will have had
a traumatic experience.
Many people who are diagnosed with borderline or schizotypal personality
disorder experienced sexual trauma or bullying during childhood.
Verbal abuse: Children who’ve suffered from insensitive parenting and
verbal abuse during childhood are three times more likely to suffer from
narcissistic personality disorder.
GENETIC FACTORS:
Some elements of our personality are inherited. We are born with different
temperaments – for example, babies vary in how active they are, their
attention span and how they adapt to change. Some experts believe
inheritance may play a part in the development of personality disorder.
Some malfunctioning genes might cause certain personality disorders.
Sensitivity to light, texture, noise and other stimuli might also cause a child
to develop anxious personalities during their teenage years and into
adulthood.
4.6 Treatment:
Personality disorders are generally difficult to treat, in part, because they
are, by definition relatively enduring, pervasive, and inflexible patterns of
behavior and inner experience. They are different goals of treatment like
reducing subjective distress, changing specific dysfunctional behaviours,
and changing whole patterns of behavior or the entire structure of the
personality.
In many cases, people with personality disorders enter treatment only at
someone else’s insistence and they often do not believe that need to
change. Moreover, those from the odd/eccentric Cluster A and the erratic Self-Instructional Material
45
Personality Disorders /dramatic Cluster B have general difficulties in forming and maintaining
NOTES
good relationships, including the therapist. For those from the
erratic/dramatic Cluster B, the pattern of acting out typical in their other
relationships is carried into the therapy session, and instead of dealing with
their problems at verbal level they may become angry at their therapist and
loudly disrupt the sessions. Non completion of treatment is a particular
problem in the treatment of personality disorders, as they usually drop out
of therapy. People with personality disorder have rigid, ingrained
personality trait that often lead to poor therapeutic relationships and
additionally make them resist doing the things that would help improve
their other conditions.
Sometimes described as “psychopaths” or “sociopaths,” people with
antisocial personality disorder persistently disregard and violate others’
rights. Aside from substance use disorders, this is the disorder most closely
linked to adult criminal behavior. DSM-5 stipulates that a person must be
at least 18 years of age to receive this diagnosis; however, most people
with antisocial personality disorder displayed some patterns of misbehavior
before they were 15, including truancy, running away, cruelty to animals or
people, and destroying property. People with antisocial personality disorder
lie repeatedly. Many cannot work consistently at a job; they are absent
frequently and are likely to quit their jobs altogether. Usually they are also
careless with money and frequently fail to pay their debts. They are often
impulsive, taking action without thinking of the consequences.
Correspondingly, they may be irritable, aggressive, and quick to start
fights. Many travel from place to place.
Recklessness is another common trait: people with antisocial personality
disorder have little regard for their own safety or for that of others, even
their children. They are self-centered as well, and are likely to have trouble
maintaining close relationships. Usually they develop a knack for gaining
personal profit at the expense of other people. Because the pain or damage
they cause seldom concerns them, clinicians commonly say that they lack a
moral conscience. They think of their victims as weak and deserving of
being conned, robbed, or even physically harmed.
Studies and clinical observations also indicate that people with antisocial
personality disorder have higher rates of alcoholism and other substance
use disorders than do the rest of the population. Perhaps intoxication and
substance misuse help trigger the development of antisocial personality
disorder by loosening a person’s inhibitions. Perhaps this personality
disorder somehow makes a person more prone to abuse substances. Or
perhaps antisocial personality disorder and substance use disorders both
have the same cause, such as a deep-seated need to take risks. Interestingly,
drug users with the personality disorder often cite the recreational aspects
of drug use as their reason for starting and continuing.
Many behavioral theorists have suggested that antisocial symptoms may be
learned through modelling, or imitation. As evidence, they point to the
higher rate of antisocial personality disorder found among the parents of
people with this disorder. Other behaviorists have suggested that some
parents unintentionally teach antisocial behavior by regularly rewarding a
child’s aggressive behavior. When the child misbehaves or becomes
46
violent in reaction to the parents’ requests or orders, for example, the Personality Disorders
parents may give in to restore peace. Without meaning to, they may be
NOTES
teaching the child to be stubborn and perhaps even violent.
The cognitive view says that people with antisocial personality disorder
hold attitudes that trivialize the importance of other people’s need. Such a
philosophy of life, some theorists suggest, may be far more common in our
society than people recognize. Cognitive theorists further propose that
people with this disorder have genuine difficulty recognizing points of
view or feelings other than their own. Finally, studies suggest that
biological factors may play an important role in antisocial personality
disorder.
Researchers have found that antisocial people, particularly those who are
highly impulsive and aggressive, have lower serotonin activity than other
people. As you’ll recall, both impulsivity and aggression also have been
linked to low serotonin activity in other kinds of studies, so the presence of
this biological factor in people with antisocial personality disorder is not
surprising.
Other studies indicate that individuals with this disorder display deficient
functioning in their frontal lobes, particularly in the prefrontal cortex.
Among other duties, this brain region helps people to plan and execute
realistic strategies and to have personal characteristics such as sympathy,
judgment, and empathy. These are, of course, all qualities found wanting in
people with antisocial personality disorder.
In yet another line of research, investigators have found that people with
antisocial personality disorder often feel less anxiety than other people, and
so lack a key ingredient for learning. This would help explain why they
have so much trouble learning from negative life experiences or tuning in
to the emotional cues of others. Why should people with antisocial
personality disorder experience less anxiety than other people? The answer
may lie once again in the biological realm. Research participants with the
disorder often respond to warnings or expectations of stress with low brain
and bodily arousal. Perhaps because of the low arousal, they easily tune out
threatening or emotional situations, and so are unaffected by them.
It could also be argued that because of their physical under arousal, people
with antisocial personality disorder would be more likely than other people
to take risks and seek thrills. That is, they may be drawn to antisocial
activity precisely because it meets an underlying biological need for more
excitement and arousal. In support of this idea, as you read earlier,
antisocial personality disorder often goes hand in hand with sensation-
seeking behavior.
PSYCHOPATHY AND ANTISOCIAL PERSONALITY DISORDER:
The use of the term “antisocial personality disorder” dates back only to
1980 when personality disorders first entered DSM III. However, many of
the central features of this disorder have long been labelled “psychopathy”
or “sociopathy”. Although several investigations identified the syndrome in
the 19th century using such terms as “moral insanity” the most
comprehensive early descriptions of psychopathy was made by Cleckley in
1940. In addition to the defining features noted in the DSM criteria,
psychopathy also includes such affective and interpersonal traits as lack of
empathy, inflated and arrogant self-appraisal, and glib and superficial
charm. However, much less attention has been paid to the validity of the
47
Personality Disorders ASPD diagnosis- that is, whether it measures a meaningful construct and
NOTES
whether that construct is the same as psychopathy.
TWO DIMENSIONS OF PSYCHOPATHY:
Research suggests that ASPD and Psychopathy are related but differ in
significant ways. Robert Hare developed a 20 item Psychopathy Checklist
Revised (PCL-R) as a way for clinicians and researchers to diagnose
psychopathy on the basis of Cleckley criteria following an extensive
interview and careful checking of past school, police and prison records.
Extensive research with this checklist has shown that there are two related
but separable dimensions of psychopathy.
The first dimension involves the affective and interpersonal core of the
disorder and reflects traits such as lack of guilt or remorse, callousness,
grandiose sense of self-worth, pathological lying.
The second dimension reflects behaviour- the aspects of psychopathy that
involve antisocial or impulsive acts, social deviance a well as need for
stimulation, poor behavior controls, irresponsibility, and a parasitic
lifestyle.
The second dimension is much more deeply related than the first to the
DSM diagnosis of ASPD. When comparisons have been made in prison
settings to determine what percentage of prison inmates qualify for a
diagnosis of psychopathy versus ASPD, it is typically found that about
70% to 80% qualify for a diagnosis of ASPD but only about 25% to 30%
meet the criteria for psychopathy. Only about half of imprisoned
individuals diagnosed with ASPD also meet the criteria for psychopathy,
but most imprisoned individuals with a diagnosis of psychopathy also meet
the criteria for ASPD. That is, a significant number of inmates show the
antisocial and aggressive behaviors necessary for a diagnosis of ASPD but
do not show enough selfish, callous, and exploitative behaviors to qualify
for a diagnosis of psychopathy.
The issues surrounding these diagnoses remain highly controversial. There
was considerable discussion by the DSM-IV criteria for ASPD to include
more of the traditional affective and interpersonal features of psychopathy.
However, in the end no official changes were made.
An additional concern about the current conceptualization of ASPD is that
it fails to include people who show many of the features of the first,
affective and interpersonal dimension of psychopathy but not as many
features of the second, antisocial dimension, or at least few enough that
these individuals do not generally get into trouble with the law. Cleckley
did not believe that aggressive behaviors were central to the concept of
psychopathy. This group might include, for example, unprincipled and
predatory business or financial professionals, manipulative lawyers,
crooked politicians. Unfortunately, because they are difficult to find to
study, little researches has been conducted on psychopathic people who
manage to stay out of correctional institutions.
Often charming, spontaneous, and likable on first acquaintance,
psychopaths are deceitful and manipulative, callously using others to
achieve their own ends. Many of them seem to live in a series of present
moments without consideration for the past or future. But also included in
48
this general category are hostile people are prone to act out impulses in Personality Disorders
remorseless and often senselessly violent ways.

NOTES
INADEQUATE CONSCIENCE DEVELOPMENT:
Psychopaths appear unable to understand and accept ethical values except
on a verbal level. They may glibly claim to adhere to high moral standards
that have no apparent connections with their behavior. In short, their
conscience development in severely retarded or nonexistent, and they
behave as though social regulations and laws do not apply to them. These
characteristics are most strongly related to interpersonal and affective core
of psychopathy. In spite of their stunted conscience development, their
intellectual development is typically normal. Nevertheless, intelligence is
one trait that has different relationships with two dimension of
psychopathy. The first, affective and interpersonal dimension is positively
related to verbal intelligence; the second, antisocial dimension is negatively
related to intelligence.
IRRESPONSIBLE AND IMPULSIVE BEHAVIOUR:
They learn to take rather than earn what they want. Prone to thrill seeking
and deviant and unconventional behavior, they often break the law
impulsively and without regard for the consequences. They seldom forgo
immediate pleasure for future gains and long range goals. These aspects of
psychopathy are most closely related to the second, antisocial dimension of
psychopathy.
Many studies have shown that antisocial personalities and some
psychopaths have high rates of alcohol abuse and dependence and other
substance abuse/ dependence disorders. Alcohol abuse is related only to
antisocial or deviant dimension of the PCL-R. Antisocial personalities also
have elevated rates of suicide, which are also associated with the second
dimension.
ABILITY TO IMPRESS AND EXPLOIT OTHERS:
Some psychopaths are superficially charming and likable, with a disarming
manner that easily wins new friends. They seem to have good insight into
other people’s needs and weakness and are adept at exploiting them. These
frequent liars usually seem sincerely sorry if caught in a lie and promise to
make amends they- but they do not do so. Psychopaths are seldom able to
keep close friends. They cannot understand love in others or give it in
return. Manipulative, exploitative, and sometimes coercive in sexual
relationships, psychopaths are irresponsible and unfaithful mates.
4.9 Causal Factors:
Contemporary research has variously stressed the causal roles of genetic
factors, temperamental characteristics, deficiencies in fear and anxiety,
more general emotional deficits, the early learning of antisocial behaviour
as a coping style, and the influence of particular family and environmental
patterns. Since the traits tend to appear early in life, many investigators
have focussed on here of early biological and environmental factors as
causative agents in antisocial and psychopathic behaviors.
GENETIC INFLUENCES:
Behavioral genetic research relies on the different levels of genetic
relatedness between family members in order to estimate the contribution
of heritable and environmental factors to individual differences in a
phenotype of interest, in our case antisocial behavior. The early adoption
studies typically demonstrated that the combination of a genetic Self-Instructional Material
49
Personality Disorders predisposition (i.e., psychopathology in biological parents) with a high risk
NOTES
environment (i.e., adverse adoptive home environment) lead to greater
pathology than what would be expected from either factor acting alone or
both in an additive combination. In the past two decades, adoption samples
have become less accessible, instead studies utilizing large twin, sibling
and/or parent–child (multi generation) samples have emerged. One of the
key methodological designs in behavioral genetic research is the classical
twin design. In the classical twin design monozygotic (identical) twin pairs
are assumed to share their common environment and 100% of their genes.
Dizygotic (fraternal) twin pairs also share their common environment and
they are assumed to share on average 50% of their genes. By comparing
the resemblance for antisocial behavior between monozygotic and
dizygotic twins the variance of antisocial behavior can be divided into
additive genetic factors, shared environmental factors, and non-shared
environmental factors. Shared environmental factors refer to non-genetic
influences that contribute to similarity within pairs of twins. Non-shared
environmental factors refer to experiences that make siblings dissimilar.
There is compelling evidence from behavioral genetic research that
heritable influences are of importance in the development of antisocial
behavior; approximately 50% of the total variance in antisocial behavior is
explained by genetic influences. Yet, there is also evidence of a large
environmental effect, both shared and non-shared environmental influences
have been found to explain the remaining half of the variance
One excellent study by Cadoret and collegues found that adopted away
children of biological parents with ASPD were more likely to develop
antisocial personalities if their adoptive parents exposed them to adverse
environments than if their adoptive parents exposed them to a more normal
environment. Adverse environments were characterized by some of the
following: marital conflicts or divorce, legal problem and parental
psychopathology. Similar findings of a gene-environment interaction were
also found in twins who were at high or low risk for conduct disorder; in
this study, the environment risk factor was physical maltreatment.
Several candidate genes have been identified to be associated with
antisocial behavior or their known risk factors. Many of these candidate
genes findings have also been replicated in both human and animal studies.
A majority of these candidate genes were identified through examination of
(1) the dopamine system, which is involved in mood, motivation and
reward, arousal, and other behaviors; (2) the serotonin system, which is
involved in impulse control, affect regulation, sleep, and appetite; or (3) the
epinephrine/norepinephrine system, which facilitate fight-or-flight
reactions and autonomic nervous system activity. All three of these systems
are affected by monoamine oxidase A (MAO-A) function. The low-activity
alleles of MAO-A interacts with maladaptive childhood environment and
has been associated with aggression, violent delinquency, externalizing
behavior, and lower inhibitory control
The relationship between antisocial behaviour and substance abuse is
sufficiently strong that some have questioned whether there may be a
common factor leading to both alcoholism and antisocial personality.
THE LOW FEAR HYPOTHESIS AND CONDITIONING:
One of the classic theoretical approaches to explaining psychopathy is the
low fear hypothesis. Research evidence indicates that psychopaths who are
50
high on the egocentric, callus, and exploitative dimension have low trait Personality Disorders
anxiety and show poor conditioning of fear. Mainly based on research with
NOTES
criminal populations, the low fear hypothesis considers deficient emotional
responding to aversive stimulation as the core underlying substrate for the
disorder. Consistent with this hypothesis, empirical studies have
demonstrated deficient acquisition of fear-conditioned responses in
psychopathy, providing evidence that this deficiency reflects impairments
on an affective-evaluative level (i.e., psychopathic participants do not form
emotional associations between the cue and the noxious event) as opposed
to a cognitive-information processing level (i.e., psychopaths display
adequate evaluation of and reactivity to noxious stimuli themselves).
In addition, research focusing on the neural systems known to be involved
in emotional learning (i.e., the limbic-prefrontal circuit) has provided
evidence of underactivity in structures including the left amygdala, the
right ventromedial orbitofrontal cortex, the insula, the anterior cingulate
cortex, and the right secondary somatosensory cortex in psychopathic
individuals during the acquisition phase of a fear conditioning task.
The second important neural system is the behavioural activation system.
This system activates behaviour in response to cues for reward a well as
cues for active avoidance of threatened punishment. According to Fowle’s
theory, the behavioural activation system is thought to be normal or
possibly over reactive in psychopaths. This hypothesis of Fowles that
psychopaths have a deficient behavioural activation system seems to
account for three important features of psychopathy: i) Deficient
conditioning of anxiety to signals of punishment ii) Their difficult learning
to inhibit responses that may result in punishment and iii) Their normal or
hyper normal active avoidance of punishment when actively threatened
with punishment.
MORE GENERAL EMOTIONAL DEFICITS:
Psychopaths showed less significant physiological reactivity to distress
cues than non- psychopaths. This is consistent with the idea that
psychopaths are low on empathy, in addition to being low on fear.
However, they were not under responsive to unconditioned threat cues such
as slides of sharks, pointed guns, or angry faces. Patrick and colleagues
have demonstrated that this effect of smaller startle response when viewing
unpleasant slides is especially pronounced with slides depicting scenes of
victim who have been mutilated or assaulted but not with slides
representing threats to self. This specific failure to show larger startle
response with victim scenes must be related to lack of empathy in
psychopathy.
Hare has hypothesized that the kinds of emotional deficits discussed are
only a subset of more general difficulties that psychopaths have with
processing and understanding the meaning of affective stimuli, including
positive and negative words and sounds. It has also been suggested that
such deficits in turn are closely linked to deficits in moral reasoning and
behaviour seen in psychopathy.
EARLY PARENTAL LOSS, PARENTAL REJECTION, AND
INCONSISTENCY:
In addition to genetic factors and emotional deficits they show conscience
development and high levels of both reactive and instrumental aggression
are influenced by the damaging effects of parental rejection, abuse, and
neglect accompanied by inconsistent discipline. However, studies of gene-
51
Personality Disorders environment interactions reviewed earlier clearly indicates that these kinds
NOTES
of disturbances are not sufficient explanations for the origins of
psychopathy or antisocial personality because some people are clearly
more susceptible to these effects than others.
The exact cause of antisocial personality disorder isn't known, but: Genes
may make us vulnerable to developing antisocial personality disorder —
and life situations may trigger its development. Changes in the way the
brain functions that may have resulted during brain development may also
be a cause.
4.10 Treatment:
It’s rare that someone with APD would even seek help on their own.
So the majority of people with APD remain undiagnosed and untreated.
Treatments for people with antisocial personality disorder are typically
ineffective. Major obstacles to treatment include the individuals’ lack of
conscience, desire to change, or respect for therapy. Most of those in
therapy have been forced to participate by an employer, their school, or the
law, or they come to the attention of therapists when they also develop
another psychological disorder. Biological treatment approaches for
antisocial and psychopathic personalities including ECT and drugs have
not been systematically studied, partly because the few results that have
been reported suggest modest changes at best. Drugs such as Lithium and
anticonvulsants used to treat bipolar disorder have had some success in
treating the aggressive/impulse behaviour of violent aggressive criminals,
but evidence in this is scant. There are promising results using
antidepressants from the SSRI category, which can sometimes reduce
aggressive/impulsive behaviour and increase interpersonal skills. However,
none of these biological treatments has any substantial impact on the
disorder as a whole.
COGNITIVE-BEHAVIOR THERAPY:
Some cognitive therapists try to guide clients with antisocial personality
disorder to think about moral issues and about the needs of other people. In
a similar vein, a number of hospitals and prisons have tried to create a
therapeutic community for people with this disorder, a structured
environment that teaches responsibility toward others. Some patients seem
to profit from such approaches, but it appears that most do not. In recent
years, clinicians have also used psychotropic medications, particularly
atypical antipsychotic drugs, to treat people with antisocial personality
disorder. Some report that these drugs help reduce certain features of the
disorder, but systematic studies of this claim are still needed.
Common targets of cognitive behavioural interventions include:
 Increasing self-control, self-critical thinking and social perspective
taking
 Increasing victim awareness
 Teaching anger management
 Changing antisocial attitudes
 Cutting drug addiction.
Such an intervention requires a controlled situation in which the therapist
can administer or withhold reinforcement and the individual cannot leave
treatment, because when treating antisocial behaviour we are dealing with a
total lifestyle rather than few specific, maladaptive behaviour. They may be
52
useful in reducing inmates’ antisocial behaviour while in a prison or other Personality Disorders
forensic setting the results do not usually generalize to real world if the
NOTES
person is released. Fortunately, the crime activities of many psychopathic
and antisocial personalities seem to decline after the age of 40 even without
treatment possibly because of weaker biological drives, better insight into
self-defeating behaviors. One important study that followed a group of
male psychopaths over many years found a clear and dramatic reduction in
levels of criminal behaviour after age40. However, over 50% of these
people continued to be arrested after age 40. Moreover, it is only the
antisocial behavioural dimension of psychopathy that seems to diminish
with age.
For those who do seek help, one of the most common treatments for APD
is CBT, or cognitive behavioral therapy. CBT helps affected people learn
how to slow down reaction times, reduce impulsive behavior, and
incorporate consequential thinking into decision-making. Any
psychotherapy, though, would focus on improving conduct to reduce
negative consequences in the person’s life, how to modify expectations to
be more in line with reality, or use relaxation techniques to calm down the
flare of an angry reaction when a sense of entitlement conflicts with what
they’re getting out of a situation.
Psychotherapy for APD only works if the affected person is actually
motivated to change. Like most mental health disorders, the desire for
change must come from the person. They must have their own personal
reasons for changing their behaviour, and that’s why it’s especially hard to
treat someone with APD.
4.11 Let Us Sum Up:
The defining features of a personality disorder are: a) distorted thinking, b)
problems with emotional regulation, and c) problems with impulse
regulation) that all work together to contribute to the fourth and most
important core feature of personality disorders, d) interpersonal difficulties.
When people have distorted ways of thinking about themselves and others,
have difficulty regulating their emotions, and have trouble regulating their
impulses, it only makes sense that these problems will go on to affect the
way they enter into, and behave in relationships. Likewise, these
problematic patterns of thoughts, feelings, and behaviors affect the way
they handle conflict with others; and the way other people will react to
them.
CLUSTER A:
Paranoid Personality Disorder:
Distrust; suspiciousness; expectations of being exploited; questioning the
loyalty of friends; reading hidden demeaning and threatening meanings
into benign remarks or events; bearing grudges; being easily slighted;
questioning the fidelity of spouse.
Schizoid Personality Disorder:
Indifference to social relationships; restricted range of emotional
experience and expression; avoiding close relationships; always choosing
solitary activities; phlegmatic temperament; rarely experiencing strong
emotions; avoiding sexual experiences; indifference to praise and criticism;
having no close friends or confidants; constricted affect: aloofness,
coldness, and little reciprocation of gestures or facial expressions.
53
Personality Disorders Schizotypal Personality Disorder:
NOTES
Deficits in interpersonal relatedness; peculiarities of ideation, appearance,
and behavior; ideas of reference; excessive social anxiety; odd beliefs or
magical thinking; unusual perceptual experiences; odd, eccentric behavior
or appearance; having no close friends or confidants; odd speech;
inappropriate or constricted affect; suspiciousness or paranoid ideation.
CLUSTER B:
Histrionic Personality Disorder:
Excessive emotionality and attention-seeking; dependence upon
reassurance, approval, and praise; sexual seductiveness; over concern with
physical attractiveness; emotional exaggeration and shallow expression of
emotions; self-centeredness; strong drive for immediate gratification of
desires; impressionistic speech.
Narcissistic Personality Disorder:
High self-esteem; grandiosity; lack of empathy; an arrogant, haughty
attitude; interpersonal exploitation; grandiose sense of self-importance;
exaggerates achievements and talents, expects to be recognized as superior
without commensurate achievements; conviction of uniqueness,
specialness; belief that they can only be understood by, or should associate
with, other special or high-status people (or institutions); fantasies of
unlimited success, power, brilliance, beauty, or ideal love; sense of
entitlement; requiring constant attention and admiration; feelings of envy,
believes that others are envious.
Antisocial Personality Disorder:
Irresponsible, antisocial behavior; failure to honor financial obligations;
failure to be a responsible parent; failure to plan ahead; inability to sustain
consistent work behavior; failure to conform to social norms; antisocial
acts that are grounds for arrest, e.g., destroying property, harassing others,
stealing, or having an illegal occupation; irritability and aggression;
reckless behavior without regard to personal safety; promiscuity;
callousness and lack of remorse; inability to tolerate boredom; depression;
beliefs that others are hostile to them; incapacity for close, lasting
relationships.
Borderline Personality Disorder:
Instability of mood, interpersonal relationships, and self-image; alternation
between extremes of over idealization and devaluation in relationships;
impulsiveness in spending, sex, substance use, shoplifting, reckless
driving, or binge eating; affective instability; inappropriate, intense anger
or lack of control of anger; suicidal threats, gestures, or behavior; self-
mutilation; identity disturbance; feelings of emptiness or boredom; frantic
efforts to avoid abandonment.
CLUSTER C:
Obsessive Compulsive Personality Disorder:
Perfectionism; inflexibility; correctness; self-righteousness;
authoritarianism; workaholism; indecisiveness; overconscientiousness;
scrupulousness; restricted expression of affection; parsimony; obstinacy;
orderliness; hoarding.
Avoidant Personality Disorder:
Social discomfort; fear of negative evaluation; timidity; sensitivity to
criticism and disapproval; introversion; social anxiety; fear of
54
embarrassment; fear of rejection; social isolation; yearning for affection Personality Disorders
and acceptance.
NOTES
Dependent Personality Disorder:
Dependent and submissive behavior; excessive dependence upon advice
and reassurance; allowing others to make important personal decisions;
agreeing with others to avoid being rejected; lack of initiative; doing
unpleasant and demeaning tasks for the sake of acceptance; feelings of
helplessness when alone; feelings of devastation and helplessness when
relationships end; being easily hurt by criticism and disapproval.

1. What are the general DSM criteria for diagnosing personality disorders?
2. Why is Schizotypal personality disorder known as attenuated form of
schizophrenia?
3. Explain the two types of Narcissistic personality disorder.
4. How is Avoidant personality disorder different from Schizoid and Social
phobias?
5. Explain the antisocial personality disorder and psychopathy.
6. Explain the treatments for Personality disorders.
1. PARANOID DISORDER: Although inaccurate and inappropriate, their
suspicions are not usually delusional; the ideas are not so bizarre or so
firmly held as to clearly remove the individuals from reality. They may
experience transient psychotic symptoms.
PARANOID SCHIZOPHRENIA: They experience psychotic symptoms.
2. There is modest genetic liability that may occur through the heritability
of high levels of antagonism (low agreeableness) and neuroticism(angry-
hostility) which are the primary traits in paranoid personality disorder.
3. Schizotypal personality disorder
4. Histrionic personality disorder may be characterized as involving
extreme versions of two common, normal personality traits, extraversion
and to a lesser extent, neuroticism- two normal personality traits known to
have a partial genetic basis.
5. People with borderline personality disorder display great instability,
including major shifts in mood, an unstable self-image, and impulsivity.
6. Genetically and biologically based inhibited temperament may often
serve as the diathesis that leads to avoidant personality disorder in some
children who experience emotional abuse, rejection, or humiliation from
parents who are not particularly affectionate. Such abuse and rejection
would be especially likely lead to anxious and fearful attachment patterns
in temperamentally inhibited children.
7. Histrionic and dependent personalities have strong needs for reassurance
and approval, but histrionic personality is much more gregarious,
flamboyant, and actively demanding of attention whereas dependent
personality is more docile and self-effacing.
8. It is important to note that people with OCPD do not have true
obsessions or compulsive rituals that are the source of extreme anxiety or
distress in people with OCD. People with OCPD have lifestyles
characterized by over conscientiousness, high neuroticism, inflexibility and
perfectionism but without the presence of true obsessions or compulsive
rituals. Self-Instructional Material
55
NOTES 7. Butcher, J.N. (2014). Abnormal Psychology. New Delhi: Pearson
Education.
 Sarason, G.I. &Sarason, R.V. (2007). Abnormal Psychology:
The Problem of Maladaptive Behaviour (II Edition). Pearson
Education, Inc. and Dorling Kindersley Publication Inc.
56
Sexual Dysfunction
BLOCK II: PERSONALITY NOTES
DISORDERS
UNIT V: SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION
Structure
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Objectives
5.4 Sexual Arousal Disorders
5.5 Orgasmic Disorders
5.7 Let Us Sum Up
5.1Introduction
Sexual behavior and feelings is a crucial part of our development and daily
functioning, sexual activity is tied to the satisfaction of our basic needs,
and sexual performance is linked to our self-esteem. Most people are
fascinated by the abnormal sexual behavior of others and worry about the
normality of their own sexuality.
The term sexual dysfunction refers to impairment either in the desire for
sexual gratification or in the ability to achieve it. Sexual dysfunctions,
disorders in which people cannot respond normally in key areas of sexual
functioning, make it difficult or impossible to enjoy sexual intercourse.
The impairment varies markedly in degree, but regardless of which partner
is alleged to be dysfunctional, the enjoyment of sex by both parties in a
relationship is typically adversely affected. In some cases, sexual
dysfunctions are caused primarily by psychological factors. In others,
physical factors are most important, including many cases of sexual
dysfunctions that are secondary consequences of medications people may
be taking for other, unrelated medical conditions. In recent years, both
explanations and treatments of sexual dysfunction have become more
biological although some psychological treatments have been empirically
validated, and psychosocial factors clearly play a causal role as well.
Today researchers and clinicians typically identify four different phases of
human sexual response as originally proposed by Masters and Johnson and
Kaplan. According to DSM-5, disorders can occur in any of the first three
phases:
● The first phase is the desire phase, which consists of fantasies
about sexual activity or a sense of desire to have sexual activity.
● The second phase is the excitement or arousal phase,
characterized both by a subjective sense of sexual pleasure and by Self-Instructional Material
57
Sexual Dysfunction physiological changes that accompany this subjective pleasure,
NOTES including penile erection in the male and vaginal lubrication and
clitoral enlargement in the female.
● The third phase is orgasm, during which there is a release of sexual
tension and a peaking of sexual pleasure.
● The final phase is resolution during which the person has a sense
of relaxation and well- being.
Check your Progress -1

Note: a.Write your answer in the space given below
b.Compare your answer with those given at the end of the unit
1. What is sexual dysfunction?
2. List the four phases of human sexual response.
5.2 Objectives
On completion of this unit, you will be able to understand:
 Different sexual disorders
 Differentiate between types of sexual disorders
 The various treatment available for sexual disorders

The desire phase of the sexual response cycle consists of an urge to have
sex, sexual fantasies, and sexual attraction to others. Two dysfunctions—
hypoactive sexual desire disorder and sexual aversion disorder—affect the
desire phase. Sexual desire disorder is a psychiatric condition marked by a
lack of desire for sexual activity over a prolonged period. In the DSM-5,
Sexual Desire Disorder has been broken down into two separate
conditions: Female Sexual Interest/Arousal Disorder and Male Hypoactive
Sexual Desire Disorder. Both of these refer to a low level of sexual interest
resulting in a failure to initiate or respond to sexual intimacy. This can
include an absence of sexual thoughts or fantasies, reduced or absent
pleasure during sexual activity, and absent or reduced interest in internal or
external erotic cues. Neither of these conditions can be diagnosed if the
main problem is a "desire discrepancy" in which one partner desires more
sexual activity than the other; rather, the conditions are diagnosed when
symptoms have been present for a minimum of six months and cause
clinically significant distress for the individual. In the DSM-5, male
hypoactive sexual desire disorder is characterized by "persistently or
recurrently deficient (or absent) sexual/erotic thoughts or fantasies and
desire for sexual activity", as judged by a clinician with consideration for
the patient's age and cultural context. Female sexual interest/arousal
disorder is defined as a "lack of, or significantly reduced, sexual
interest/arousal", manifesting as at least three of the following symptoms:
no or little interest in sexual activity, no or few sexual thoughts, no or few
attempts to initiate sexual activity or respond to partner's initiation, no or
little sexual pleasure/excitement in most of sexual experiences, no or little
sexual interest in internal or external erotic stimuli, and no or few
genital/non-genital sensations in most of sexual experiences.
For both diagnoses, symptoms must persist for at least six months, cause
clinically significant distress, and not be better explained by another
58
Sexual Dysfunction
condition. Simply having lower desire than one's partner is not sufficient
for a diagnosis. Self-identification of a lifelong lack of sexual desire as NOTES
asexuality excludes diagnosis.
People with hypoactive sexual desire disorder lack interest in sex and, in
turn, display little sexual activity. Nevertheless, when these individuals do
have sex, their physical responses may be normal and they may enjoy the
experience. While our culture portrays men as wanting all the sex they can
get, hypoactive sexual desire may be found in as many as 16 percent of
men, and the number seeking therapy has increased during the past decade.
Hypoactive sexual desire disorder is diagnosed in men who have for at
least 6 months been distressed or impaired due to levels of sexual thoughts,
desires, or fantasies. Men given this diagnosis are also assessed for the
course and possible causal factors, including problems emanating from
partners, relationship, cultural belief, personal vulnerabilities etc. In an
American survey it was found that older men were three times more likely
to suffer from low desire compared with younger men. Predictors of low
desire included daily alcohol use, stress, unmarried status and poorer
health. Most experts believe that male hypoactive sexual desire disorder is
acquired or situational rather than lifelong. Typical situational risk factors
include depression and relationship stress.
Male hypoactive sexual desire disorder is sometimes associated with
erectile and/or ejaculatory problems. Men with this disorder may also have
difficulty obtaining an erection, which can lead to a reduced interest in sex.
Men with hypoactive sexual desire disorder often report that they no longer
initiate sexual activity and that they are minimally receptive to a partner's
attempt to initiate. Sexual activities, like masturbation, may occur even in
the presence of low sexual desire. Although men are more likely to initiate
sexual activity, and thus low desire may be characterized by a pattern of
non-initiation, many men may prefer to have their partner initiate sexual
activity. In such situations, the man's lack of response to a partner's
invitation should be considered when evaluating this disorder.
There are five factors that should be taken into consideration during the
assessment and diagnosis of male hypoactive sexual desire disorder
1)Partner’s sexual history and health status,2)Relationship quality such as
ability to effectively communication, differences in sexual activity
preference),3)Individual factors such as body image, history of physical or
sexual abuse, psychiatric comorbidity, life stressors, 4) Cultural and
religious background such as rules and attitudes towards sexual activity
and sexuality, 5)Medical background and treatment.
Many men with male hypoactive sexual desire disorder may have low self-
esteem or self-confidence, a decreased sense of masculinity, and may
experience depressed affect. Their partners commonly report reduced
sexual satisfaction and reduced sexual desire. A man’s feelings about
himself, his perception of his partner’s desire, and a couple’s connectivity
can all negatively impact sexual desire. Thus, this disorder can interfere
with fertility and produce both individual and interpersonal distress.
Age is a significant risk factor for low desire in men. Mood and anxiety
disorders, such as major depressive disorder, are a common comorbidity
with this population. Endocrine disorders such as can reduce sexual desire
in men. Low testosterone levels may also play a role in sexual desire. Male Self-Instructional Material
hypoactive sexual desire disorder can also result from unresolved sexual
59
Sexual Dysfunction identity issues stemming from gender identity, sexual orientation, lack of
NOTES adequate sex education and trauma from early life experiences.
TREATMENT
Hypoactive sexual desire and sexual aversion are among the most difficult
dysfunctions to treat because of the many issues that may feed into them.
Thus therapists typically apply a combination of techniques. In a technique
called affectual awareness, patients visualize sexual scenes in order to
discover any feelings of anxiety, vulnerability, and other negative emotions
they may have concerning sex. In another technique, patients receive
cognitive self-instruction training to help them change their negative
reactions to sex. That is, they learn to replace negative statements during
sex with “coping statements,” such as “I can allow myself to enjoy sex; it
doesn’t mean I’ll lose control.”
Therapists may also use behavioral approaches to help heighten a patient’s
sex drive. They may instruct clients to keep a “desire diary” in which they
record sexual thoughts and feelings, to read books and view films with
erotic content, and to fantasize about sex. Pleasurable shared activities such
as dancing and walking together are also encouraged. The treatment
literature on low sexual desire in men is less. In men whose testosterone
levels are markedly low( includinghypogonadal men whose testes make
insufficient testosterone and men with HIV that diminishes their
testosterone production) testosterone injections have helped.
Pharmacotherapy and Androgen replacement also helps. Cognitive-
behavioral therapy focuses on dysfunctional thoughts, unrealistic
expectations, partner behavior that decreases desire for intercourse, and
insufficient physical stimulation. These sessions can include both partners.
Homework assignments and specific exercises are often used.
Psychodynamic sex therapy, addresses underlying developmental and
identity issues that impact sexual desire.
Sexual interest refers to the motivation to engage in sexual activity. Interest
is commonly referred to as “desire,” “sex drive,” and “sexual appetite,” and
describes the sexual feelings motivating a person to seek some type of
sexual activity, whether partnered or alone. Sexual arousal is
conceptualized as the second phase of the sexual response cycle and
defined by both physical and mental readiness for sexual activity.
Physiological changes occur in the body to prepare for a sexual interaction
Female Sexual Interest/Arousal Disorder (FSIAD) is defined in the
DSM-5 as lack of, or significantly reduced, sexual interest/arousal. A
woman must have three of the following six symptoms in order to receive
the diagnosis: absent or reduced interest in sexual activity; absent or
reduced sexual thoughts or fantasies; no or reduced initiation of sexual
activity, and typically unreceptive to a partner’s attempts to initiate; absent
or reduced sexual excitement or pleasure in almost all or all sexual
encounters; absent or reduced sexual interest/arousal in response to any
internal or external sexual cues; and absent or reduced genital or non-
genital sensations during sexual activity in all or almost all sexual
encounters. These symptoms must cause clinically significant distress and
have persisted for a minimum of six months. The disorder is specified by
severity level and sub typed into lifelong versus acquired, generalized
versus situational.
60
Sexual Dysfunction
In past editions of the DSM, sexual interest and sexual arousal have been
considered to be separate, though related, constructs. Most recently, the NOTES
DSM-IV-TR had separate diagnoses of hypoactive sexual desire disorder
(HSDD) and female sexual arousal disorder (FSAD). HSDD was
characterized by the absence of sexual fantasies, lack of desire for sexual
activity, and FSAD was characterized by continuous or recurrent inability
to retain, or maintain, sufficient lubrication or swelling. The DSM-5 Sexual
Dysfunction sub-work group cited evidence that desire and arousal could
not be reliably distinguished in women. Other experts in the field disagree
with this conceptualization, and the categorization of desire and arousal
disorders into one diagnostic category has led to substantial controversy in
the field.
As FSIAD is new to the DSM, prevalence studies have not yet been
published. However, previous work has examined the prevalence of low
sexual interest (HSDD) and low sexual arousal (FSAD) in women. One of
the most frequently cited prevalence studies found low sexual interest in
22% of women in the general U.S. population In a survey of women from
29 countries, the rates of self-reported low sexual interest ranged from 26
to 43%. For a clinical diagnosis takes levels of distress, depending on a
woman’s age, cultural background, and reproductive status.
Prevalence studies of sexual arousal problems in women have focused
primarily on self-reported lack of vaginal lubrication. Lubrication problems
have been found to increase with age and menopausal status.
An interesting change from DSM IV TR to DSM-5 is the elimination of

sexual aversion disorder. People with sexual aversion disorder find sex
distinctly unpleasant or repulsive. Sexual advances may sicken, disgust, or
frighten them. Some people are repelled by a particular aspect of sex, such
as penetration of the vagina; others experience a general aversion to all
sexual stimuli, including kissing or touching. Aversion to sex seems to be
quite rare in men and somewhat more common in women .A person’s sex
drive is determined by a combination of biological, psychological, and
sociocultural factors, and any of them may reduce sexual desire. Most
cases of low sexual desire or sexual aversion are caused primarily by
sociocultural and psychological factors, but biological conditions can also
lower sex drive significantly.
Biological causes-Endocrine levels are the most commonly discussed
biological factor that may be related to low sexual interest in women. Lack
of sexual desire has been associated with menopause, during which
decreased ovarian function results in lower estrogen production.
Researchers have concluded that sex hormones, specifically androgens,
estrogens, and progestin, affect female sexual interest and function, but
there is still some uncertainty as to which hormones are most important.
Evidence for the relationship between testosterone and women’s sexual
desire indicates that the hormone is correlated with solitary desire. Oral
contraceptives involve a combination of estrogens and progesterone, and
produce substantial increases in sex hormone-binding globulin, which can
lower testosterone levels. It is possible that this decrease in testosterone
could contribute to the low sexual desire reported by some women taking
oral contraceptives. It is well known that many psychoactive medications
affect sexual desire. There are both intra-class and inter-class variations Self-Instructional Material
among antidepressants with respect to sexual dysfunction and particularly
61
Sexual Dysfunction sexual desire. These variations are largely dependent on neurotransmitter
NOTES receptor profiles and genetics . Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors
(SSRIs), used most commonly for treating depression and anxiety, increase
serotonin levels and produce a variety of sexual side effects in both men
and women including decreased desire.
Psychological Factors-Low sexual interest and/or arousal has also been
linked with a number of psychosocial factors in both men and women.
Research found that relationship duration significantly predicted variance
in sexual desire. Specifically, women’s sexual desire decreased as
relationship duration increased. Similarly, in married women, feelings of
overfamiliarity and institutionalization of the relationship led to decreased
desire. Daily hassles such as worrying about children and paying the bills,
and high-stress jobs are offenders for suppressing sexual desire, as are a
multitude of relationship or partner-related issues. In regard to the latter,
couples reporting sexual difficulties have been characterized by sex
therapists as having less overall satisfaction within their relationships, an
increased number of disagreements, more communication and conflict
resolution problems, and more sexual communication problems including
discomfort discussing sexual activities compared to couples without sexual
problems. Warmth, caring, and affection within the relationship are
undoubtedly linked to feelings of sexual desire. Beliefs and attitudes about
sexuality acquired over the course of sexual development can influence
sexual desire and sexual response across the lifespan. Women who
internalize passive gender roles or negative attitudes toward sexuality may
be at greater risk of experiencing sexual problems.
Societal factors may also contribute to low sexual interest and arousal.
Sexual norms differ greatly by region and by culture. Women who are
socialized to believe that being interested in sex is shameful often
experience guilt and shame during sex, which in turn have been associated
with both low levels of sexual desire and low levels of arousal.
Psychological conditions most commonly associated with a lack of sexual
interest include social phobia, obsessive-compulsive disorder, panic
disorder, and mood disorders—depression in particular. It is feasible that
sexuality becomes of secondary importance when an individual is
experiencing substantial distress in other areas of his or her life. With
regard to depression, it is feasible that rumination about negative events, a
common cognitive aspect of depression, may contribute to the decrease in
desire noted in depressed persons by causing an exclusive focus on aspects
of sexuality that are unpleasant. It is well known that people with
depression are prone to interpret negative events as caused by stable, global
causes, and this cognitive style could certainly negatively affect one’s
perception of sexuality.
A history of unwanted sexual experiences can also negatively affect sexual
desire. Many, but not all, women with a history of childhood sexual abuse
fear sexual intimacy, are likely to avoid sexual interactions with a partner,
and are less receptive to sexual approaches from their partners. Sexual self-
schemas, cognitive generalizations about sexual aspects of the self that
guide sexual behavior and influence the processing of sexually relevant
information, have been shown to differ between women with and without a
history of childhood sexual abuse). A high proportion of women with a
history of childhood sexual abuse engage in risky sexual behaviors such as
engaging in sex with strangers while intoxicated It is unknown whether this
62
Sexual Dysfunction
behavior is a reflection of high levels of sexual desire, an inability to
maintain or enforce physical boundaries, a compulsive act, emotional NOTES
avoidance, or some combination of these reasons. Other studies have found
that prior sexual abuse is associated with low sexual interest.
TREATMENT
Treatment for FSIAD focuses on identifying any underlying causes and
treating them. Many women find that a combination of treatments seems to
work best. Depending on the underlying cause, treatments often include
medication, therapy, or a combination of both.
Some medication-related treatments include:
● Hormone therapy. If the underlying cause is hormonal, hormone
therapy may help treat low estrogen or testosterone, vaginal
dryness, or pain during intercourse.
● Changing medication dosage. If a medication, such as an
antidepressant, is causing the symptoms, adjusting the dosage may
help.
Psychological treatments for low desire include education about factors
that affect sexual desire, couples exercises (e.g., scheduling times for
physical and emotional intimacy), communication training (e.g., opening
up about sexual issues and needs), cognitive restructuring of dysfunctional
beliefs (e.g., a good sexual experience does not always end with an
orgasm), sexual fantasy training (e.g., training people to develop and
explore mental imagery), and sensate focus. Sensate focus, introduced by
Masters and Johnson in the 1970s, is a behavioral technique in which
couples learn to focus on the pleasurable sensations that are brought about
by touching, while decreasing attention on goal-directed sex (e.g., orgasm).
Recent research has also indicated that mindfulness-based approaches,
which cultivate active awareness of the body and its sensations in a
nonjudgmental and compassionate way, may be helpful for women with
FSIAD By focusing on the physical sensations of sexual activity instead of
being preoccupied with sexual performance, or current level of desire or
arousal, couples can learn to be present and respond to their partner during
the sexual situation. In the beginning stages of sensate focus couples are
encouraged to touch each other’s bodies and feel for sexual sensations but
refrain from touching breasts or genitals, or engaging in intercourse. The
exercises aim to build an organic desire for full intercourse. Over time the
couples are encouraged to touch more and more areas and then finally to
have intercourse. For women in satisfying relationships, treatment may
include identifying potential distracting, negative thoughts and helping
them let go of these thoughts during sexual activity.
5.4Sexual Arousal Disorders
The excitement phase of the sexual response cycle is marked by changes in
the pelvic region, general physical arousal, and increases in heart rate,
muscle tension, blood pressure, and rate of breathing. In men, blood pools
in the pelvis and leads to erection of the penis; in women, this phase
produces swelling of the clitoris and labia, as well as lubrication of the
vagina. Dysfunctions affecting the excitement phase according to DSM-IV-
TR are female sexual arousal disorder (once referred to as “frigidity”) and
male erectile disorder (once called “impotence”). The DSM-5, published in
May of 2013, seeks to incorporate some of the aforementioned findings.
Changes were made in the sexual dysfunctions chapter in an attempt to Self-Instructional Material
63
Sexual Dysfunction correct, expand and clarify the different diagnoses and their respective
NOTES criteria. Although many of the changes are subtle, some are noteworthy:
gender-specific sexual dysfunctions were added, and female disorders of
desire and arousal were amalgamated into a single diagnosis called “female
sexual interest/arousal disorder”. Female hypoactive desire dysfunction and
female arousal dysfunction were merged into a single syndrome called
sexual interest/arousal disorder.
Erectile dysfunction is defined as persistent difficulty achieving and
maintaining an erection sufficient to have sex It was initially known as
impotence, occurs when a man can't get or keep an erection firm enough
for sexual intercourse. Erectile disorder (ED) is defined in the DSM-5 as
the recurrent inability to achieve an erection, the inability to maintain an
adequate erection, and/or a noticeable decrease in erectile rigidity during
partnered sexual activity. In order to meet the diagnostic criteria, these
symptoms must have persisted for at least six months and must have
occurred on at least 75% of occasions. The disorder can be specified by
severity and subtyped as either generalized or situational.
Men of all ages occasionally have difficulty obtaining or maintaining an
erection, but true erectile disorder is more common after age 50.There are a
number of factors beyond age that are associated with the prevalence of
ED. Married men are less likely to report erectile problems compared to
never married or divorced men. Men with cardiovascular disease, diabetes,
and metabolic syndrome are more likely to have ED than men without
these diseases. Health factors such as smoking, obesity, and lack of
exercise have been linked to higher prevalence of ED. It can be devastating
to the self-esteem of a man and of his partner
Erectile dysfunction in older men. Because erections primarily involve the
blood vessels, it is not surprising that the most common causes in older
men are conditions that block blood flow to the penis, such as
atherosclerosis or diabetes. Another vascular cause may be a faulty vein,
which lets blood drain too quickly from the penis. Other physical disorders,
as well as hormonal imbalances and certain operations, may also result in
erectile dysfunction. The vesicular processes that produce an erection are
controlled by the nervous system and certain prescription medications may
have the side effect of interfering with necessary nerve signals. Among the
possible culprits are a variety of stimulants, sedatives, diuretics,
antihistamines, and drugs to treat high blood pressure, cancer, or
depression. But never stop a medication unless your doctor tells you to. In
addition, alcohol, tobacco, and illegal drugs, such as marijuana, may
contribute to the dysfunction
Erectile dysfunction in younger men. With younger men, psychological
problems are the likeliest reason for erectile dysfunction. Tension and
anxiety may arise from poor communication with the sexual partner or a
difference in sexual preferences. The sexual difficulties may also be linked
to these factors: Depression, Fatigue, Stress, Feelings of inadequacy,
Personal sexual fears, Rejection by parents or peers, Sexual abuse in
childhood etc.
Factors Associated With Erection and Erectile Dysfunction
There has been a great deal of research on erectile dysfunction, identifying
a number of key biological and psychological causes. Biological factors are
64
Sexual Dysfunction
related to changes in blood flow to the penis, and psychological factors
involve anxiety and negative expectations for performance. NOTES
Biological Factors
Erection is caused by increased blood pressure in the corpora cavernosa via
increased blood inflow and decreased blood outflow. A large body of
evidence indicates that the likelihood of ED increases with different types
of vascular disease, such as hyperlipidemia, coronary heart disease, and
diabetes. The link between vascular problems and ED is so strong that ED
is considered an early warning sign of vascular disease, especially in men
under the age of 40 .Some researchers are in favor of viewing ED as a
vascular disorder.
Surgery, diabetes, alcoholism, infectious diseases such as HIV and other
viral infections, and pelvic pathologies such as systemic lupus are all
potential causes of ED. Drugs that decrease dopamine or reduce
testosterone production are also implicated in ED. These include
antihypertensive medications, antipsychotic drugs, anxiolytics,
antiandrogens, anti-cholesterol agents, and drugs used to regulate heart
rate. Antiparkinsonian medications increase dopamine and facilitate
erection.
Psychological Factors
With respect to the different psychological factors that play a role in male
sexual function, Perelman proposed the sexual tipping point model, defined
as any one individual’s characteristic threshold for the expression of a
sexual response. Perelman suggested that one’s sexual tipping point is
determined by a variety of multidimensional factors that fall into two
general categories, physiological or organic issues and psychosocial,
cultural, and behavioral issues. For men, psychosocial issues may include
performance anxiety, strong religious backgrounds that lead to guilt or
strong avoidance behaviors, and a history of sexual trauma The major
psychological contributors to ED as identified by feedback model of sexual
dysfunction are anxiety, negative expectations, and spectating. Men who
are anxious about not being able to have an erection tend to focus on
themselves and how they are performing more than on what gives them
pleasure. This spectating increases anxiety, which, physiologically, inhibits
the relaxation of the smooth muscles necessary for erection and,
psychologically, leads to a negative mood state and a focus on negative
expectancies. Since the result is impaired erectile responding, the man’s
fears of not being able to perform are confirmed, and they are likely to
repeat the process in subsequent sexual situations. Performance anxiety is
inherent in most cases of ED. As a man’s penis is visible to both the man
and his partner, the occurrence—or absence—of an erection is a known
event, which increases focus on performance. Men experiencing
performance anxiety will not only worry about erections during sexual
activity, but they also engage in visual or tactile checking of the penis.
By contrast, men with normal erectile response approach sexual situations
with positive expectancies and a focus on erotic cues. Consequently, they
become aroused and are able to obtain and sustain an erection, which
creates a positive feedback loop for future sexual encounters. Although
spectating can be detrimental for men of any age, it appears to be
particularly problematic in young men when they are first becoming
sexually active. In the absence of sexual experience and a variety of sexual
65
Sexual Dysfunction events in which to view evidence of their ability to attain an erection, these
NOTES young men are particularly vulnerable to the influence of negative
expectations about erectile performance.
Other psychosocial factors can contribute to the development and
maintenance of ED. en are likely to meet for ED if they (1) endorse myths
about male sexuality (e.g. “men always want to have sex”), (2) view
themselves as incompetent, and (3) view their sexual problem as internal
and stable over time. Mental health conditions, such as depression,
generalized anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, and
paraphilic disorders, have been linked to ED. In a survey of college-aged
men, Researchers found a high incidence of off-label Viagra use that was
correlated with erectile dysfunction. They suggested that recreational
Viagra use could lead to subsequent cause erectile problems by making
users psychologically dependent on the drug for performance.
TREATMENT
Biomedical treatments for ED include vacuum devices and constriction
rings, intracavernosal injections, intraurethral pharmacotherapy, topical
pharmacotherapy, oral pharmacotherapy, and penile implants. Vacuum
constriction devices, vasoactive gels, and intracavernosal injections are
also recommended by clinicians. Vacuum devices typically consist of a
tube that is placed over the penis, and a vacuum pump that draws blood
into the penile arteries. A constriction ring is placed at the base of the penis
to prevent blood outflow so that the erection is maintained until completion
of the sexual act. Vasoactive gels can be produced in different dosage
levels and with different mixtures of vasodilators. Penile implants are
generally considered a last resort treatment technique when tissue damage
or deterioration is severe or when all other treatments have failed. This may
be the case in men with severe diabetes mellitus or who have had radical
prostatectomy. Researchers are investigating the application of gene
therapy principles to the treatment of ED
It has been proposed that more comprehensive instruction at the beginning
of pharmacological treatment as well as re-education throughout the course
of treatment might improve the rates of medication compliance.
Psychosocial treatments for ED include sensate focus, increasing the level
of erotic stimulation during sexual activity, sex education, and
interpersonal therapy. Sensate focus is considered to be the cornerstone of
sex therapy. Developed by Masters and Johnson, sensate focus centers on
heightening awareness of the sensations associated with sexual activity
rather than on the performance of the sexual act. In certain cases of ED, the
patient may not experiencing sufficient erotic stimulation to achieve an
erection. This may be due to the environment or to a lack of variety or skill
on the part of the male and/or his partner. Couples in long-standing
relationships may have a routine, predictable approach to sexual activity
and thus may be more vulnerable to erectile problems as well as decreased
sexual interest. Sex education involves therapist guidance on the different
aspects of sexual intercourse, and interpersonal therapy focuses on the
relationship problems that may be driving psychogenic erectile
dysfunction.
Lifestyle modifications can significantly improve erectile function. Studies
have shown that targeting factors associated with erectile problems, such as
smoking, obesity, alcohol consumption, and physical activity reduces the
rate of sexual dysfunction.
66
Sexual Dysfunction
Note: a.Write your answer in the space given below NOTES
3. What is hypoactive sexual disorder?
5.5Orgasmic Disorders
During the orgasm phase of the sexual response cycle, an
individual’s sexual pleasure peaks and sexual tension is released as the
muscles in the pelvic region contract, or draw together, rhythmically.
The man’s semen is ejaculated, and the outer third of the woman’s
vaginal wall contracts. Dysfunctions of this phase of the sexual
response cycle are rapid, or premature, ejaculation; male orgasmic
disorder; and female orgasmic disorder (according to DSM-IV).In
DSM 5 Male orgasmic disorder was changed to delayed ejaculation,
however premature ejaculation and female orgasmic disorder remains
unchanged. Orgasmic dysfunction is the medical term for difficulty
reaching an orgasm despite sexual arousal and stimulation.
Orgasms are the intensely pleasurable feelings of release and involuntary
pelvic floor contractions that occur at the height of sexual arousal.
Orgasmic dysfunction is also known as anorgasmia.
There are several different types of orgasmic dysfunction, including:
● Primary orgasmic dysfunction, when a person has never had an
orgasm.
● Secondary orgasmic dysfunction, when a person has had an orgasm
but then has difficulty experiencing one.
● General orgasmic dysfunction, when a person cannot reach orgasm
in any situation despite adequate arousal and stimulation.
● Situational orgasmic dysfunction, when a person cannot orgasm in
certain situations or with certain kinds of stimulation. This type of
orgasmic dysfunction is the most common.
Orgasmic dysfunction can affect both males and females but is more
common in females.
Premature ejaculation is when ejaculation happens sooner than a man or
his partner would like during sex. Occasional premature ejaculation is also
known as rapid ejaculation, premature climax or early ejaculation. It can be
frustrating if it makes sex less enjoyable and impacts relationships.
Premature (early) ejaculation is defined in DSM-5 as a persistent or
recurrent pattern of ejaculation occurring during partnered sexual activity
within about one minute following vaginal penetration and before the
individual wishes it. Although the diagnosis may be applied to individuals
who engage in non-vaginal sexual intercourse, specific duration criteria for
such activities have not been established. In order to meet the diagnostic
criteria, the problem must have persisted for at least six months, must be
experienced on almost all or approximately all occasions of sexual activity,
and must cause significant distress. The disorder may be specified by
severity and can be categorized as lifelong, acquired, generalized, and
situational.
In recent years, there has been considerable disagreement about the
definition, nature, and even the name of the disorder. The DSM-5 sexual
dysfunction sub-workgroup changed the name of the disorder from Self-Instructional Material
67
Sexual Dysfunction “premature ejaculation” to “premature (early) ejaculation,” due to criticism
NOTES of the existing name, which some saw as pejorative. The diagnostic criteria
of the disorder have also been critiqued, as researchers have argued that the
time to ejaculation after penetration criterion oversimplifies and may limit
scientific understanding of the condition. Varying prevalence rates of the
disorder have been reported, likely due to the lack of a universally accepted
set of diagnostic criteria. It is important to note that there are currently no
published epidemiological studies that assess the prevalence of premature
(early) ejaculation as defined in DSM-5. However, many studies have
assessed the prevalence of premature ejaculation concerns. Masters and
Johnson (1970) identified premature (early) ejaculation as one of the most
common male sexual dysfunctions.Unlike ED, this condition has been
estimated to affect younger men more than older men.High rates of
comorbidity are reported for premature (early) ejaculation and ED, with
about one third of men who suffer from premature (early) ejaculation also
experiencing ED.
Factors Associated With Premature (Early) Ejaculation

A number of factors have been shown to play an important role in both
normal and premature ejaculation. Historically, premature ejaculation has
been considered to be a psychological problem. But recent research has
implicated different biological systems in the development and
maintenance of the disorder, indicating that it may be important to focus on
the physiological underpinnings of the ejaculatory process.
Biological Factors
During the first stage of ejaculation (sperm emission), sperm moves from
the epididymis into the vas deferens. This process is controlled by the
contraction of smooth muscles, which is generated by the sympathetic
branch of the autonomic nervous system. After sperm emission, the
individual has the subjective experience that ejaculation is “inevitable,”
known as the “point of inevitable ejaculation” or, more commonly, “the
point of no return!” The striated muscles surrounding the spongiosum
tissue, the cavernous tissue, and in the pelvic floor contract rhythmically,
causing ejaculation to occur. Usually, the subjective experiences of orgasm
is associated with the contractions of the striate muscles and, in most men,
emission, ejaculation, and orgasm are interconnected. For a small portion
of men, however, these phenomena are independent. For example, some
men train themselves to have the subjective experience of orgasm without
ejaculation and some men with premature (early) ejaculation experience
emission without ejaculation.
The precise cause of premature (early) ejaculation is not known, but the
most promising biological etiologies include malfunction of the serotonin
receptors, genetic predisposition, and disruptions of the endocrine system.
It is possible that men who report symptoms of the disorder may have
disturbances in central serotonergic neurotransmission, which could result
in a lower threshold for sexual stimulation. Genetic predispositions may
also play a role in the development of PE. In first-degree male relatives of
Dutch men with lifelong PE, researchers found a high prevalence of PE
suggested a genetic study. Recent research has confirmed the role of the
endocrine system in the control of the ejaculatory reflex. Research also
found that 50% of men with hyperthyroidism also had PE. Indeed, the
68
Sexual Dysfunction
hormone thyrotropin, in addition to testosterone and prolactin, has been
shown to play an independent role in the control of ejaculatory function NOTES
Anxiety has been hypothesized to be one of the primary causes and
maintaining factors for PE. Althof explained that there are three different
mental phenomena related to PE that are characterized by the term
“anxiety.” First, anxiety may reference a phobic response, such fear of the
vaginal canal. Anxiety may also refer to an affectiveresponse, such as
anger towards one’s partner. Finally, anxiety may indicate performance
concerns, such that a preoccupation with poor sexual performance leads to
decreased sexual function and increased avoidance of sexual situations.
Anxiety may have a reciprocal relationship with premature (early)
ejaculation; specifically, performance anxiety may lead to problems with
early ejaculation, and then those problems could increase performance
anxiety. However, laboratory studies have generally not shown significant
differences in levels of anxiety reported by men with and without PE.
One psychological variable that has been shown to distinguish men with
PE from men without PE is perceived control over ejaculation. In an
observational study of men with and without PE Researchers determined
that subject-reported control over ejaculation and personal distress most
strongly predicted a PE diagnosis. A greater understanding of the meaning
men attribute to ejaculatory control may provide important insight into the
psychological factors involved in this disorder.
Early learned experiences and lack of sensory awareness may also be
important psychological factors that lead to PE. Masters and Johnson
examined case histories of men with PE and found that many of these men
had early sexual experiences during which they felt nervous and rushed.
According to Masters and Johnson, these men learned to associate sex and
sexual performance with speed and discomfort. Kaplan considered lack of
sensory awareness to be the immediate cause of premature ejaculation. She
believed that men with PE fail to develop sufficient awareness of their own
level of arousal.
TREATMENT
The most commonly used psychotherapy for increasing ejaculatory latency
is an integration of psychodynamic, behavioral, and cognitive approaches
in a short-term model the focus of psychotherapy for men with PE is to
learn to control ejaculation while understanding the meaning of the
symptom and the context in which the symptom occurs.
Psychodynamically-oriented therapists consider PE to be a metaphor for
conflict in the relationship, while behavior-oriented therapists view the
disorder as a conditioned response to certain interpersonal or
environmental contexts .Common behavioral techniques for increasing
ejaculatory latency are the squeeze technique developed by Masters and
Johnson (1970) and the pause technique (Kaplan, 1989). The squeeze
technique consists of engaging in sexual stimulation alone or with a partner
for as long as possible before ejaculation. Before reaching the “point of
inevitable ejaculation” the man is instructed to stop the activity and apply
tactile pressure to the penile glans to decrease the urge to ejaculate but not
to the point that he completely loses his erection. When the urge has
subsided, the man resumes masturbation or intercourse stopping as many
times as needed to delay ejaculation. The pause technique is similar to the Self-Instructional Material
squeeze technique with the exception that no pressure is applied to the
69
Sexual Dysfunction penis. At times, clinicians may suggest using a PDE5 inhibitor (e.g.,
NOTES Viagra) along with these techniques so that the man can practice delaying
ejaculation without worrying about maintaining an erection. Recent
treatments combine these techniques and experimentation with new sexual
positions that may reduce the propensity towards premature ejaculation. In
one of the few well-controlled premature (early) ejaculation treatment
studies, there was significant increase in ejaculation latency time among
men treated with the squeeze technique compared to men in a wait-list
control condition
Medical treatments include the use of topical anesthetics, such as
prilocaine/lidocaine, to diminish sensitivity used in combination with
condoms (to prevent to the partner’s genitals from being anesthetized). In
men with lifelong PE, treatment with pharmacological antidepressants have
been shown to increase the ejaculation latency and increase sexual pleasure
and satisfaction. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, such as sertraline,
fluoxetine, and paroxetine, have most often been used to treat PE because
of their known side effects of delaying or inhibiting orgasm. These
medications can be taken either daily or on demand 4 to 6 hours before
sexual activity. Clinicians who treat men with PE have come to view the
disorder as a “couple’s problem” and recommend including the partner in
treatment as much as possible to enhance both treatment compliance and
treatment efficacy .In clinical trials, dapoxetine taken before sexual activity
was shown to significantly increase ejaculation latency compared to a pill
placebo
Delayed ejaculation (DE) is defined in DSM-5 as a persistent difficulty or
inability to achieve orgasm despite the presence of adequate desire,
arousal, and stimulation. In order to be diagnosed with the disorder,
patients must present with one of two symptoms: either a delay or an
infrequency of ejaculation on 75-100% of occasions for at least six months.
The disorder can be specified as lifelong or acquired as well as generalized
or situational. Most commonly, the term refers to a condition in which a
man is unable to orgasm with his partner, even though he is able to achieve
and maintain an erection. Typically, men who present with DE are able to
ejaculate during masturbation or sleep.Researchers and clinicians alike
agree that DE is not only the least common of the male sexual dysfunctions
but also the least understood. A key concern that is often associated with
DE but missed by clinicians is that partnered sexual activity may not be as
exciting as masturbation. Techniques used during masturbation, such as
rubbing the penis against different objects or rolling the penis between
one’s hands, may create an intense sense of friction, which is otherwise
elusive during sexual activity with a partner. In addition, masturbation may
have a strong fantasy component, which again may be challenging to
maintain when engaging in sexual intercourse with a partner.
It is important to note that men who are experiencing retrograde ejaculation
do not meet the diagnostic criteria for DE. Retrograde ejaculation occurs
when the ejaculatory fluid travels backward into the bladder rather than
forward through the urethra. This may result from complications after
prostate surgery or as a side effect of certain medications, particularly
anticholinergic drugs.
A “delay” in ejaculation suggests that there are normative amounts of time
in which ejaculation typically occurs. Only one study has addressed this
70
Sexual Dysfunction
question. Prevalence rates of DE in the literature are low. Researchers have
suggested that the rate of DE will rise due to age-related ejaculatory NOTES
decline as well as widespread use of SSRIs, which have been implicated in
increased ejaculation latency.
Factors Associated With Delayed Ejaculation
A number of biological and psychological factors have been shown to play
an important role in delayed ejaculation. Biological factors include damage
to the nerve pathways that facilitate ejaculation, chronic medical
conditions, and potentially age. The various psychological etiologies of the
disorder span from insufficient stimulation to assorted manifestations of
“psychic conflict.”
Biological Factors
During ejaculation, the efferent nerves that cause the release of semen and
the closure of the bladder neck are sympathetic fibers which travel through
the sympathetic ganglia and the peripheral pelvic nerves. Damage to any of
these pathways may compromise ejaculation. Spinal cord injury is most
likely to cause nerve damage that result in DE.
Chronic medical conditions, such as multiple sclerosis and diabetes, are
correlated with DE Short-term, reversible medical conditions, including
prostate infection, urinary tract infection, and substance abuse may also
lead to symptoms of DE. Many psychopharmacological agents, including
antipsychotics and antidepressants, may also lead to ejaculatory delay.
According to researchers, there is conflicting evidence regarding the effect
of age on ejaculatory function. As DE is more common in older males the
disorder may be related to low penile sensitivity, which is associated with
aging. However, low penile sensitivity usually is not the primary cause of
DE .Rather, individual variability in the sensitivity of the ejaculatory
reflex, which is exacerbated with age, may be driving the relationship
between age and DE.
Recently, researchers reviewed the four leading psychological theories of
DE. The first theory focuses on insufficient mental or physical stimulation.
Men with DE may have a diminished ability to experience penile
sensations, as they have been shown to experience less sexual arousal than
men without the disorder. A lack of proper ambiance for sexual activity
may also contribute to insufficient mental stimulation.
The second theory that Althof mentions posits that DE is caused by a high
frequency of masturbation or by a unique, idiosyncratic masturbatory style
that differs greatly from the physical stimulation that occurs during vaginal
penetration. Men with DE may experience a large disparity between the
sensations that they experience when masturbating to a specific fantasy and
the sensations that they experience during partnered sexual activity.
The third theory reviewed centers on “psychic conflict” as the root cause of
DE. This theory was more common in the early stages of psychological
treatment for DE, but some psychodynamically-oriented therapists still
conceptualize the disorder in terms of psychic conflict. Examples of
psychic conflict include fear of loss of self due to loss of semen; fear that
ejaculation may hurt the partner, fear of impregnating the partner, and guilt
from strict religious upbringing.
The final theory suggests that delayed ejaculation may be masking the
presence of a desire disorder. In this case, the male may be overly Self-Instructional Material
71
Sexual Dysfunction concerned with pleasing his partner, and, even when he is not aroused, may
NOTES seek to ejaculate
TREATMENT
There has been limited success in the development and testing of
pharmacological agents aimed at treating DE. Drugs that have been shown
to be somewhat effective may only indirectly affect ejaculatory latency by
altering other components of the sexual response cycle or by countering the
effects of the drugs that led to the ejaculatory problem in the first place.
If the disorder is determined to be primarily psychological in origin, there
are a number of psychosocial interventions that have been shown to
effectively reduce ejaculation latency. Most sex therapists who treat DE
rely on masturbatory retraining as a way to induce higher levels of arousal
and help men rehearse for partnered sexual activity. This intervention may
be particularly helpful for men who have grown accustomed to
masturbating in idiosyncratic ways, such as with specific objects or under
certain conditions. Masturbatory retraining typically entails introducing the
patient to an alternative style of masturbation that mimics the sensations of
partnered sexual activity. Masturbation exercises that progress from neutral
to pleasurable sensations remove the “demand aspects” of performance. If
the disorder is derived from insufficient stimulation, therapists typically
recommend vibrator stimulation, enhanced mental stimulation, and
vigorous pelvic thrusting. For those who are experiencing DE due to
heightened concern for the sexual pleasure of their partners, therapists
encourage less focus on pleasing the partner and more attention to the self
and the sensations experienced during sexual activity.
The DSM-5 defines female orgasmic disorder (FOD) as reduced intensity,
delay, infrequency, and/or absence of orgasm. These symptoms must
persist for at least six months, and they may not be related to other physical
or relational problems. The presence of distress related to these symptoms
is necessary for a diagnosis of FOD. The DSM-5 classification of FOD
distinguishes between lifelong and acquired subtypes as well as between
generalized and situational subtypes. Although not stated in the DSM-5,
the clinical consensus is that a woman who can obtain orgasm during
intercourse with manual stimulation but not intercourse alone would not
meet criteria for clinical diagnosis unless she is distressed by the low
frequency of her sexual response.
Operationalizing FOD is complicated by the fact that the field still lacks a
clear consensus on the definition of the female orgasm. The following
definition of female orgasm was derived by the committee on female
orgasm, presented at the International Consultation on Urological Diseases
in Official Relationship with the World Health Organization (WHO), Paris,
2003:
An orgasm in the human female is a variable, transient peak sensation of
intense pleasure, creating an altered state of consciousness, usually
accompanied by involuntary, rhythmic contractions of the pelvic, striated
circumvaginal musculature often with concomitant uterine and anal
contractions and myotonia that resolves the sexually-induced
vasocongestion (sometimes only partially), usually with an induction of
well-being and contentment
Orgasms are caused by erotic stimulation of both genital and nongenital
zones of women’s bodies. These areas include the clitoris, vagina, other
72
Sexual Dysfunction
areas of the vulva, and the breasts and nipples. Orgasm may also be caused
by fantasy, mental imagery, and hypnosis. Orgasms can occur during sleep, NOTES
precluding the necessity of consciousness for an orgasm to occur. Orgasms
are not generally reported to occur spontaneously without at least some
amount of physical or psychological sexual stimulation; however, some
psychotropic drugs have been reported to induce spontaneous orgasms in
women.
Women who are having difficulties with orgasm do not typically present
with the same degree of distress that has been reported in men with ED.
This may be because women, unlike men, are able to “fake” orgasm, thus
rendering the performance anxiety seen in men unlikely.Young women (18
to 24 years) show lower rates of orgasm than older women for both orgasm
with a partner and orgasm during masturbation This is likely due to age
differences in sexual experience. It is important to note that differences in
research methodology and diagnostic criteria make it difficult to accurately
determine prevalence rates for FOD.
Factors Associated with Women’s Orgasm and FOD
The female orgasm results from a complex interaction of biological,
psychological, and cultural processes. Disruptions in any of these systems
can affect a woman’s ability to orgasm. The most common causes of the
disorder include disturbances in the sympathetic nervous system, different
types of chronic illness, particularly spinal cord injury, sexual guilt,
anxiety, and relationship concerns.
Biological Factors
Impairments in nervous system, endocrine, or brain mechanisms involved
in female orgasm may cause orgasmic dysfunction in some women.
Disease, injury, and disruptions of the sympathetic or parasympathetic
nervous systems in women have been identified as potential causes of
orgasmic difficulties in women. Medical conditions that affect women’s
orgasmic ability include damage to the sacral/pelvic nerves, multiple
sclerosis, Parkinson’s disease, epilepsy, hysterectomy complications,
vulvodynia, hypothalamus-pituitary disorders, kidney disease,
fibromyalgia, and sickle-cell anemia. Women with spinal cord injuries in
the sacral region (interfering with the sacral reflex arc of the spinal cord)
have shown difficulty attaining orgasm . This is believed to be caused by
interference with the vagus nerve, which has been shown to connect the
cervix to the brain
Both vascular and nervous system problems have also been association
with orgasm difficulties. Vascular diseases, such as diabetes mellitus and
atherosclerosis, have been linked to orgasmic dysfunction. With respect to
the nervous system, studies examining blood plasma levels of
neuromodulators before, during, and after orgasm suggest that epinephrine
and norepinephrine levels peak during orgasm in normally functioning
women. With respect to the endocrine system, oxytocin levels are
positively correlated with subjective intensity of orgasm among orgasmic
women, and prolactin levels are elevated for up to 60 minutes following
orgasm. Studies in humans suggest that the paraventricular nucleus of the
hypothalamus, an area of the brain that produces oxytocin, is involved in
the orgasmic response Impairments in any of these systems could feasibly
lead to FOD.
A number of psychotherapeutic drugs have been noted to affect the ability Self-Instructional Material
of women to attain orgasm. Drugs that increase serotonergic activity (e.g.,
73
Sexual Dysfunction antidepressants, such as paroxetine, fluoxetine, and sertraline) or decrease
NOTES dopaminergic activity (e.g., antipsychotics) have been shown to affect
orgasmic capacity. Indeed about one third of women who take SSRIs
report problems with orgasm . These drugs can lead to delayed orgasm or a
complete inability to reach orgasm. There is variability, however, in that
some antidepressants have been associated with impaired orgasm more
often than others. This seems to be related to which specific serotonin
receptor subtype is being activated. As noted earlier, drugs that inhibit
serotonin activity at the serotonin2 receptor cause fewer sexual side effects
in women.
Recently, clinicians have reported that an increasing number of women
believe that the structure of their genitalia may be contributing to
difficulties achieving or maintaining orgasm. This belief has contributed to
an increase in genital plastic surgery, specifically labiaplasty (reduction of
the size of the inner labia and the outer labia), vaginoplasty (rebuilding the
vaginal canal and its mucous membrane), hymenoplasty (reconstruction of
the hymen), perineoplasty (tightening or loosening of the perineal muscles
and the vagina and/or correcting clinical defects or damages of the vagina
and the anus), and G-spot augmentation.
The psychological factors associated with FOD include sexual guilt,
anxiety related to sex, childhood loss or separation from the father, and
relationship issues. Sexual guilt can affect orgasmic abilities by increasing
anxiety and discomfort during sex and also by distracting a woman from
what gives her pleasure. Women who strictly abide by to the values of
Western religions sometimes view sexual pleasure as a sin. Sins are later
connected with a sense of shame and guilt, which could produce negative
affect and cause distracting thoughts during sexual activities. Women who
initiate and are more active participants during sexual activities report more
frequent orgasms, most likely because being active allows women to
assume positions that can provide a greater sense of sexual pleasure. More
frequent masturbation and sexual activities are associated with more
frequent orgasms. It is likely that women who engage in more sexual
activities have a greater understanding of what gives them sexual pleasure
and this can help them more easily reach orgasm. A romantic relationship
in which the woman feels comfortable communicating her sexual needs
may facilitate orgasmic capacity. Therefore, women experiencing
relationship discord might be more at risk of orgasm problems than women
who are satisfied with their relationships. It is important to note that only a
small percentage of women are distressed by their anorgasmia (Graham,
2010).
Certain demographic factors such as age, education, and religion also
provide clues as to psychological factors involved in FOD. Younger
women, aged 18 to 24 years, compared to older women are more likely to
report orgasm problems, during both masturbation and partnered sexual
activity. It is possible that as women age they gain more sexual experience
as well as become more aware of what their bodies need to attain orgasm.
Women with lower levels of education reported more orgasm difficulties
during masturbation than women with higher levels of education. More
educated women might hold more liberal views on sexuality and might be
more likely to see their own pleasure as a goal of sexual activity.
74
Sexual Dysfunction
A negative relation between high religiosity and orgasmic ability in women
is frequently reported in the clinical literature. Possibly, the more religious NOTES
a person, the more likely they are to experience guilt during sexual activity.
Feasibly, guilt could impair orgasm via a number of cognitive mechanisms,
in particular distraction processes. A relationship between improved
orgasmic ability and decreased sexual guilt has also been reported
In addition to specific demographics, it is also possible that overarching
cultural notions of women’s sexuality in general, and the value of women’s
sexual pleasure, in particular, may also play a role in women’s orgasmic
capacity. Women who live in societies that value female orgasm tend to
have more orgasms than women living in societies that discourage the
concept of sexual pleasure for women At the opposite end of the spectrum
are societies that assume women will have no pleasure from coitus and that
the female orgasm does not exist. It may also be that in societies where
sexual pleasure is discouraged it may be shameful to admit to having an
orgasm.
TREATMENT
In general, sex therapy for FOD focuses on promoting healthy changes in
attitudes and sexually relevant thoughts, decreasing anxiety, and increasing
orgasmic ability and satisfaction. Sensate focus and systematic
desensitization are used to treat FOD when anxiety seems to play a role.
Sex education and communication skills training are often included as
adjuncts to treatment. Kegel exercises, which involve tightening and
relaxing the pubococcygeus muscle, are also sometimes included as part of
a treatment regime. Feasibly, they could help facilitate orgasm by
increasing blood flow to the genitals, or by helping the women become
more aware and comfortable with her genitals.
To date, the most efficacious treatment for FOD is directed masturbation
(DM). This treatment utilizes cognitive behavioral therapy techniques to
educate a woman about her body and the sensations of manual self-
stimulation. DM includes several stages that gradually build on one
another. Directed masturbation has been shown to effectively treat primary
FOD when provided in a variety of formats, including individual, group,
couples therapy, and bibliotherapy has been proposed that DM is so
effective because, in the early stages, it eliminates several factors that can
impair orgasmic capacity, such as anxiety that may be associated with the
presence of a partner. Since the exploration is focused on the woman’s
manual sexual stimulation, she is not dependent on her partner’s sexual
ability, or her ability to communicate her sexual needs to her partner until
later in the treatment. Recent research has indicated that DM is particularly
effective for women with primary FOD. If the etiology of the FOD appears
to be related to anxiety about sex, then anxiety reduction techniques such
as systematic desensitization and sensate focus may be useful. These
strategies are often combined with sexual techniques training, DM, sex
education, communication training, bibliotherapy, and Kegel exercises. For
women who have orgasm difficulties resulting from hysterectomy and
oophorectomy, combined estrogen and testosterone therapy has been
shown to enhance orgasmic ability. A number of psychotherapeutic drugs
have been used to try to eliminate orgasm problems that are secondary to
antidepressant drug treatments. Results from placebo-controlled studies, to
date, have failed to identify any drugs that enhance orgasmic ability better Self-Instructional Material
than placebo. However, one study indicated that exercise increases genital
75
Sexual Dysfunction arousal in women taking both SSRIs and SNRIs. As SSRIs are known to
NOTES have greater SNS suppression compared to SNRIs, women talking SSRIs
experienced significantly greater genital response post-exercise than
women taking SNRIs.
4.Explain orgasm phase
Painful intercourse can occur for reasons that range from structural
problems to psychological concerns. Many women have painful intercourse
at some point in their lives. Persistent, recurrent difficulty with sexual
response, desire, orgasm or pain is the symptom. DSM-5 merged the
previously two distinct types of sexual pain vaginismus and dyspareunia,
as recognised by DSM IV, which was marked by enormous physical
discomfort when sexual activity is attempted into Genito-Pelvic Pain or
Penetration Disorder.
The disorder represents an important change in DSM-5 .GPPD is a new
diagnosis that subsumes a number of diagnoses, including vulvodynia,
vaginismus, and non-coital sexual pain disorder due to lack of scientific
research to support this distinction . During any attempt to penetrate, a
reflex action triggers tension in the muscles, resulting in pain. It is an
involuntary reflex, wherein the female has no control over the contraction
of the muscles, and experiences pain that may vary from mild to intense.
The tightening of the muscles can cause difficulties with the use of
tampons, instruments used for gynecological examinations, and the penis
or other sexual objects. The disorder is commonly associated with a
reduced sexual desire and interest. Even when individuals with the disorder
report interest or motivation in sex, they may avoid sexual activity for fear
of pain. Individuals with this disorder may also avoid gynecological
examinations despite medical recommendations. Extreme discomfort or
pain while experiencing or attempting intercourse can reduce sexual desire,
disrupt relationships, and leave a woman feeling less feminine. In DSM 5
there is only one Genito-Pelvic Pain or Penetration Disorder, which
combines genital pain of dyspareunia with muscle tension and fear and
anxiety related to genital plan or penetrative sexual activity Genito-pelvic
pain/penetration disorder may involve a number of causes and symptoms,
both physical and psychological, and a clinician can help an individual or
couple take steps toward restoring a healthy sex life.
The disorder involves difficulty having intercourse and feeling significant
pain upon penetration. The severity can range from a total inability to
experience vaginal penetration to the ability to experience penetration in
one situation but not another. For example, a woman might not feel
discomfort when inserting a tampon but might experience intense pain
when attempting to have vaginal intercourse.
Genito-pelvic pain/penetration disorder was previously referred to as a
sexual pain disorder consisting of dyspareunia (pain in the pelvic area
during or after sexual intercourse) or vaginismus (an involuntary spasm of
76
Sexual Dysfunction
the musculature surrounding the vagina causing it to close, resulting in
penetration being difficult, painful, or impossible). NOTES
The disorder is associated with other challenges, including reduced sexual
desire and avoidance of any genital contact that might cause pain. As a
result, many women living with the disorder may have problems in their
romantic relationships and many report that their symptoms make them
feel less feminine.
Based on past studies of women with “sexual pain disorders” it appears
that genito-pelvic pain/penetration disorder is more likely to have organic
causes than psychological causes.Some examples of physical causes
include acute or chronic infections or inflammation of the vagina or
internal reproductive organs, vaginal atrophy that occurs with aging,scars
from vaginal tearing,or insufficiency of sexual arousal.Recently,some
prominent researchers have argued classifying sexual pain disorders as
“sexual disorders” rather than “pain disorders”
TREATMENT
In past treatment studies of vaginismus and dyspareunia, cognitive-
behavioural interventions have been effective in some cases. Cognitive-
behavioural treatment techniques tend to include education about sexuality,
identifying and correcting maladaptive cognitions, graduated vaginal
dilation exercises to facilitate vaginal penetration, and progressive muscle
relaxation. Medical treatments, such as surgical removal of the vulvar
vestibule, a small area of vulva between the labia minor, can be very
successful. It is likely that genio-pelvic pain/penetration disorder comprises
several distinct syndromes with different etiologies and potentially
different treatments.
5.7Let Us Sum Up
Sexual dysfunctions are characterized by a significant impairment in a
person's ability to respond sexually or to experience sexual pleasure. This
can refer to an inability to perform or reach an orgasm, painful sexual
intercourse, a strong repulsion of sexual activity, or an exaggerated sexual
response cycle or sexual interest. An individual may have several sexual
dysfunctions at the same time. The etiology of sexual dysfunction is
frequently unclear, and clinical judgment is needed. Often, multiple
possible explanations need to be explored, using both medical and
psychiatric examination procedures. Sexual dysfunctions are a group of
psychiatric conditions that include: Delayed Ejaculation, Erectile Disorder,
Male Hypoactive Sexual Desire Disorder, Premature Ejaculation, Female
Orgasmic Disorder, Female Sexual Interest/Arousal Disorder, Genito-
Pelvic Pain/Penetration Disorder.
Several factors can disrupt sexual functioning. Medical conditions such as
multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury or other nerve damage, diabetes,
endocrine (hormonal) disorders, and menopausal status can all lead to
problems of sexual interest or sexual capacity. Certain medications, such
as selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), may have sexual side
effects. Some age-related vascular, nerve-related, and hormonal changes
can also adversely affect sexual functioning. It is important to note that
when sexual dysfunctions can be primarily attributed to one or more of
these biological factors, it should not be diagnosed as a psychiatric
disorder, and treatment should target the underlying medical problem. Self-Instructional Material
77
Sexual Dysfunction However, in many cases, medical concerns can contribute to a sexual
NOTES problem, though not necessarily be the primary cause of the problem. In
such cases, a psychiatric diagnosis may be appropriate.
Other psychiatric disorders can adversely affect sexual function. For
example, Major Depressive Disorder may be characterized by decreased
interest in all or almost all of one’s usual activities. Sexual interest,
therefore, may be diminished. In such cases, a separate diagnosis of sexual
dysfunction is not warranted. However, as was the case with medical
conditions, other psychiatric disorders can contribute to a sexual problem,
though not necessarily be the primary cause of the problem. In such cases,
a diagnosis of sexual dysfunction may be appropriate.
Several psychological issues, even in the absence of a diagnosable
psychiatric disorder, can contribute to sexual dysfunction. Negative body
image may lead to feelings of anxiety around sexuality, inhibiting desire or
capacity. Performance anxiety may similarly lead to problems of sexual
function. Stressors, such as work or family concerns, may preoccupy the
individual, affecting sexual interest or performance. A history of sexual
trauma or other negative historical events may create negative associations
with sexuality, thus undermining function. In such cases, a diagnosis of a
sexual dysfunction is usually warranted.
Relationship factors can also contribute to problems of sexual functioning.
At a purely physical level, often an individual’s sexual concerns stem not
from a problem within the individual, but from a lack of appropriate sexual
stimulation from his or her partner. At an interpersonal level, some
couples suffer from poor sexual communication, have poor understanding
of sexuality, have different desires or preferences for sexual activity, or feel
negatively about each other. All of these factors have the potential to
adversely affect sexual arousal or performance. Such cases should not be
diagnosed as a psychiatric disorder. Again, however, relationship
problems can contribute to a sexual problem, though not necessarily be the
primary cause of the problem. In such cases, a diagnosis of sexual
dysfunction may be appropriate.

1. Compare and contrast the symptoms of the dysfunction of sexual
desire,arousal, and orgasm in men and women.
2. What are the most effective treatments for male erectile disorder and
premature ejaculation and for female orgasmic disorder?
3. Highlight the changes in Diagnostic Criteria of Sexual Dysfunctions
in DSM-5
1. The term sexual dysfunction refers to impairment either in the desire for
sexual gratification or in the ability to achieve it. Sexual dysfunctions are
disorders in which people cannot respond normally in key areas of sexual
functioning, make it difficult or impossible to enjoy sexual intercourse.
2. The four different phases of human sexual response as originally
proposed by Masters and Johnson and Kaplan are Desire phase, excitement
or arousal phase, orgasm and resolution.
3. Hypoactive disorder is a disorder marked by a lack of interest in sex and
hence a low level of sexual activity.
78
Sexual Dysfunction
4. The orgasm phase is the phase of the sexual response cycle during which
an individual’s sexual pleasure peaks and sexual tension is released as NOTES
muscles in the pelvic region contract rhythmically.
1. Robert C. Carson &James N. Butcher. (2007). Abnormal

Psychology. Pearson Education Inc. New Delhi.
2. Barlow and Durand. (2006). Abnormal Psychology. New York.
Pearson India Ltd.
3. Sarason and Sarason. (2010). Abnormal Psychology: The Problem
of Maladaptive Behaviour (11th Edition). New Delhi. Prentice Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd.
79
Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders
NOTES
UNIT VI : SCHIZOPHRENIA AND
PERSONALITY DISORDERS
Structure
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Objectives
6.4.1 Paranoid
6.4.2 Disorganized
6.4.3 Catatonic
6.4.4 Undifferentiated
6.4.5 Residual Type And Other Psychotic Disorders
6.5 Causal Factors
6.7 Let Us Sum Up
6.1 Introduction
Schizophrenia is characterized by an array of diverse symptoms, including
extreme oddities in perception, thinking, action, sense of self, and manner
of relating to others. However, the hallmark of schizophrenia is a
significant loss of contact with reality, referred to as psychosis.
6.2 Objectives
The objectives of this unit are to:
 Bring out an understanding of psychotic condition, schizophrenia
 Explain different types of schizophrenia
 Describe the causal factors of schizophrenia
 Discuss the treatment and outcome of schizophrenia
The hallmark symptoms of this major form of psychotic disorder are
Delusions
A delusion is essentially an erroneous belief that is fixed and firmly held
despite clear contradictory evidence. People with delusions believe things
that others who share their social, religious, and cultural backgrounds do
not believe. A delusion therefore involves a disturbance in the content of
thought. Not all people who have delusions suffer from schizophrenia.
However, delusions are common in schizophrenia, occurring in more than
90 percent of patients at some time during their illness. Prominent among
these are beliefs that one's thoughts, feelings, or actions are being
controlled by external agents (made feelings or impulses), that one's private
thoughts are being broadcast indiscriminately to others (thought
broadcasting), that thoughts are being inserted into one's brain by some
external agency (thought insertion), or that some external agency has
robbed one of one's thoughts (thought withdrawal). Also common are
delusions of reference, where some neutral environmental event (such as a
television program or a song on the radio) is believed to have special and
personal meaning intended only for the person. Other strange propositions,
80
including delusions of bodily changes (e.g, bowels do not work) or removal Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders
of organs, are also not uncommon. Sometimes delusions are not just NOTES
isolated beliefs. Instead they become elaborated into a complex delusional
system.
Hallucinations
A hallucination is a sensory experience that seems real to the person having
it, but occurs in the absence of any external perceptual stimulus. This is
quite different from an illusion, which is a misperception of a stimulus that
actually exist. Hallucinations can occur in any sensory modality (auditory,
visual, olfactory, tactile, or gustatory). However, auditory hallucinations
(e.g, hearing voices) are by far the most common.
Hallucinations often have relevance for the patient at some affective,
conceptual, or behavioral level. Patients can become emotionally involved
in their hallucinations, often incorporating them into their delusions. In
some cases, patients may even act on their hallucinations and do what the
voices tell them to do.
Disorganized Speech and Behavior
Delusions reflect a disorder of thought content. Disorganized speech, on
the other hand, is the external manifestation of a disorder in thought form.
Basically, an affected person fails to make sense, despite seeming to
conform to the semantic and syntactic rules governing verbal
communication. The failure is not attributable to low intelligence, poor
education, or cultural deprivation.
In disorganized speech, the words and word combinations sound
communicative, but the listener is left with little or no understanding of the
point the speaker is trying to make. In some cases, completely new, made-
up words known as neologisms (literally, "new words") appear in the
patient's speech.
Disorganized behavior can show itself in a variety of ways. Goal-directed
activity is almost universally disrupted in schizophrenia. The impairment
occurs in areas of routine dally functioning, such as work, social relations,
and self-care, to the extent that observers note that the person is not himself
or herself anymore. For example, the person may no longer maintain
minimal standards of personal hygiene or may exhibit a profound disregard
of personal safety and health. In other cases, grossly disorganized behavior
appears as silliness or unusual dress.
Catatonia is an even more stirking behavioral disturbance. The patient with

catatonia may show a virtual absence of all movement and speech and be in
what is called a catatonic stupor. At other times, the patient may hold an
unusual posture for an extended period of time without any seeming
discomfort.
Positive and Negative Symptoms
Positive symptoms are those that reflect an excess or distortion in a normal
repertoire of behavior and experience, such as delusions and hallucinations.
Negative symptoms, by contrast, reflect an absence or deficit of behaviors
that are normally present. Important negative symptoms in schizophrenia
include flat affect, or blunted emotional expressiveness, and alogia, which
means very little speech. Another negative symptom is avolition, or the
inability to initiate or persist in goal-directed activities. For example, the
patient may sit for long periods of time staring into space or watching TV
with little interest in any outside work or social activities.
Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders Although most patients exhibit both positive and negative symptoms
NOTES
during the course of their disorders, a preponderance of negative symptoms
in the clinical picture is not a good sign for the patient's future outcome.

1. What are the symptoms of schizophrenia?
2. What is delusion? How is it different from illusion?
There is a great deal of heterogeneity in the presentation of schizophrenia,
and patients with this disorder often look quite different clinically. In
consideration of this, the DSM-IV-TR recognized several subtypes of
schizophrenia. The most clinically meaningful of these were paranoid
schizophrenia (where the clinical picture is dominated by absurd and
illogical beliefs that are often highly elaborated and organized into a
coherent, though delusional, framework), disorganized schizophrenia
(which is characterized by disorganized speech, disorganized behavior, and
flat or inappropriate affect) and catatonic schizophrenia (which involves
pronounced motor signs that reflect great excitement or stupor. Research
using the subtyping approach did not yield major insights into the
etiology or treatment of the disorder. Reflecting this, subtypes of
schizophrenia are no longer included in DSM-5.
6.4.1 PARANOID
People with paranoid type of schizophrenia have an organized system of
delusions and auditory hallucinations that may guide their lives. Patients
may also believe that people are out to get him/her (delusions of
persecution) and that people on television were stealing their ideas
(delusions of reference). In addition, they may hear noises and feel “funny
sensations” that confirmed their beliefs.
6.4.2 DISORGANIZED
The central symptoms of disorganized type of schizophrenia are confusion,
incoherence, and flat or inappropriate affect. Attention and perception
problems, extreme social withdrawal, and odd mannerisms or grimaces are
common. So is flat or inappropriate affect. Silliness, in particular, is
common; some patients giggle constantly without apparent reason. This is
why the pattern was first called “hebephrenic,” after Hebe, the goddess
who, according to Greek mythology, often acted like a clown to make the
other gods laugh. Not surprisingly, people with disorganized schizophrenia
are typically unable to take good care of themselves, maintain social
relationships, or hold a job.
6.4.3 CATATONIC
The psychomotor symptoms of schizophrenia may take certain extreme
forms, collectively called catatonia. People in a catatonic stupor stop
responding to their environment, remaining motionless and silent for long
stretches of time. They can lie motionless and mute in bed for days. People
who display catatonic rigidity maintain a rigid, upright posture for hours
and resist efforts to be moved. Others exhibit catatonic posturing,
assuming awkward, bizarre positions for long periods of time. They may
spend hours holding their arms out at a 90-degree angle or balancing in a
Self-Instructional Material squatting position. They may also display “waxy flexibility,” indefinitely
82
maintaining postures into which they have been placed by someone else. If Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders
a nurse raises a patient’s arm or tilts the patient’s head, for example, the NOTES
individual will remain in that position until moved again. Finally, people
who display catatonic excitement, a different form of catatonia, move
excitedly, sometimes with wild waving of arms and legs.
6.4.4 UNDIFFERENTIATED
When people with this disorder do not fall neatly into one of the other
categories, they are diagnosed with undifferentiated type of schizophrenia.
Because this category is somewhat vague, it has been assigned to a wide
assortment of unusual patterns over the years. Many clinicians believe that
it is in fact overused.
6.4.5 RESIDUAL TYPE AND OTHER PSYCHOTIC DISORDERS
When the symptoms of schizophrenia lessen in strength and number yet
remain in a residual form, the patient’s diagnosis is usually changed to
residual type of schizophrenia. People with this pattern may continue to
display blunted or inappropriate emotions, as well as social withdrawal,
eccentric behavior, and some illogical thinking.
Other Psychotic Disorders
SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER The DSM-5 recognizes a diagnostic
category called schizoaffective disorder. This diagnosis is conceptually
something of a hybrid, in that it is used to describe people who have
features of schizophrenia and severe mood disorder. In other words, the
person not only has psychotic symptoms that meet criteria for
schizophrenia but also has marked changes in mood for a substantial
amount ot time. Because mood disorders can be unipolar or bipolar in type,
these are recognized as subtypes of schizoaffective disorder.
SCHIZOPHRENIFORM DISORDER
Schizophreniform disorder is a category reserved for schizophrenia-like
psychoses that last at least a month but do not last for 6 months and so do
not warrant a diagnosis of schizophrenia. It may include any of the
symptoms described in the preceding sections. Because of the possibility of
an early and lasting remission after a first psychotic breakdown, the
prognosis for schizophreniform disorder is better than that for established
forms of schizophrenia.
DELUSIONAL DISORDER
Patients with delusional disorder, like many people with schizophrenia,
hold beliefs that are considered false and absurd by those around them.
Unlike individuals with schizophrenia, however, people given the
diagnosis of delusional disorder may otherwise behave quite normally.
Their behavior does not show the gross disorganization and performance
deficiencies characteristic of schizophrenia, and general behavioral
deterioration is rarely observed in this disorder, even when it proves
chronic. One interesting subtype of delusional disorder is erotomania.
Here, the theme of the delusion involves great love for a person, usually of
higher status.
BRIEF PSYCHOTIC DISORDER
Brief psychotic disorder is exactly what its name suggests. It involves the
sudden onset of psychotic symptoms or disorganized speech or catatonic
behavior. Even though there is often great emotional turmoil, the episode
usually lasts only a matter of days (too short to warrant a diagnosis of
schizophreniform disorder). After this, the person returns to his or her
former level of functioning and may never have another episode again.
Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders Check your Progress – 2
NOTES
3. Why are subtypes of schizophrenia not included in DSM V?
4. What is catatonia?
6.5 Causal Factors
Genetic factors are clearly implicated in schizophrenia. Having a relative
with the disorder significantly raises a person's risk of developing
schizophrenia. Other factors that have been implicated in the development
of schizophrenia include prenatal exposure to the influenza virus, early
nutritional deficiencies, rhesus incompatibly, maternal stress, and perinatal
birth complications. Urban living, immigration, and cannabis use during
adolescence have also been shown to increase the risk of developing
schizophrenia. Current thinking about schizophrenia emphasizes the
interplay between genetic and environmental factors.
Patients with schizophrenia have problems in many aspects of their
cognitive functioning. They show a variety of attentional deficits (e.g poor
P50 suppression and deficits on the Continuous Performance Test). They
also show eye-tracking dysfunctions. Many brain areas are abnormal in
schizophrenia, although abnormalities are not found in all patients. The
brain abnormalities that have been found include enlarged ventricles
(which reflects decreased brain volume), frontal lobe dysfunction, reduced
volume of the thalamus, and abnormalities in temporal lobe areas such as
the hippocampus and amygdala. Major changes in the brain occur during
adolescence. These include synaptic pruning, decreases in the number of
excitatory neurons, and increases in the number of inhibitory neurons.
There is also an increase in white matter which enhances the connectivity
of the brain. Some of these changes may be abnormal in people who will
later develop schizophrenia. Some of the brain abnormalities that are
characteristic of schizophrenia get worse over time. This suggests that, in
addition to being a neurodevelopmental disorder, schizophrenia is also a
neuroprogressive disorder.
The most important neurotransmitters implicated in schizophrenia are
dopamine and glutamate. Research shows that the dopamine (D2) receptors
of patients with schizophrenia are supersensitive to dopamine.
Family environment
Patients with schizophrenia are more likely to relapse if their relatives are
high in expressed emotion (EE). High-EE environments may be stressful to
patients and may trigger biological changes that cause dysregulations in the
dopamine system. This could lead to a return of symptoms.
For many patients, schizophrenia is a chronic disorder requiring long-term
treatment or institutionalization. However, when treated with therapy and
medications, around 38 percent of patents can show a reasonable recovery.
Only about 14 percent of patients recover to the extent that they have
minimal symptoms and function well socially.
Patients with schizophrenia are usually treated with first or second-
generation antipsychotic (neuroleptic) medications. Second-generation
antipsychotics are about as effective as first generation antipsychotic but
cause fewer extrapyramidal (motor abnormality) side effects.
Self-Instructional Material Antipsychotic drugs work by blocking dopamine receptors.
84
Psychosocial treatments for patients with schizophrenia include cognitive- Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders
behavioral therapy, social-skills training, cognitive remediation training, NOTES

and other forms of individual treatment, as well as case management.
Family therapy provides families with communication skills and other
skills that are helpful in managing the illness. Family therapy also reduces
high levels of expressed emotion
5. What are the important neurotransmitters implicated in
schizophrenia?
6. What psychosocial treatments will be helpful for schizophrenics?
6.7 Let Us Sum Up
Schizophrenia is a disorder in which personal, social, and occupational
functioning deteriorate as a result of disturbed thought processes, distorted
perceptions, unusual emotions, and motor abnormalities. The symptoms of
schizophrenia fall into three groupings. Positive symptoms include
delusions, certain formal thought disorders, hallucinations and other
disturbances in perception and attention, and inappropriate affect.
Negative symptoms include poverty of speech, blunted and flat affect, loss
of volition, and social withdrawal. The disorder may also include
psychomotor symptoms, collectively called catatonia in their extreme form.
Schizophrenia usually emerges during late adolescence or early adulthood
and tends to progress through three phases: prodromal, active, and
residual. Most clinical theorists now agree that schizophrenia can probably
be traced to a combination of biological, psychological, and sociocultural
factors. However, the biological factors have been more precisely
identified.
For years all efforts to treat schizophrenia brought only frustration. The
disorder is still difficult to treat, but today’s therapies are more successful
than those of the past. For more than half of the twentieth century, the main
treatment for schizophrenia and other severe mental disorders was
institutionalization and custodial care.In the 1950s two in-hospital
approaches were developed, milieu therapy and token economy programs
which brought improvement and particularly helped patients to care for
themselves and feel better about themselves.
The discovery of antipsychotic drugs in the 1950s revolutionized the
treatment of schizophrenia and other disorders marked by psychosis. Today
they are almost always a part of treatment. Theorists believe that the first
generation of antipsychotic drugs operates by reducing excessive dopamine
activity in the brain. These “conventional” antipsychotic drugs reduce the
positive symptoms of schizophrenia more completely, or more quickly,
than the negative symptoms. The conventional antipsychotic drugs can also
produce dramatic unwanted effects, particularly movement abnormalities
called extrapyramidal effects, which include Parkinsonian and related
symptoms, neuroleptic malignant syndrome, and tardive dyskinesia.
Tardive dyskinesia apparently occurs in more than 10 percent of the people
who take conventional antipsychotic drugs for an extended time and can be
difficult or impossible to eliminate, even when the drugs are stopped.
Recently atypical antipsychotic drugs (such as clozapine, risperidone, and Self-Instructional Material
Schizophrenia and Personality Disorders olanzapine) have been developed, which seem to be more effective than the
NOTES
conventional drugs and to cause fewer or no extrapyramidal effects.
Today psychotherapy is often employed successfully in combination with

antipsychotic drugs. Helpful forms include cognitive-behavioral therapy,
family therapy, and social therapy. Family support groups and family
psychoeducational programs are also growing in number.
Among the key elements of effective community care programs are

coordination of patient services by a community mental health center,
short-term hospitalization (followed by aftercare), day centers, halfway
houses, and occupational training. Unfortunately, such care is not
widespread in India until today.The potential of proper community care to
help people recovering from schizophrenia and other severe disorders,
however, continues to capture the interest of clinicians and policy makers.
1. Describe the clinical features of schizophrenia.
2. Discuss the causal factors of schizophrenia
3. Evaluate the treatment and outcome of schizophrenia.
1. Characteristic symptoms of schizophrenia includes hallucinations,
delusions, disorganized speech, disorganized and catatonic
behaviour, and negative symptoms such as flat affect or social
withdrawal.
2. A delusion is essentially an erroneous belief that is fixed and firmly
held despite clear contradictory evidence. Illusion is misperception.
3. Research using the subtyping approach did not yield major insights
into the etiology or treatment of the disorder hence, subtypes of
schizophrenia are no longer included in DSM-5.
4. The psychomotor symptoms of schizophrenia are collectively called
catatonia
5. Dopamine and Glutamate
6. Cognitive-behavioural therapy, social-skills training, cognitive
remediation training, other forms of individual treatment, case
management and family therapy.
1. Butcher, J. N., Hooley, J. M., Mineka, S., &Dwivedi, C.B. (2017).
Abnormal Psychology. Noida: Thomson Press India Ltd.
2. Carson, R. C., & Butcher, J. N. (2007). Abnormal Psychology. New
Delhi: Pearson Education Inc.
3. Sarason&Sarason (2010). Abnormal Psychology: The Problem of
Maladaptive Behaviour (11thEdn). New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd.
86
UNIT VII: PERSONALITY DISORDERS NOTES

Structure
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Objectives
7.4.1 Paranoid Personality Disorder
7.4.2 Schizoid Personality Disorder
7.4.3 Schizotypal Personality Disorder
7.4.4 Histrionic Personality Disorder
7.4.5 Narcissistic Personality Disorder
7.4.6 Antisocial Personality Disorder
7.4.7 Borderline Personality Disorder
7.4.8 Avoidant Personality Disorder
7.4.9 Dependent Personality Disorder
7.4.10 Obsessive Compulsive Personality Disorder
7.7 Let Us Sum Up
7.1 Introduction
Each of us has a personality—a unique and enduring pattern of inner
experience and outward behavior. We tend to react in our own predictable
and consistent ways. These consistencies, often called personality traits,
may be the result of inherited characteristics, learned responses, or a
combination of the two. Yet our personalities are also flexible. We learn
from experience. As we interact with our surroundings, we try out various
responses to see which are more effective. This is a flexibility that people
who suffer from a personality disorder usually do not have.
A personality disorder is an inflexible pattern of inner experience and

outward behavior. The pattern is seen in most of the person’s interactions,
continues for years, and differs markedly from the experiences and
behaviors usually expected of people. The rigid traits of people with
personality disorders often lead to psychological pain for the individual and
social or occupational difficulties. The disorders may also bring pain to
others. Personality disorders typically become recognizable in adolescence
or early adulthood, although some start during childhood. These are among
the most difficult psychological disorders to treat. Many sufferers are not
even aware of their personality problems and fail to trace their difficulties
to their inflexible style of thinking and behaving.
DSM-IV-TR identifies 10 personality disorders and separates them into

three groups, called clusters (APA, 2000). One cluster, marked by odd or
eccentric behavior, consists of the paranoid, schizoid, and schizotypal
personality disorders. A second group features dramatic behavior and
consists of the antisocial, borderline, histrionic, and narcissistic
personality disorders. The final cluster features a high degree of anxiety Self-Instructional Material
87
and includes the avoidant, dependent, and obsessive-compulsive
NOTES personality disorders. The personality disorders listed in DSM IV-TR
overlap so much that it can be difficult to distinguish one from the other.
7.4 Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to
 Understand the reasons for individual’s behavioural problems
arising from their personality makeup.
 Identify the key features of different personality disorders
 Analyze the cause factors of various personality disorders
 Understand the difficulty in treating personality problems and
devise strategies for healthy personality development

There are certain people who, although they do not necessarily
display obvious symptoms of most of the disorders. Nevertheless have
certain traits that are so inflexible and maladaptive that they are unable to
perform adequately at least some of the varied roles expected of them by
their society, in which case we may say that they have a personality
disorder.
Two of the general features that characterize most personality disorder are
the chronic interpersonal difficulties and problem with one's identify or
sense of self.
According to general DSM-5 criteria for diagnosing a personality disorder,
the person's enduring pattern of behaviour must be pervasive and
inflexible, as well as stable and of long duration. It must also cause either
clinically significant distress or impairment in functioning and be
manifested in at least two of the following areas; cognition, affectivity,
interpersonal functioning, or impulses control. From a clinical standpoint,
people with personality disorder often cause at least as much difficulty in
the lives of others as they do in their own lives.
Stem largely from the gradual development of inflexible and distorted
personality and behavioural patterns that result in persistently maladaptive
ways of perceiving, thinking about, and relating to the world. In many
cases, major stressful life events early in life help set the stage for the
development of these inflexible and distorted personality patterns.
The category of personality disorders is broad, encompassing behavioural
problems that differ greatly in form and severity. In the milder cases there
are people who generally function adequately but who would be described
by their relatives, friends, or associates as troublesome, eccentric, or hard
to get know. One severe form of personality disorder (antisocial personality
disorder) results in extreme and often unethical “acting out” against
society.
The DSM-5 personality disorders are grouped into three clusters.
Cluster A: Includes paranoid, schizoid and schizotypal personality
disorders. People with these disorders often seem odd or eccentric, with
unusual behaviour ranging from distrust and suspiciousness to social
detachment.
88
Cluster B: Includes histrionic, narcissistic, antisocial and borderline
personality disorders. Individuals with these disorders share a tendency to NOTES
be dramatic, emotional and erratic.
Cluster C: Includes avoidant, dependent and obsessive compulsive
personality disorders often show anxiety and fearfulness.
1. What are the characteristic features of Cluster A personality disorders?
2. What are the characteristic features of Cluster B personality disorders?
3. What are the characteristic features of Cluster C personality disorders?
CLUSTER A PERSONALITY DISORDERS

People with Cluster A personality disorders display unusual
behaviours such as distrust, suspiciousness, and social detachment and
often come across as odd or eccentric.
7.10.1 PARANOID PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with paranoid personality disorder have a pervasive
suspiciousness and distrust of other, leading to numerous interpersonal
difficulties. They tend to see themselves as blameless, instead blaming
others for their own mistakes and failures. Such people are chronically
tense and “on guard” constantly expecting trickery and looking for clues to
validate their expectations which disregarding all evidence to the contrary.
They are often preoccupied with doubts about the loyalty of friends and
hence are reluctant to confide in others. They commonly bear grudges,
refuse to forgive perceived insults and slights, and are quick to react with
anger and sometimes violent behavior. People with paranoid personalities
are not usually psychotic; that is, most of the time they are in clear contact
with reality, although they may experience transient psychotic symptoms
during periods of stress. People with paranoid schizophrenia share some
symptoms found in paranoid personality, but they have many additional
problems including more persistent loss of contact with reality, delusions,
and hallucinations. Nevertheless, individuals with paranoid personality
disorder do appear to be at increased risk for schizophrenia.
7.10.2 SCHIZOID PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with schizoid personality disorder are usually unable to form
social relationships and usually lack must interest in doing so.
Consequently, they tend not to have good friends, with the possible
exception of a close relative. Such people are unable to express their
feelings and are seen by others as cold and distant. They often lack social
skills and can be classified as loners or introverts, with solitary interests
and occupations, although not all loners or introverts have schizoid
personality disorder. People with this disorder tend not to take pleasure in
many activities, including sexual activity, and rarely marry. More
generally, they are not very emotionally reactive, rarely experiencing
strong positive or negative emotions, but rather show a generally apathetic
mood. They show extremely high levels of introversion (especially low on
89
warmth, gregariousness, and positive emotions). They are also low on
NOTES openness to feeling (one facet of openness to experience)
7.10.3 SCHIZOTYPAL PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with schizotypal personality disorder are also excessively
introverted and have pervasive social and interpersonal deficits. In addition
they have cognitive and perceptual distortions, as well as oddities and
eccentricities in their communication and behaviour. Although contact with
reality is usually maintained, high personalized and superstitious thinking
is characteristic of people with schizotypal personality, and under extreme
stress they may experience transient psychotic symptoms. Indeed, they
often believe that they have magical powers and may engage in magical
rituals. Other cognitive-perceptual problems include ideas of reference (the
belief that conversations or gestures of others have special meaning or
personal significance), odd speech and paranoid beliefs.
Oddities in thinking, speech, and other behaviors are the most stable
characteristics of schizotypal personality disorder and are similar to those
often seen in patients with schizophrenia.
CLUSTER B PERSONALITY DISORDERS

People with Cluster B personality disorders share a tendency to be
dramatic, emotional, and erratic.
7.10.4 HISTRIONIC PERSONALITY DISORDER
Excessive attention-seeking behavior and emotionality are the key
characteristics of individuals with histrionic personality disorder. These
individuals tend to feel unappreciated if they are not the center to attention;
their lively, dramatic and excessively extraverted styles often ensure that
they can charm others into attending to them. But these qualities do not
lead to stable and satisfying relationship because others tire of providing
this level of attention. In craving stimulation and attention, their
appearance and behavior are often quite theatrical and emotional as well as
sexually provocative and seductive. They may attempt to control their
partners though seductive behavior and emotional manipulation, but they
also show a good deal of dependence. Their speech is often vague and
impressionistic and they are usually considered self-centered, vain and
excessively concerned about the approval of others, who see them as
overly reactive, shallow and insincere
7.10.5 NARCISSISTIC PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with narcissistic personality disorder show an exaggerated
sense of self-importance, a preoccupation with being admired, and a lack of
empathy for the feelings of others. Numerous studies support the notion of
two subtypes of narcissism: grandiose and vulnerable narcissism. The
grandiose presentation of narcissistic patients is manifested by traits related
to grandiosity, aggression, and dominance. These are reflected in a strong
tendency to overestimate their abilities and accomplishments while
underestimating the abilities and accomplishment of others. Their sense of
entitlement is frequently a source of astonishment to others, although they
themselves seem to regard their lavish expectations as merely what they
deserve. They behave in stereotypical way (e.g., with constant self-
reference and bragging) to grain the acclaim and recognition they crave.
Because they believe they are so special, they often think they can be
understood only by other high-status people or that they should associate
only with such people. Finally, their sense of entitlement is also associated
90
with their unwillingness to forgive others for perceived slights, and they
easily take offense. NOTES
Narcissistic personalities also share another central trait they unwilling or
unable to take the perspective of other, to see things other than “through
their own eyes.” Moreover if they do not receive the validation or
assistance they desire, they are inclined to be hypercritical and retaliatory.
7.10.6 ANTISOCIAL PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with antisocial personality disorder (ASPD) continually violate
and show disregard for the rights of other through deceitful, aggressive, or
antisocial behavior, typically without remorse or loyalty to anyone. They
tend to be impulsive, irritable, aggressive and to show a pattern of
generally irresponsible behavior. This pattern of behaviour must have been
occurring since the age of 15, and before age 15 the person must have had
symptoms of conduct disorder, a similar disorder occurring in children and
young adolescents who show persistent patterns of aggression towards
people or animals, destruction of property, deceitfulness or theft, and
serious violation of rules at home or in schools.
7.10.7 BORDERLINE PERSONALITY DISORDER
People with borderline personality disorder (BPD) show a pattern of
behaviour characterized by impulsivity and instability in interpersonal
relationship, self-image, and moods.
The central characteristic of BPD is affective instability, manifested by
unusually intense emotional responses to environmental triggers, with
delayed recovery to a baseline emotional state. Affective instability is also
characterized by drastic and rapid shifts from one emotion to another.
People with BPD have a highly unstable self-image or sense of self, which
is sometimes described as "impoverished and/or fragmented". These people
have highly unstable interpersonal relationship. These relationships tend to
be intense but stormy, typically involving overidealizations,
disappointment, and anger. Nevertheless, they may make desperate efforts
to avoid real or imagined abandonment, perhaps because their fears of
abandonment are so intense. Another very important feature of BPD is
impulsivity characterized by rapid responding to environmental triggers
without thinking (or caring) about long term consequence. These
individuals’ high level of impulsivity combined with their extreme
affective instability often lead to erratic, self-destructive behavior such as
gambling sprees or reckless driving, suicide attempts, sometimes flagrantly
manipulative, can be part of clinical picture. Self-mutilation (such as
repetitive cutting behavior) is another characteristic feature of borderline
personality. However many people who engage in self-injury do not have
BPD. In some cases the self-injurious behavior is associated with relief
from anxiety or dysphoria, and it also serves to communicate the person's
level of distress to others. Research has also documented that borderline
personality is associated with analgesia in as many as 70 to 80 percent of
women with BPD (analgesia is the absence of the experience of pain in the
presence of theoretically painful stimulus)
In addition to affective and impulsive behavioral symptoms, as many as 75
percent of people with BPD has cognitive symptoms. These include
relatively short or transient episodes in which they appear to be out of
contact with reality and experience delusions or other psychotic-like
symptoms such as hallucination, paranoid ideas, or severe dissociative Self-Instructional Material
symptoms.
91
CLUSTER C PERSONALITY DISORDERS
NOTES People with Cluster C personality disorders often show anxiety and
fearfulness. These are characteristics that we do not see in the other
two clusters.
7.10.8 AVOIDANT PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with avoidant personality disorder show extreme social
inhibition and introversion, leading to lifelong patterns of limited social
relationships and reluctance to enter into social interactions. Because of
their hypersensitivity to, and fear of, criticism and rebuff, they do not seek
out other people, yet they desire affection and are often lonely and bored.
Unlike schizoid personalities, people with avoidant personality disorder do
not enjoy their aloneness; their inability to relate comfortably to other
people causes acute anxiety and is accompanied by low self-esteem and
excessive self-consciousness, which in turn are often associated with
depression. Feeling inept and socially inadequate are the two most
prevalent and stable features of avoidant personality. The person with
avoidant personality also desires interpersonal contact but avoids it for fear
of rejection, whereas in schizoid personality disorder there is a lack of
desire or ability to form social relationships.
7.10.9 DEPENDENT PERSONALITY DISORDER
Individuals with dependent personality disorder show an extreme need to
be taken care of, which leads to clinging and submissive behavior. They
also show acute fear at the possibility of separation or sometimes of simply
having to be alone because they see themselves as incompetent. These
individuals usually build their lives around other people and subordinate
their own needs and views to keep these people involved with them.
Accordingly, they may be indiscriminate in their selection of mates. They
often fail to get appropriately angry with others because of a fear of losing
their support, which means that people with dependent personalities may
remain in psychologically or physically abusive relationships. They have
great difficulty making even simple, everyday decisions without a great
deal of advice and reassurance because they lack self-confidence and feel
helpless even when they have actually developed good work skills or other
competencies. They may function well as long as they are not required to
be on their own.
It is quite common for people with dependent personality disorder to have
comorbid diagnosis of mood and anxiety disorder. Some features of
dependent personality disorder overlap with those of borderline, histrionic,
and avoidant personality disorders, but there are differences as well. For
example, both borderline personalities and dependent personalities fear
abandonment. However, the borderline personality, who usually has
intense and stormy relationships, reacts with feelings of emptiness or rage
if abandonment occurs, whereas the dependent personality reacts initially
with submissiveness and appeasement and then finally with an urgent
seeking of a new relationship. Histrionic and dependent personalities both
have strong needs for reassurance and approval, but the histrionic
personality is much more gregarious, flamboyant, and actively demanding
of attention, whereas the dependent personality is more docile and self-
effacing. It can also be hard to distinguish between dependent and avoidant
personalities. As noted, dependent personalities have great difficulty
separating in relationships because they feel incompetent on their own and
have a need to be taken care of, whereas avoidant personalities have
92
trouble initiating relationships because they fear criticism or rejection,
which will be humiliating. NOTES
7.10.10 OBSESSIVE COMPULSIVE PERSONALITY
DISORDER
Perfectionism and an excessive concern with maintaining order and control
characterize individuals with obsessive-compulsive personality disorder
(OCPD). Their preoccupation with maintaining mental and interpersonal
control occurs in part through careful attention to rules, order, and
schedules. They are very careful in what they do so as not to make
mistakes, but because the details they are preoccupied with are often trivial
they use their time poorly and have a difficult time seeing the larger
picture. This perfectionism is also often quite dysfunctional in that it can
result in their never finishing projects. They also tend to be devoted to
work to the exclusion of leisure activities and may have difficulty relaxing
or doing anything just for fun. At an interpersonal level, they have
difficulty delegating tasks to others and are quite rigid, stubborn, and cold,
which is how others tend to view them. Research indicates that rigidity,
stubbornness, and perfectionism, as well as reluctance to delegate, are the
most prevalent and stable features of OCPD.
It is important to note that people with OCPD do not have true obsessions
or compulsive rituals that are the source of extreme anxiety or distress in
people with obsessive-compulsive disorder. Instead, people with OCPD
have lifestyles characterized by over-conscientiousness, high neuroticism,
inflexibility, and perfectionism but without the presence of true obsessions
or compulsive rituals. Some features of OCPD overlap with some features
of narcissistic, antisocial, and schizoid personality disorders, although there
are also distinguishing features. For example, individuals with narcissistic
and ASPDs may share the lack of generosity toward others that
characterizes OCPD, but the former tend to indulge themselves, whereas
those with OCPD are equally unwilling to be generous with themselves. In
addition, both the schizoid and the obsessive-compulsive personalities may
have a certain amount of formality and social detachment, but only the
schizoid personality lacks the capacity for close relationships. The person
with OCPD has difficulty in interpersonal relationships because of
excessive devotion to work and great difficulty expressing emotions.

4. What is the difference between OCD and OCPD?
5. What disorder precedes antisocial personality disorder before age 15?

Casual factors of Paranoid Personality Disorder
Little is known about important causal factors for paranoid personality
disorders. Some have argued for partial genetic transmission that may link
the disorder to schizophrenia, but results examining this issue are
inconsistent, and if there is a significant relationship it is not a strong one.
Psychosocial causal factors that are suspected to play a role include
parental neglect or abuse and exposure to violent adults, although any links Self-Instructional Material
93
between early adverse experiences and adult paranoid personality disorder
NOTES are clearly not specific to this one personality disorder and may play a role
in other disorders as well.
Causal factors of Schizoid Personality Disorder
Early theorists considered a schizoid personality to be a likely precursor to
the development of schizophrenia, but this viewpoint has been challenged,
and any genetic link that may exist is very modest. Schizoid personality
traits have also been shown to have only a modest heritability. Some
theorists have suggested that the severe disruption is sociability seen in
schizoid personality disorder may be due to severe impairment in an
underlying affiliative system. Cognitive theorists purpose that individuals
with schizoid personality disorder exhibit cool and aloof behaviour because
of maladaptive underlying schemas that lead them to view themselves as
self-sufficient loners and to view others as intrusive. Their core
dysfunctional belief might be “I am basically alone” or “Relationship are
messy [and] undesirable”. Unfortunately, we do not know why or how
some people might develop such dysfunctional beliefs.
Causal factors of Schizotypal personality Disorder
The heritability of schizotypal personality disorder is moderate. The
biological associations of schizotypal personality disorder with
schizophrenia are remarkable. A number of studies on patients, as well as
college students, with schizotypal personality disorder have shown the
same deficit in the ability to track a moving target visually that is found in
schizophrenia. They also show numerous other mild impairments in
cognitive functioning including deficits in their ability to sustain attention
and deficits in working memory. Both of which are common in
schizophrenia. In addition, individuals with schizotypal personality
disorder, like patients with schizophrenia, show deficits in their ability to
inhibit attention to a second stimulus that rapidly follows presentation of a
first stimulus. They are also show language abnormalities that may be
related to abnormalities in their authority processing.
A genetic relationship to schizophrenia has also long been suspected. In
fact, this disorder appears to be part of a spectrum of liability of
schizophrenia that often occurs in some of first-degree relatives of people
with schizophrenia. Moreover, teenagers who have schizotypal personality
disorder have been shown to be at increased risk for developing
schizophrenia and schizophrenia-spectrum disorders in adulthood.
Nevertheless, it has also been proposed that there is a second subtype of
schizotypal personality disorders that is not genetically linked to
schizophrenia. This subtype is characterized by cognitive and perceptual
deficits and is instead linked to a history of childhood abuse and early
trauma. Schizotypal personality disorders in adolescence have been
associated with elevated exposure to stressful life events and low family
socioeconomic status.
Causal factors of Histrionic personality Disorder
Histrionic personality disorder is highly comorbid with borderline,
antisocial, narcissistic, and dependent personality disorder diagnoses.
There is some evidence for a genetic link with antisocial personality
disorder, the idea being that there may be some common underlying
predisposition that is more likely to be manifested in women as histrionic
personality disorder and in men as antisocial personality disorder. The
suggestion of some genetic propensity to develop this disorder is also
94
supported by findings that histrionic personality disorder may be
characterized as involving extreme versions of two commons, normal NOTES
personality traits, extraversion and, to a lesser extent, neuroticism two
normal personality traits known to have a partial genetic basis.
Cognitive theorists emphasize the important of maladaptive schemas
revolving around the need for attention to valid self-worth. Core
dysfunctional beliefs might include, “Unless I captivate people, I am
nothing” and “If I can’t entertain people, they will abandon me”. No
systematic research has yet explored how these dysfunctional beliefs might
develop.
Casual factors of Narcissistic personality disorder
The grandiose and vulnerable forms of narcissism are associated with
different causal factors. Grandiose narcissism has not generally been
associated with childhood abuse, neglect or poor parenting. Indeed there is
some evidence that grandiose narcissism is associated with parental
overvaluation. By contrast, vulnerable narcissism has been associated with
emotional, physical, and sexual abuse, as well parenting styles
characterized as intrusive, controlling, and cold.
Casual factors of Anti-social personality disorder
Genetic and temperamental, learning, and adverse environmental factors
seem to be important in causing psychopathy and ASPD. Pscyhopaths also
show deficiency in fear and anxiety as well as more general emotional
deficits.
Casual Factors of Borderline Personality Disorder
Research suggested that genetic factors play a significant role in the
development of BPD. There is also some preliminary evidence that certain
parts of the 5-HTT gene implicated in depressive many also be associated
with BPD. Recent research also suggests a link with other genes involved
in regulating dopamine transmission.
There has also been an intense search for the biological substrate of BPD.
For example, people with BPD often appear to be characterized by lowered
functioning of the neurotransmitter serotonin, which is involved in
inhibiting behavioral responses. This is may be why they show impulsive -
aggressive behavior, as in acts of self-mutilation; that is, their serotonergic
activity is too low to "put the brakes on" impulsive behavior.
Much theoretical and research attention has also been directed to the role of
psychosocial causal factors in BPD. Although the vast majority of this
research is retrospective in nature, relying on people's memories of their
past to discover the antecedents of the disorder, two prospective
community based studies have shown that childhood adversity and
maltreatment is linked to adult BPD. People with this disorder usually
report a large number of negative-even traumatic-events in childhood.
These experiences include abuse and neglects, and separation and loss.
Causal Factors of Avoidant Personality Disorder
Some research suggests that avoidant personality may have its origins in an
innate "inhibited' temperament that leaves the infant and child shy and
inhibited in novel and ambiguous situations. Genetically and biologically
based inhibited temperament may often serve as the diathesis that leads to
avoidant personality disorder in some children who experience emotional
abuse, rejection, or humiliation from parents who are not particularly
affectionate. Self-Instructional Material
Causal Factors of Dependent Personality Disorder
95
Some evidence indicates that there is a modest genetic influence on
NOTES dependent personality traits. Several other personality traits such as
neuroticism and agreeableness that are also prominent in dependent
personality disorder also have a genetic component. It is possible that
people with these partially genetically based predispositions to dependence
and anxiousness may be especially prone to the adverse effects of parents
who are authoritarian and overprotective (not promoting autonomy and
individuation in their child but instead reinforcing dependent behavior)
This might lead children to believe that they are reliant on others for their
own well-being and are incompetent on their own. Cognitive theorists
describe the underlying maladaptive schemas for these individuals as
involving core beliefs about weakness and competence and needing others
to survive. Such as, “I am completely helpless" and "I can function only if I
have access to somebody competent”
Causal Factors of Obsessive-Compulsive Personality Disorder
Theorists who take a five-factor dimensional approach to understanding
OCPD note that these individuals have excessively high levels of
conscientiousness. This leads to extreme devotion to work, perfectionism,
and excessive controlling behavior. They are also high on assertiveness and
low on compliance. Individuals with obsessive-compulsive personalities
have low levels of novelty seeking (i.e., they avoid change) and reward
dependence (i.e., they work excessively at the expense of pleasurable
pursuits) but high levels of harm avoidance (i.e., they respond strongly to
aversive stimuli and try to avoid them). Recent research has also
demonstrated that the OCPD traits show a modest genetic influence. The
sociocultural factors that contribute to personality disorders are not well
understood.
Personality disorders are generally very difficult to treat, in part because
they are, by definition, relatively enduring, pervasive, and inflexible
patterns of behavior and inner experience. Moreover, many different goals
of treatment can be formulated, and some are more difficult to achieve than
others. Goals might include reducing subjective distress, changing specific
dysfunctional behaviors, and changing whole patterns of behavior or the
entire structure of the personality.
In many cases, people with personality disorders enter treatment only at
someone else's insistence, and they often do not believe that they need to
change. Moreover, those from the odd/ eccentric Cluster A and the
erratic/dramatic Cluster B have general difficulties in forming and
maintaining good relationships, including with a therapist. For those from
the erratic/dramatic Cluster B, the pattern of acting out typical in their other
relationships is carried into the therapy situation, and instead of dealing
with their problems at the verbal level they may become angry at their
therapist and loudly disrupt the sessions. Non-completion of treatment is a
particular problem in the treatment of personality disorders.
In addition, people who have a personality disorder in addition to another
disorder (such as depression or an eating disorder) do not, on average, do
as well in treatment for their other disorder as do patients without comorbid
personality disorders. This is partly because people with personality
disorders have rigid, ingrained personality traits that often lead to poor
96
therapeutic relationships and additionally make them resist doing the things
that would help improve their other conditions. NOTES
7.13 Let Us Sum Up

Personality disorders appear to be rather inflexible and distorted
behavioural patterns and traits that result in maladaptive ways of
perceiving, thinking about , and relating to other people and the
environment. Cluster A include paranoid, schizoid and schizotypal
personality disorders; individuals with these disorders seem odd or
eccentric. Cluster B includes histrionic, narcissistic, antisocial, and
borderline personality disorders; individuals with these disorders share a
tendency to be dramatic, emotional and erratic. s Cluster C includes
avoidant, dependent, and obsessive-compulsive personality disorders;
individuals with these disorders show fearfulness or tension, as in anxiety-
based disorders. A person with psychopathy shows elevated levels of two
different dimension of traits: (1) an affective-interpersonal set of traits
reflecting lack of remorse or guilt, callousness/lack of empathy,
glibness/superficial charm, grandiose sense of self-worth, and pathological
lying, and (2) antisocial, impulsive, and socially deviant behaviour;
irresponsibility and parasitic lifestyle. A person diagnosed with antisocial
personality disorder (ASPD) is primarily characterized by traits from the
second dimension of psychopathy.
1. Describe the different personality disorders.
2. Give an account of different causal factors of personality disorders.
3. Why is treating personality disorder difficult? What is the solution
for it?
1. People with Cluster A disorders often seem odd or eccentric, with
unusual behaviour ranging from distrust and suspiciousness to
social detachment.
2. Individuals with Cluster B disorders share a tendency to be
dramatic, emotional and erratic.
3. People with Cluster C personality disorders often show anxiety and
fearfulness.
4. People with OCPD have lifestyles characterized by over-
conscientiousness, high neuroticism, inflexibility, and
perfectionism; they do not have true obsessions or compulsive
rituals as in OCD.
5. Conduct disorder
Ltd.
97
Theraphy
NOTES
BLOCK III: THERAPY AND
ASSESSMENT
UNIT VIII: THERAPY
Structure
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Objectives
8.3 Psychological Approaches
8.4 Behavior Therapy
8.4.3 MODELING
8.5 Cognitive and Cognitive-Behavior Therapy
8.6 Humanistic-Experiential Therapy
8.6.4 EVALUATING HUMANISTIC-EXPERIENTIAL
THERAPIES
8.7 Psychodynamic Therapy
8.8 Marital and Family Therapy
8.9 Eclecticism And Integration
8.10 Let Us Sum Up
8.1 INTRODUCTION
The belief that people with psychological problems can change-can learn
more adaptive ways of perceiving, evaluating and behaving - is the
conviction underlying all psychotherapy. Psychotherapy (psychological
therapy or talking therapy) is the use of psychological methods, particularly
when based on regular personal interaction, to help a person change
behavior and overcome problems in desired ways. Psychotherapy aims to
improve an individual's well-being and mental health, to resolve or
mitigate troublesome behaviors, beliefs, compulsions, thoughts, or
emotions, and to improve relationships and social skills. Certain
psychotherapies are considered evidence-based for treating some diagnosed
Self-Instructional Material mental disorders. Others have been criticized as pseudoscience.
98
Theraphy
There are over a thousand different psychotherapy techniques, some being
minor variations, while others are based on very different conceptions of NOTES
psychology, ethics (how to live), or techniques. Most involve one-to-one
sessions, between client and therapist, but some are conducted with groups,
including families. Therapists offer many different types of psychotherapy,
and may possess specific training in different treatments. In determining
the most appropriate therapy or therapies for an individual, a
psychotherapist will consider the problem to be treated and the individual's
personality, cultural and family background, and personal experiences.
Each type has certain characteristic techniques, which may be especially
useful in treating people with particular conditions, but most are broadly
effective, and all share many commonalities.
8.2OBJECTIVES
At the end of this unit, you will:
 Understand the different approaches to therapy
 Know the rationale and assumptions behind different therapies
 Identify the usefulness of various approaches in treatment of
different problems
8.3PSYCHOLOGICAL APPROACHES
An approach is a perspective or view that involves certain assumptions or
beliefs about human behavior: the way they function, which aspects of
them are worthy of study and what research methods are appropriate for
undertaking this study. Psychological Approaches target the "software,"
learned faulty behaviors and habits, along with damaging words, thoughts,
interpretations, and feedback that direct strategies for daily living.
Psychological approaches assume that many disorders result from mental,
behavioral, and social factors, such as personal experiences, traumas,
conflicts, and environmental conditions. Psychological treatments attempt
to change behaviors, thoughts, and thought processes that impair daily
living, thereby improving functioning. Practiced by clinical psychologists,
psychiatrists, social workers and counselors, psychological treatments
include four types of psychotherapy. There may be several different
theories within an approach, but they all share these common assumptions.
Although psychologists may blend concepts from more than one approach,
each approach represents a distinct view of the central issues in
psychology.
b. Compare your answer with those given at the end of the unit
1. Explain the assumptions behind psychological
approaches in treatment of abnormal behaviour.
8.4 BEHAVIOUR THERAPY
Behavior therapy or behavioral psychotherapy is a broad term referring to
clinical psychotherapy that uses techniques derived from behaviorism.
Those who practice behavior therapy tend to look at specific, learned
behaviors and how the environment influences those behaviors. Those who
practice behavior therapy are called behaviourists, or behavior analysts.
They tend to look for treatment outcomes that are objectively measurable.
Behavior therapy does not involve one specific method but it has a wide
99
Theraphy
range of techniques that can be used to treat a person's psychological
NOTES problems. Traditional behavior therapy draws from respondent
conditioning and operant conditioning to solve patients’ problems. Applied
behavior analysis (ABA) is the application of behavior analysis that
focuses on assessing how environmental variables influence learning
principles, particularly respondent and operant conditioning, to identify
potential behavior-change procedures, which are frequently used
throughout clinical therapy.Behaviour therapy is a direct and active
treatment that recognizes the importance of behaviour, acknowledges the
role of learning, and includes a thorough assessment and evaluation.Instead
of exploring past traumatic events or inner conflicts, behaviour therapists’
focus on the presenting problem-the problem or symptom that is causing
the patient great distress. A major assumption of behaviour therapy is that
abnormal behaviour is acquired in the same way as normal behaviour - that
is by learning. A variety of behavioural techniques have therefore been
developed to help patients “unlearn” maladaptive behaviors by one means
or another.
Exposure therapy is a technique in psychological treatment of anxiety
disorders that involves exposing the patient to the feared object or context
without any danger in order to overcome the anxiety.If anxiety is learned,
then, from the behaviour therapy perspective it can be unlearned. This
accomplished through guided exposure to anxiety-provoking stimuli.
During exposure therapy, the patient or client is confronted with the fear
producing stimulus in a therapeutic manner. This can be accomplished in a
very controlled, slow, and gradual way, as in systematic desensitization or
in a more extreme manner as in flooding, in which the patient directly
confronts the feared stimulus at full strength. The form of the exposure can
be real which is known as in vivo exposure or imaginary which is known
as imaginal exposure. An important development in behaviour therapy is
the use of virtual reality to help overcome their fears and phobias.
The rationale behind systematic desensitization is quite simple: Find a
behaviour that is incompatible with being anxious (such as being relaxed or
experiencing something pleasant) and repeatedly pair this with the stimulus
that provokes anxiety in the patient. Because it is difficult to feel both
anxious and relaxed at the same time, systematic desensitization is aimed at
teaching a person, while in the presence of (real or imagined) anxiety
provoking stimulus, to behave in a relaxed way that is inconsistent with
anxiety. In a way it is a type of counterconditioning procedure.
The use of exposure as a mode of therapy began in the 1950s, at a time
when psychodynamic views dominated Western clinical practice and
behavioral therapy was first emerging. South African psychologists and
psychiatrists first used exposure as a way to reduce pathological fears, such
as phobias and anxiety-related problems, and they brought their methods to
England in the Maudsley Hospital training program.
Joseph Wolpe was one of the first psychiatrists to spark interest in treating
psychiatric problems as behavioral issues. He sought consultation with
other behavioral psychologists, among them James G. Taylor , who worked
in the psychology department of the University of Cape Town in South
Africa. Although most of his work went unpublished, Taylor was the first
psychologist known to use exposure therapy treatment for anxiety,
including methods of situational exposure with response prevention—a
100
Theraphy
common exposure therapy technique still being used. Since the 1950s
several sorts of exposure therapy have been developed, including NOTES
systematic desensitization, flooding, implosive therapy, prolonged
exposure therapy, in vivo exposure therapy, and imaginal exposure
therapy.
Aversion therapy involves modifying undesirable behavior by the old
fashioned method of punishment. Aversion therapy is a form of behavior
therapy in which an aversive (causing a strong feeling of dislike or disgust)
stimulus is paired with an undesirable behavior in order to reduce or
eliminate that behavior. Aversion therapies can take many forms, for
example: placing unpleasant-tasting substances on the fingernails to
discourage nail-chewing; pairing the use of an emetic with the experience
of alcohol; or pairing behavior with electric shocks of mild to higher
intensities. For example, a person undergoing aversion therapy to stop
smoking might receive an electrical shock every time they view an image
of a cigarette. The goal of the conditioning process is to make the
individual associate the stimulus with unpleasant or uncomfortable
sensations.
During aversion therapy, the client may be asked to think of or engage in
the behavior they enjoy while at the same time being exposed to something
unpleasant, such as a bad taste, a foul smell, or even mild electric shocks.
Once the unpleasant feelings become associated with the behavior, the
hope is that the unwanted behaviors or actions will begin to decrease in
frequency or stop entirely. Generally, aversion therapy tends to be
successful while it is still under the direction of a therapist, but relapse
rates are high. Once the individual is out in the real-world and exposed to
the stimulus without the presence of the aversive sensation, it is highly
likely that they will return to the previous behavior patterns.
8.4.3 MODELING
Modeling is a method used in certain techniques of psychotherapy whereby
the client learns by imitation alone, without any specific verbal direction by
the therapist. As the name implies, in modeling the client learns new skills
by imitating another person, such as a parent or therapist, who performs the
behavior to be acquired. A younger client may be exposed to behaviors or
roles in peers who act as assistants to therapist & then be encouraged to
imitate & practice the desired new responses. For example, modeling may
be used to promote the learning of simple skills such as self-feeding for a
profoundly intellectually disabled child, or more complex skills such as
being more effective in social situations for a shy withdrawn adolescent.
Bandura identified three kinds of models: live, verbal, and symbolic.
It is a behavior modification technique in which appropriate behavior is
strengthened through systematic reinforcement. Systematic programs that
use reinforcement to suppress (extinguish) unwanted behavior or to elicit
and maintain desired behavior have achieved notable success. Often called
contingency management programs, these approaches are often used in
institutional settings, although that is not always the case. Examples of
such approaches are response shaping and token economies. In response
shaping, positive reinforcement is used to establish, by gradual
approximation, a response that is actively resisted or is not initially in an Self-Instructional Material
individual’s behavioural repertoire. Token economy is based on operant
101
Theraphy
conditioning and resembles the outside world, where an individual is paid
NOTES for their work in tokens that can later be exchanged for desired objects or
activities.
Systematic desensitization has been shown to successfully treat phobias
about heights, driving, insects as well as any anxiety that a person may
have. Anxiety can include social anxiety, anxiety about public speaking as
well as test anxiety. It has been shown that the use of systematic
desensitization is an effective technique that can be applied to a number of
problems that a person may have.
When using modeling procedures this technique is often compared to
another behavioural therapy technique. When compared to desensitization,
the modeling technique does appear to be less effective. However it is clear
that the greater the interaction between the patient and the subject he is
modeling the greater the effectiveness of the treatment.
While undergoing exposure therapy a person usually needs five sessions to
see if the treatment is working. After five sessions exposure treatment is
seen to benefit the patient and help with their problems. However even
after five sessions it is recommended that the patient or client should still
continue treatment.
Virtual Reality treatment has shown to be effective for a fear of heights. It
has also been shown to help with the treatment of a variety of anxiety
disorders. Virtual reality therapy can be very costly so therapists are still
awaiting results of controlled trials for VR treatment to see which
applications show the best results.
For those with suicidal ideation treatment depends on how severe the
person's depression and feeling of hopelessness is. If these things are
severe the person's response to completing small steps will not be of
importance to them because they don't consider it to be a big deal.
Generally those who aren't severely depressed or fearful, this technique has
been successful because the completion of simpler activities build up their
confidence and allows them to continue on to more complex situations.
Contingency contracts have been seen to be effective in changing any
undesired behaviours of individuals. It has been seen to be effective in
treating behaviour problems in delinquents regardless of the specific
characteristics of the contract.
Token economies have been shown to be effective when treating patients in
psychiatric wards who had chronic schizophrenia. The results showed that
the contingent tokens were controlling the behaviour of the patients.
Compared to some other forms of therapy, behaviour therapy has some
distinct advantages. Behavior therapy usually achieves results in a short
period of time because it’s generally directed to specific symptoms, leading
to faster relief of a clients’ distress and to lower costs. The methods used
are delineated and the results can be readily evaluated. Overall, the
outcomes achieved by behavioural therapy compare very favourably with
those of other approaches.
Generally the more pervasive and vaguely defined the clients problem, the
less likely behavior therapy is to be useful. For example, it appears to be
only rarely employed to treat complex personality disorders, although
dialectical behavior therapy for patients with borderline personality
disorders is an exception. Behavioural techniques remain central to the
102
Theraphy
treatment of anxiety disorders. Because behavioural treatments are quite
straightforward, behavior therapy can be used with psychotic patients. NOTES

2. List the varied behavioral therapy techniques.
8.5 COGNITIVE AND COGNITIVE-BEHAVIOUR THERAPY
The early behavior therapists focused on observable behavior and regarded
the inner thoughts of their clients as unimportant. However, starting in the
1970s, a number of behavior therapists began to reappraise the importance
of “private events”- thoughts, perceptions, evaluations and self statements-
and started to see them as processes that mediated the effects of objective
stimulus conditions to determine behavior and emotions.
Cognitive and cognitive-behavioural therapy stem from both cognitive
psychology (with its emphasis on the effects of thoughts on behaviour) and
behaviorism (with rigorous methodology and performance oriented focus).
No single set of techniques defines cognitively oriented treatment
approaches. However two main themes are important: (1) the conviction
that cognitive processes influence emotion, motivation, and behavior; and
(2) the use of cognitive and behavior-change techniques in a hypothesis
testing manner. Cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) is a type of
psychotherapeutic treatment that helps patients understand the thoughts and
feelings that influence behaviors. CBT is commonly used to treat a wide
range of disorders, including phobias, addictions, depression, and anxiety.
Cognitive behavior therapy is generally short-term and focused on helping
clients deal with a very specific problem. During the course of treatment,
people learn how to identify and change destructive or disturbing thought
patterns that have a negative influence on behavior and emotions.
The first form of behaviorally oriented cognitive therapy was developed by
Albert Ellis and called Rational emotive behavior therapy (REBT). REBT
attempts to change a client’s maladaptive thought process, on which
maladaptive emotional responses and thus behavior, are presumed to
depend. Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT) focuses on resolving
emotional and behavioral problems. The goal of the therapy is to change
irrational beliefs to more rational ones.
REBT encourages a person to identify their general and irrational beliefs
(e.g. I must be perfect") and subsequently persuades the person challenge
these false beliefs through reality testing. Cognitive therapy and rational
emotive behavior therapy acknowledge the least amount of unconscious
processing; i.e., are perhaps the most conscious-centric contemporary
psychological interventions. They assume that cognitive biases cause all
psychological distress and aim to help people think differently about
themselves and other people.
It is heavily cognitive and philosophic, and specifically uncovers clients'
irrational or dysfunctional beliefs and actively-directively disputes them.
But it also sees people's self-defeating cognitions, emotions, and behaviors
as intrinsically and holistically connected, not disparate. People disturb
themselves with disordered thoughts, feelings, and actions, all of which
importantly interact with each other and with the difficulties they encounter
in their environment. Therefore, with emotionally and behaviorally
103
Theraphy
disturbed people, REBT employs a number of thinking, feeling, and action
NOTES techniques that are designed to help them change their self-defeating and
socially sabotaging conduct to self-help and socially effective ways. Ellis
believes that people often forcefully hold on to this illogical way of
thinking, and therefore employs highly emotive techniques to help them
vigorously and forcefully change this irrational thinking. Ellis's rational
emotional behaviour therapy attends less to faulty inferences and more to
the fundamental evaluations we make about the world. The task of REBT
is to restructure an individual's belief and self-evaluation, especially with
respect to the irrational “shoulds”, “oughts” and “musts” that are
preventing the individual from having a more positive sense of self-worth
and an emotionally satisfying, fulfilling life.
Rational emotive behavior therapists have cited many studies in support of
this approach. Most early studies were conducted on people with
experimentally induced anxieties or non-clinical problems such as mild
fear of snakes. However, a number of recent studies have been done on
actual clinical subjects and have also found that rational emotive behavior
therapy (REBT) is often helpful.
Beck’s (1967) system of therapy is similar to Ellis’s, but has been most
widely used in cases of depression. Cognitive therapists help clients to
recognize the negative thoughts and errors in logic that cause them to be
depressed.
The therapist also guides clients to question and challenge their
dysfunctional thoughts, try out new interpretations, and ultimately apply
alternative ways of thinking in their daily lives. Beck's cognitive therapy
focuses on errors in information processing. Aaron Beck believes that a
person’s reaction to specific upsetting thoughts may contribute to
abnormality. As we confront the many situations that arise in life, both
comforting and upsetting thoughts come into our heads. Beck calls these
unbidden cognition’s automatic thoughts.
When a person’s stream of automatic thoughts is very negative you would
expect a person to become depressed. Now however this form of treatment
is used for a broad range of conditions, including eating disorders and
obesity personality disorders, substance abuse, and even schizophrenia.
The cognitive model is basically an information processing model of
psychopathology. A fundamental assumption of the cognitive model is that
problems result from biased processing of external events or internal
stimuli. These biases distort the way that a person makes sense of their
experiences i=of the world, leading to cognitive errors. It was found that
the therapy was more successful than drug therapy and had a lower relapse
rate, supporting the proposition that depression has a cognitive basis.
This suggests that knowledge of the cognitive explanation can improve the
quality of people’s lives.
• Albert Ellis views the therapist as a teacher and does not think that a
warm personal relationship with a client is essential. In contrast, Beck
stresses the quality of the therapeutic relationship.
• REBT is often highly directive, persuasive and confrontive. Beck places
more emphasis on the client discovering misconceptions for themselves.
104
• REBT uses different methods depending on the personality of the client, Theraphy
in Beck’s cognitive therapy, the method is based upon the particular NOTES
disorder.
1. Model has great appeal because it focuses on human thought. Human
cognitive abilities has been responsible for our many accomplishments so
may also be responsible for our problems.
2. Cognitive theories lend themselves to testing. When experimental
subjects are manipulated into adopting unpleasant assumptions or thought
they became more anxious and depressed.
3. Many people with psychological disorders, particularly depressive ,
anxiety , and sexual disorders have been found to display maladaptive
assumptions and thoughts (Beck et al., 1983).
4. Cognitive therapy has been very effective for treating depression
(Hollon& Beck, 1994), and moderately effective for anxiety problems
(Beck, 1993).
1. The precise role of cognitive processes is yet to be determined. It is not
clear whether faulty cognitions are a cause of the psychopathology or a
consequence of it.
Lewinsohn (1981) studied a group of participants before any of them
became depressed, and found that those who later became depressed were
no more likely to have negative thoughts than those who did not develop
depression. This suggests that hopeless and negative thinking may be the
result of depression, rather than a cause of it.
2. The cognitive model is narrow in scope - thinking is just one part of
human functioning, broader issues need to be addressed.
3. Ethical issues: RET is a directive therapy aimed at changing cognitions
sometimes quite forcefully. For some, this may be considered an unethical
approach
8.6HUMANISTIC-EXPERIENTIAL THERAPY
Humanistic and existential psychotherapies use a wide range of approaches
to case conceptualization, therapeutic goals, intervention strategies, and
research methodologies. They are united by an emphasis on understanding
human experience and a focus on the client rather than the symptom.
Psychological problems (including substance abuse disorders) are viewed
as the result of inhibited ability to make authentic, meaningful, and self-
directed choices about how to live. Consequently, interventions are aimed
at increasing client self-awareness and self-understanding.
Whereas the key words for humanistic therapy are acceptance and growth,
the major themes of existential therapy are client responsibility and
freedom. Many aspects of humanistic and existential approaches (including
empathy, encouragement of affect, reflective listening, and acceptance of
the client's subjective experience) are useful in any type of brief therapy
session, whether it involves psychodynamic, strategic, or cognitive-
behavioral therapy. They help establish rapport and provide grounds for
meaningful engagement with all aspects of the treatment process. Also
known as humanism, humanistic therapy is a positive approach to
psychotherapy that focuses on a person’s individual nature, rather than
categorizing groups of people with similar characteristics as having the
same problems. Humanistic therapy looks at the whole person, not only Self-Instructional Material
105
Theraphy
from the therapist’s view but from the viewpoint of individuals observing
NOTES their own behavior. The emphasis is on a person’s positive traits and
behaviors, and the ability to use their personal instincts to find wisdom,
growth, healing, and fulfillment within themselves. Humanistic therapy is
used to treat depression, anxiety, panic disorders, personality disorders,
schizophrenia, addiction, and relationship issues, including family
relationships. People with low self-esteem, who are having trouble finding
their purpose or reaching their true potential, who lack feelings of
“wholeness,” who are searching for personal meaning, or who are not
comfortable with themselves as they are, may also benefit from humanistic
therapy.
The client centered therapy or person centered therapy of Carl Rogers
focuses on the natural power of the organism to heal itself. Rogers saw
therapy as a process of removing the constraints and restrictions that grow
out of unrealistic demands that people tend to place on themselves when
they believe as a condition of self-worth, that they should not have certain
kinds of feelings such as hostility. By denying these feelings they lose
touch with their own genuine experience which results in lowered
integration, impaired personal relationships and various forms of
maladjustment. Carl Rogers' client-centered therapy assumes that the client
holds the keys to recovery but notes that the therapist must offer a
relationship in which the client can openly discover and test his own
reality, with genuine understanding and acceptance from the therapist.
Therapists must create three conditions that help clients change:
1. Unconditional positive regard
2. A warm, positive, and accepting attitude that includes no evaluation
or moral judgment
3. Accurate empathy, whereby the therapist conveys an accurate
understanding of the client's world through skilled, active listening
According to Carson, the client-centered therapist believes that
● Each individual exists in a private world of experience in which the
individual is the center.
● The most basic striving of an individual is toward the maintenance,
enhancement, and actualization of the self.
● An individual reacts to situations in terms of the way he perceives
them, in ways consistent with his self-concept and view of the
world.
● An individual's inner tendencies are toward health and wholeness;
under normal conditions, a person behaves in rational and
constructive ways and chooses pathways toward personal growth
and self-actualization .
A client-centered therapist focuses on the client's self-actualizing core and
the positive forces of the client (i.e., the skills the client has used in the past
to deal with certain problems). The client should also understand the
unconditional nature of the therapist's acceptance. This type of therapy
aims not to interpret the client's unconscious motivation or conflicts but to
reflect what the client feels, to overcome resistance through consistent
acceptance, and to help replace negative attitudes with positive ones.
Rogers' techniques are particularly useful for the therapist who is trying to
address a substance-abusing client's denial and motivate her for further
106
Theraphy
treatment. For example, the techniques of motivational interviewing draw
heavily on Rogerian principles NOTES
People tend to be ambivalent about making changes in lives. They want to
change, but they also don’t want to change. Motivational interviewing is a
brief form of therapy that can be delivered in one or two sessions. It was
developed as a way to help people resolve their ambivalence about change
and make a commitment to treatment. At its center is a supportive and
empathetic style of relating to the client has its origin in the work of Carl
Rogers. However, MI differs from client centered counselling because it
also employs a more direct approach that explores the clients own reason
for wanting change .Motivational interviewing is most often used in the
areas of substance abuse and addiction. When added to the beginning of a
treatment program, it appears to benefit patients perhaps because it
facilitates patients staying in treatment and following treatment plan. The
collaborative and non-confrontational style of MI may also make it more
acceptable to adolescents. Even a small number of sessions of MI can
promote behavior change in people who use drugs and alcohol.
Humanistic therapy is talk therapy that to a great deal encompasses a
Gestalt approach, exploring how a person feels in the here and now, rather
than trying to identify past events that led to these feelings. Additionally,
the humanistic therapist provides an atmosphere of support, empathy, and
trust that allows the individual to share their feelings without fear of
judgment. The therapist does not act as an authority figure; rather, the
relationship between client and therapist is one of equals. In German, the
term Gestalt means “whole” and Gestalt therapy emphasizes the unity of
mind and body- placing strong emphasis on the need to integrate thought,
feeling and action. The word “Gestalt” means whole. Gestalt therapy was
developed by psychotherapist Fritz Perls on the principle that humans are
best viewed as a whole entity consisting of body, mind, and soul, and best
understood when viewed through their own eyes, not by looking back into
the past but by bringing the past into the present. Gestalt therapy
emphasizes that to alleviate unresolved anger, pain, anxiety, resentment,
and other negative feelings, these emotions cannot just be discussed, but
must be actively expressed in the present time. If that doesn’t happen, both
psychological and physical symptoms can arise. Perls believed that we are
not in this world to live up to others' expectations, nor should we expect
others to live up to ours. By building self-awareness, gestalt therapy helps
clients better understand themselves and how the choices they make affect
their health and their relationships. With this self-knowledge, clients begin
to understand how their emotional and physical selves are connected and
develop more self-confidence to start living a fuller life and more
effectively deal with problems. Gestalt therapy can help clients with issues
such as anxiety, depression, self-esteem, relationship difficulties, and even
physical ones like migraine headaches, ulcerative colitis, and back spasms.
It helps clients focus on the present and understand what is really
happening in their lives right now, rather than what they may perceive to
be happening based on past experience. Instead of simply talking about
past situations, clients are encouraged to experience them, perhaps through
re-enactment. Through the Gestalt process, clients learn to become more Self-Instructional Material
aware of how their own negative thought patterns and behaviors are
107
Theraphy
blocking true self-awareness and making them unhappy. Gestalt techniques
NOTES are often used in combination with body work, dance, art, drama, and other
therapies.
8.6.4 EVALUATING HUMANISTIC-EXPERIENTIAL THERAPIES
One of the main strengths of the humanistic-existential model of
psychology is that it is optimistic. Instead of focusing on what's lacking in
people, it looks at the potential of people to become great. The health part
of mental health is stressed; that is, the focus is on what the healthiest and
happiest people do and what everyone else can do to get there.
Another strength of the humanistic-existential model of psychology is that
it emphasizes individuality and autonomy. Patients are encouraged to focus
on their decisions, and great stress is given to free will. Therapists reinforce
their patients' ability to choose and act according to their own internal
compass.
There's also a strong emphasis on the individual's own experiences and
viewpoints. No two people are alike, and so no two patients are expected to
have the same ideas, feelings, and experiences. As a result, humanistic-
experiential therapy is tailor made for each patient. However there are
some limitations of this therapy for one being that it is based on
philosophical concepts that are abstract and somewhat vague. As a result it
is not empirical in nature, that is , it is non-scientific and hard to validate. It
has also been criticized for their lack of agreed-upon therapeutic
procedures.
8.7 PSYCHODYNAMIC THERAPY
Psychodynamics emphasizes systematic study of the psychological forces
that underlie human behavior, feelings, and emotions and how they might
relate to early experience. It is especially interested in the dynamic
relations between conscious motivation and unconscious motivation.
Psychodynamic therapy is similar to psychoanalytic therapy, which is
based on the idea that a person’s development is often determined by
forgotten events in early childhood. Psychodynamic therapy tends to be
briefer and less intensive than traditional psychoanalysis. Psychodynamic
therapy works to uncover repressed childhood experiences that are thought
to explain an individual’s current difficulties. There are several forms of
psychodynamic therapy, such as interpersonal therapy (IPT) and person-
centered therapy. Sigmund Freud first used the term “psychodynamics” to
describe the processes of the mind as flows of psychological energy in an
organically complex brain. Psychodynamic therapy uses free association
and focuses on unconscious conflicts, defense mechanisms, transference,
and current symptoms. While the effectiveness of psychodynamic therapy
is difficult to measure, several studies have indicated its usefulness in
treatment. However, this form of therapy is often criticized for its lack of
quantitative and experimental research” Psychotherapy” is a general term
that encompasses a wide variety of approaches to treatment. One such
approach is psychodynamic therapy, which studies the psychological forces
underlying human behavior, feelings, and emotions, as well as how they
may relate to early childhood experience. This theory is especially
interested in the dynamic relations between conscious and unconscious
motivation; it asserts that behavior is the product of underlying conflicts of
which people often have little awareness. The primary focus of
Self-Instructional Material psychodynamic therapy is to uncover the unconscious content of a client’s
108
Theraphy
psyche in order to alleviate psychic tension. Psychodynamic therapy is
similar to psychoanalytic therapy, or psychoanalysis, in that it works to NOTES
uncover repressed childhood experiences that are thought to explain an
individual’s current difficulties. Psychoanalytic therapy is based on the
ideas that a person’s development is often determined by forgotten events
in early childhood, and that human behavior and dysfunction are largely
influenced by irrational drives that are rooted in the unconscious.
In terms of approach, psychodynamic therapy tends to be briefer and less
intensive than traditional psychoanalysis; it adapts some of the basic
principles of psychoanalysis to a less intensive style of working, usually at
a frequency of once or twice per week. Compared to other forms of
therapy, psychodynamic therapy emphasizes the relationship between
client and therapist as an agent of change.
Psychodynamic theory emphasizes the systematic study of the
psychological forces that underlie human behavior. It is especially
interested in the dynamic relations between conscious motivation and
unconscious motivation. In the treatment of psychological distress,
psychodynamic therapies target the client’s inner conflict, from where
repressed behaviors and emotions surface into the patient’s consciousness.
All psychodynamic therapies have a core set of characteristics:
● An emphasis on unconscious conflicts and their relation to
development, dysregulation, and dysfunction.
● The belief that defense mechanisms are responses that develop in
order to avoid unpleasant consequences of conflict.
● The belief that psychopathology develops from early childhood
experiences.
● The idea that representations of experiences are founded upon
interpersonal relations.
● A conviction that life issues and dynamics will re-emerge in the
context of the client-therapist relationship as transference and
countertransference.
● The use of free association as a core method to explore internal
conflicts. During free association, patients are invited to relate
whatever comes to mind during the therapeutic session, without
censoring their thoughts.
● The focus on interpretations of defense mechanisms (often
unconscious coping techniques that reduce anxiety arising from
unacceptable or potentially harmful impulses), transference (a
phenomenon in which a patient unconsciously redirects their
feelings onto the therapist or another person), and current
symptoms.
Psychodynamic therapy is primarily used to treat depression and other
serious psychological disorders, especially in those who have lost meaning
in their lives and have difficulty forming or maintaining personal
relationships. Studies have found that other effective applications of
psychodynamic therapy include addiction, social anxiety disorder, and
eating disorders. The theories and techniques that distinguish
psychodynamic therapy from other types of therapy include a focus on
recognizing, acknowledging, understanding, expressing, and overcoming
negative and contradictory feelings and repressed emotions in order to
improve the patient’s interpersonal experiences and relationships. This Self-Instructional Material
includes helping the patient understand how repressed earlier emotions
109
Theraphy
affect current decision-making, behavior, and relationships.
NOTES Psychodynamic therapy also aims to help those who are aware of and
understand the origins of their social difficulties, but are not able to
overcome their problems on their own. Patients learn to analyze and
resolve their current issues and change their behavior in current
relationships through this deep exploration and analysis of earlier
experiences and emotions.
Psychoanalysis was founded by Sigmund Freud (1856-1939). Freud
believed that people could be cured by making conscious their unconscious
thoughts and motivations, thus gaining insight.
The aim of psychoanalysis therapy is to release repressed emotions and
experiences, i.e., make the unconscious conscious. It is only having a
cathartic (i.e., healing) experience can the person be helped and "cured." In
psychoanalysis (therapy) Freud would have a patient lie on a couch to
relax, and he would sit behind them taking notes while they told him about
their dreams and childhood memories. Psychoanalysis would be a lengthy
process, involving many sessions with the psychoanalyst. Due to the nature
of defense mechanisms and the inaccessibility of the deterministic forces
operating in the unconscious, psychoanalysis in its classic form is a lengthy
process often involving 2 to 5 sessions per week for several years. This
approach assumes that the reduction of symptoms alone is relatively
inconsequential as if the underlying conflict is not resolved, more neurotic
symptoms will simply be substituted. The analyst typically is a 'blank
screen,' disclosing very little about themselves in order that the client can
use the space in the relationship to work on their unconscious without
interference from outside.
The psychoanalyst uses various techniques as encouragement for the client
to develop insights into their behavior and the meanings of symptoms,
including ink blots, parapraxes, free association, interpretation (including
dream analysis), resistance analysis and transference analysis.
Free Association
A simple technique of psychodynamic therapy, is free association, in which
a patient talks of whatever comes into their mind.
This technique involves a therapist reading a list of words (e.g.. mother,
childhood, etc.) and the patient immediately responds with the first word
that comes to mind. It is hoped that fragments of repressed memories will
emerge in the course of free association.
Free association may not prove useful if the client shows resistance, and is
reluctant to say what he or she is thinking. On the other hand, the presence
of resistance (e.g., an excessively long pause) often provides a strong clue
that the client is getting close to some important repressed idea in his or her
thinking, and that further probing by the therapist is called for.
Freud reported that his free associating patients occasionally experienced
such an emotionally intense and vivid memory that they almost relived the
experience. This is like a "flashback" from a war or a rape experience.
Such a stressful memory, so real it feels like it is happening again, is called
an abreaction. If such a disturbing memory occurred in therapy or with a
supportive friend and one felt better--relieved or cleansed--later, it would
be called a catharsis.
Frequently, these intense emotional experiences provided Freud a valuable
insight into the patient's problems.
110
Theraphy
Dream Analysis
According to Freud the analysis of dreams is "the royal road to the NOTES
unconscious." He argued that the conscious mind is like a censor, but it is
less vigilant when we are asleep. As a result, repressed ideas come to the
surface - though what we remember may well have been altered during the
dream process. As a result, we need to distinguish between the manifest
content and latent content of a dream. The former is what we actually
remember. The latter is what it really means. Freud believed that very often
the real meaning of a dream had a sexual significance and in his theory of
sexual symbolism he speculates on the underlying meaning of common
dream themes.
Analysis of resistance
Resistance, in psychoanalysis, refers to oppositional behavior when an
individual's unconscious defenses of the ego are threatened by an external
source. Sigmund Freud, the founder of psychoanalytic theory, developed
his concept of resistance as he worked with patients who suddenly
developed uncooperative behaviors during sessions of talk therapy. He
reasoned that an individual that is suffering from a psychological affliction,
which Sigmund Freud believed to be derived from the presence of
suppressed illicit or unwanted thoughts, may inadvertently attempt to
impede any attempt to confront a subconsciously perceived threat. This
would be for the purpose of inhibiting the revelation of any repressed
information from within the unconscious mind.
Analysis of transference
Transference refers to redirection of a patient's feelings for a significant
person to the therapist. Transference is often manifested as an erotic
attraction towards a therapist, but can be seen in many other forms such as
rage, hatred, mistrust, substituting as a parent, extreme dependence, or even
placing the therapist in a god-like or guru status. When Freud initially
encountered transference in his therapy with patients, he thought he was
encountering patient resistance, as he recognized the phenomenon when a
patient refused to participate in a session of free association. But what he
learned was that the analysis of the transference was actually the work that
needed to be done: "the transference, which, whether affectionate or
hostile, seemed in every case to constitute the greatest threat to the
treatment, becomes its best tool". The focus in psychodynamic
psychotherapy is, in large part, the therapist and patient recognizing the
transference relationship and exploring the relationship's meaning. Since
the transference between patient and therapist happens on an unconscious
level, psychodynamic therapists who are largely concerned with a patient's
unconscious material use the transference to reveal unresolved conflicts
patients have with childhood figures.
Countertransference is defined as redirection of a therapist's feelings
toward a patient, or more generally, as a therapist's emotional entanglement
with a patient. A therapist's attunement to their own countertransference is
nearly as critical as understanding the transference. Not only does this help
therapists regulate their emotions in the therapeutic relationship, but it also
gives therapists valuable insight into what patients are attempting to elicit
in them. For example, a therapist who is sexually attracted to a patient must
understand the countertransference aspect (if any) of the attraction, and
look at how the patient might be eliciting this attraction. Once any Self-Instructional Material
countertransference aspect has been identified, the therapist can ask the
111
Theraphy
patient what his or her feelings are toward the therapist, and can explore
NOTES how those feelings relate to unconscious motivations, desires, or fears.
Another contrasting perspective on transference and countertransference is
offered in classical Adlerian psychotherapy. Rather than using the patient's
transference strategically in therapy, the positive or negative transference is
diplomatically pointed out and explained as an obstacle to cooperation and
improvement. For the therapist, any signs of countertransference would
suggest that his or her own personal training analysis needs to be continued
to overcome these tendencies
Therapy is very time-consuming and is unlikely to provide answers
quickly. People must be prepared to invest a lot of time and money into the
therapy; they must be motivated. They might discover some painful and
unpleasant memories that had been repressed, which causes them more
distress. This type of therapy does not work for all people and all types of
disorders. The nature of Psychoanalysis creates a power imbalance
between therapist and client that could raise ethical issues.
Fisher and Greenberg (1977), in a review of the literature, conclude that
psychoanalytic theory cannot be accepted or rejected as a package, 'it is a
complete structure consisting of many parts, some of which should be
accepted, others rejected and the others at least partially reshaped.'
Freud's theory questions the very basis of a rationalist, scientific approach
and could well be seen as a critique of science, rather than science rejecting
psychoanalysis because it is not susceptible to disproof. The case study
method is criticized as it is doubtful that generalizations can be valid since
the method is open to many kinds of bias. However, psychoanalysis is
concerned with offering interpretations to the current client, rather than
devising abstract dehumanized principles.
3. What is transference and countertransference?
8.8 Marital And Family Therapy
Many problems that therapists deal with concern distressed relationships. A
common example is couple or marital distress. Here, the maladaptive
behavior exists between the partners in the relationship. Extending the
focus even further, a family systems approach reflects the assumption that
within the family behavior of any particular family member is subject to
the influence of the behaviors and communication patterns of other family
members. It is in other words, the product of a “system” that may be
amenable to both understanding and change. Addressing problems deriving
from the in-place system thus requires therapeutic techniques that focus on
relationships as much as, or more than, on individuals. Marriage and
Family Therapy (MFT) is a form of psychotherapy that addresses the
behaviors of all family members and the way these behaviors affect not
only individual family members, but also relationships between family
members and the family unit as a whole. As such, treatment is usually
divided between time spent on individual therapy and time spent on couple
therapy, family therapy, or both, if necessary. MFT may also be referred to
Self-Instructional Material as couple and family therapy, couples counseling, marriage counseling, or
112
Theraphy
family counseling. The range of physical and psychological problems
treated by MFT include marital and couple conflict, parent and child NOTES
conflict, alcohol and drug abuse, sexual dysfunction, grief, distress, eating
disorders and weight issues, children’s behavior problems, and issues with
eldercare, such as coping with a parent’s or grandparent’s dementia. MFT
practitioners also work with mental-health issues such as a family
member’s depression, anxiety, or schizophrenia, and the impact these
issues have on the rest of the family.
Couples therapy has been found to be an efficacious treatment for persons
with substance use problems. Therapy programmes which have included
spouses have been found to be effective in motivating patients to enter and
continue treatment. They have also been associated with better outcomes in
treatment such as lower substance use, longer periods of abstinence and
better marital functioning. The theoretical framework underlying couples
therapy is an understanding of substance use and marital discord as being
cyclic. Problems in the marital relationship, poor communication and poor
problem solving may precede harmful use of substances, and dysfunctional
relationships can maintain and facilitate the substance use. Marital and
family conflicts also have the propensity to facilitate relapse. In a critique
of 41 different treatments for alcohol problems, Behavioural Couples
Therapy (BCT) was found to be the only type of family intervention and
one of 16 therapies to have adequate empirical support for effectiveness.
Hence, the National Institute of Clinical Excellence Guidelines
recommends BCT for individuals with harmful drinking and alcohol
dependence.
In BCT, the patient and spouse are typically seen together in 12-20 weekly
outpatient sessions over a 3-6 month period. BCT can be an adjunct to
other psychotherapeutic interventions or the mainstay in therapy.
Indications for BCT are: availability of both partners for sessions; couples
that are married or cohabiting at least for the last one year; one member
with substance use problems. Contraindications for BCT are: couple
ordered by court to have no contact with each other; gross cognitive
impairment or psychosis; severe physical aggression; when both spouses
have substance use problems. Relationship focused interventions are
introduced once the patient has maintained abstinence and the couple is
regular to sessions. The major goals of this part of the treatment are to
enhance positive feelings, communication skills and problem solving.
Communication skills include listening skills, expressing emotions directly
and negotiation skill
Traditional behavioral couple therapy (TBCT; Jacobson &Margolin, 1979)
has had the distinction of being the most widely studied and empirically
supported intervention available for the treatment of relationship distress
for more than two decades. TBCT was developed to target the
dysfunctional patterns, communication difficulties, and poor problem-
solving behaviors often associated with relationship discord. Based on
social learning theory and findings from research with distressed couples,
TBCT consists largely of strategies to promote skill acquisition and
behavioral change among partners. Empirical support for the efficacy of
TBCT is considerable; however, several studies have highlighted key
limitations of this approach. In an effort to address the shortcomings of Self-Instructional Material
TBCT, Jacobson and Christensen (1996) developed Integrative Behavioral
113
Theraphy
Couple Therapy (IBCT). IBCT is grounded in contextually based
NOTES behavioral theory and interweaves the well-established components of
TBCT that promote accommodation and change between partners with
newer acceptance-based strategies. Consequently, many of the treatment
recommendations in IBCT share similarities with those proposed in several
of the burgeoning treatment approaches based in contextual-behavioral
theory that emphasize acceptance-based strategies, such as Acceptance and
Commitment Therapy (ACT; Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 2000), Functional
Analytic Psychotherapy (FAP; Kohlenberg& Tsai, 1991), and Dialectical
Behavior Therapy (DBT; Linehan, 1993).
The focus of family therapy treatment is to intervene in complex relational
patterns and to alter them in ways that bring about productive change for
the entire family. Family therapy rests on a systems perspective, which
proposes that changes in one part of the system can and do produce
changes in other parts of the system, and these changes can contribute to
solutions. Family therapy in substance abuse treatment has two main
purposes. First, it seeks to use the family's strengths and resources to help
find or develop ways to live without substances of abuse. Second, it
reduces the impact of chemical dependency on both the patient and the
family. In family therapy, the focus of treatment is the family, and/or the
individual within the context of the family system. The person abusing
substances is regarded as a subsystem within the family unit—the person
whose symptoms have severe repercussions throughout the family system.
The familial relationships within this subsystem are the points of
therapeutic interest and intervention.
Family is a key resource in the care of patients in India as its culture of
inter-dependence gives the family a pre-eminent status. Psychoactive
substance abuse and dependence has a significant deleterious impact on the
family of the substance user. This impact can then lead to a chain of events
which can not only spiral out of control but also spiral downward. In a
study carried out in India, family burden was found to be moderate to
severe in families with a substance dependent person. The burden was
characterized by disruption of family interactions, disruption of family
routine, disruption of family leisure and financial burden. According to
Kumfer, since substance abuse is a ‘family disease’ of lifestyle, including
both genetic and family environmental causes, effective family
strengthening prevention programmes should be included in all
comprehensive substance abuse prevention activities.The term ‘Family
Based Interventions' is used to describe a collection of intervention models
that focus on family communication, cohesion, conflict and parenting
practices. The most common evidenced based family interventions are
Brief Strategic Family Therapy, Multidimensional Family Therapy, Family
Behaviour Therapy, Functional Family Therapy and Community
Reinforcement Programme. The goals of these interventions are to bring
about systemic changes, skills building, enhancing positive family and
social activities, improving communication, problem solving and making
non-substance use rewarding. These interventions have shown better
outcomes in terms of reduction in substance use, improved family
relations, better work outcomes, adherence to treatment, treatment retention
and long- term maintenance of gains.
114
Theraphy
Gender and culture are also significant in planning or developing a therapy
that aims to modify the immediate social and cultural environment of the NOTES
adolescent. For instance, abuse, abandonment and depression are key
issues that must be addressed for girls with substance use disorders in
treatment. Trauma models of substance abuse among girls and women
indicate the need to make their family environments safer and healthier.
Such gender sensitivity and targeting of delicate issues are very therapeutic
and are key factors in reducing self-harm behaviours among girls and
young women. Family interventions also effectively reduce intimate
partner violence and thereby reduce child exposure to domestic violence
(CEDV). The greater stigma attached to substance abuse among girls and
women can also be addressed in family therapy in order to reduce feelings
of shame and guilt. In addition, the professional treating a patient and
family cannot overlook the cultural background that the patient's family
comes from. Being culturally sensitive necessarily does not mean that the
therapist must belong to the culture, but rather that they have developed
sensitivity to the culture by gaining knowledge, observing and paying
attention to various behaviours and dynamics and is ready to learn from the
patients and their families. The therapist should understand how cultural
differences influence substance abuse, health beliefs, help-seeking
behaviour and perceptions of behavioural health services.
Structural family therapy (SFT) is a treatment that addresses patterns of
interaction that create problems within families. Mental health issues are
viewed as signs of a dysfunctional family; therefore, the focus of treatment
is on changing the family structure rather than changing individual family
members. The goal of SFT is to improve communications and interactions
among family members and to highlight appropriate boundaries to create a
healthier family structure. Families and children at risk, including single
parents, blended families, and extended families, can benefit from SFT.
Settings for SFT include private practice, mental health clinics, substance
abuse programs, child welfare agencies, and schools.
8.9Eclecticism And Integration
The various “school” of psychotherapy that we have just described once
stood in opposition to one another than they do now. Today, clinical
practice is characterized by a relaxation of boundaries and a willingness on
the part of therapists to explore different ways of approaching clinical
problems, a process sometimes called multimodal therapy. When asked
what their orientation is most psychotherapists today reply “eclectic” which
usually means that they try to borrow and combine concepts and techniques
from various schools, depending on what seems best for the individual
case. This inclusiveness extends to efforts to combine biological and
psychosocial approaches as well as individual and family therapies.
“Integrative” usually means that the therapy combines different approaches
and fuses them together. Therapists are considered “eclectic” when they
selectively apply techniques from a variety of approaches to best fit the
needs.
One example of an eclectic therapy is interpersonal psychotherapy. IPT
was originally developed to treat major depressive disorder. It’s also used
effectively to treat eating disorders, perinatal depression, drug and
alcoholaddiction, dysthymia, and other mood disorders—including bipolar
disorder. Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is a brief, attachment-focused Self-Instructional Material
115
Theraphy
psychotherapy that centers on resolving interpersonal problems and
NOTES symptomatic recovery. It is an empirically supported treatment (EST) that
follows a highly structured and time-limited approach and is intended to be
completed within 12–16 weeks. IPT is based on the principle that
relationships and life events impact mood and that the reverse is also true.
It was developed by Gerald Klerman and Myrna Weissman for major
depression in the 1970s and has since been adapted for other mental
disorders. Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is a time-limited, focused,
evidence-based approach to treat mood disorders. The main goal of IPT is
to improve the quality of a client’s interpersonal relationships and social
functioning to help reduce their distress. IPT provides strategies to resolve
problems within four key areas.
4. What is eclectic therapy?
5. What is the difference between eclectic therapy and integrative
therapy?
8.10 Let Us Sum Up
Psychotherapy (psychological therapy or talking therapy) is the use of
psychological methods, particularly when based on regular personal
interaction, to help a person change behavior and overcome problems in
desired ways. Psychotherapy aims to improve an individual's well-being
and mental health, to resolve or mitigate troublesome behaviors, beliefs,
compulsions, thoughts, or emotions, and to improve relationships and
social skills. Behavioural therapy is focused on human behaviour and looks
to eradicate unwanted or maladaptive behaviour. Typically, this type of
therapy is used for those with behavioural problems or mental health
conditions that involve unwanted behaviour. Cognitive behavioral therapy
(CBT) is a psycho-social intervention that aims to improve mental health.
CBT focuses on challenging and changing unhelpful cognitive distortions
(e.g. thoughts, beliefs, and attitudes) and behaviors, improving emotional
regulation, and the development of personal coping strategies that target
solving current problems. Humanistic and existential psychotherapies use a
wide range of approaches to case conceptualization, therapeutic goals,
intervention strategies, and research methodologies. They are united by an
emphasis on understanding human experience and a focus on the client
rather than the symptom. Psychological problems (including substance
abuse disorders) are viewed as the result of inhibited ability to make
authentic, meaningful, and self-directed choices about how to live.
Consequently, interventions are aimed at increasing client self-awareness
and self-understanding. Psychodynamic psychotherapy or psychoanalytic
psychotherapy is a form of depth psychology, the primary focus of which is
to reveal the unconscious content of a client's psyche in an effort to
alleviate psychic tension.
Psychodynamic psychotherapy relies on the interpersonal relationship
between client and therapist more than other forms of depth psychology. In
terms of approach, this form of therapy uses psychoanalysis adapted to a
less intensive style of working, usually at a frequency of once or twice per
116
Theraphy
week. Principal theorists drawn upon are Freud, Klein, and theorists of the
object relations movement, e.g., Winnicott, Guntrip, and Bion. NOTES
Family therapy, also referred to as couple and family therapy, marriage
and family therapy, family systems therapy, and family counseling, is a
branch of psychotherapy that works with families and couples in intimate
relationships to nurture change and development. It tends to view change in
terms of the systems of interaction between family members. It emphasizes
family relationships as an important factor in psychological health. Eclectic
therapy is a therapeutic approach that incorporates a variety of therapeutic
principles and philosophies in order to create the ideal treatment program
to meet the specific needs of the patient or client.
Psychodynamic therapy
• View: Problems are symptoms of unresolved traumas and conflicts
• Focus: Inner, often unconscious motivations as well as attempts to

resolve conflicts between personal needs and social requirements
• Approach: By understanding and making more conscious the

relationships between overt problems and the unresolved, internal
conflicts that caused them, people can work through problems to reach
an effective solution
Behavioral Therapy
• View: Problems are the result of learned, self-defeating behaviors
• Focus: Observable behavior and conditions that sustain unhealthy behavior
• Approach: By applying the principles of conditioning and reinforcement,

people can learn healthy behaviors
Cognitive Therapy
• View: Problems are the result of what we think (cognitive content) and how we
think (cognitive process), including distorted view of situations and self, faulty
reasoning, and poor problem solving
• Focus: Thoughts and thought processes that cause problematic emotions and
behaviors
• Approach: By reconfiguring damaging thinking patterns, people can learn

healthy, realistic ways of thinking about life experiences
Existential/Humanistic Therapy
• View: Problems are the result of issues related to difficulties in daily life,
especially a lack of both meaningful relationships and significant goals
• Focus: Ways to unite mind and body, that is, the whole person, and thus
release the potential for greater levels of performance and greater richness of
experience
• Approach: By examining experiences in current life situations, people can

develop their individuality and learn how to realize their full potential
117
Theraphy
NOTES 1. Describe the different techniques that can be used to provide
anxious patients with exposure to the stimuli they fear.
2. In what ways are REBT and Cognitive therapy similar and in what
ways are they different?
3. Discuss Psychodynamic therapies.
4. Explain humanistic-experiential therapy.
1. Psychological Approaches target the "software," learned faulty
behaviors and habits, along with damaging words, thoughts,
interpretations, and feedback that direct strategies for daily living.
Psychological approaches assume that many disorders result from mental,
behavioral, and social factors, such as personal experiences, traumas,
conflicts, and environmental conditions.
2. Exposure therapy, aversion therapy, modeling and systematic use of
reinforcement.
3. Transference is the process by which emotions and desires originally
associated with one person, such as a parent, are unconsciously shifted to
another. Countertransference is the transference of a therapist’s own
unconscious feelings to his or her patient; unconscious or instinctive
emotion felt towards the patient.
4. Eclectic therapy is a therapeutic approach that incorporates a variety of
therapeutic principles and philosophies in order to create the ideal
treatment program to meet the specific needs of the patient or client.
5. “Integrative” usually means that the therapy combines different
approaches and fuses them together. Therapists are considered “eclectic”
when they selectively apply techniques from a variety of approaches to
best fit your needs.
2. Carson, R. C., & Butcher, J. N. (2007). Abnormal Psychology.
New Delhi: Pearson Education Inc.
Maladaptive Behaviour (11thEdn). New Delhi: Prentice Hall of
India Pvt Ltd.
118
Prevention
UNIT IX: PREVENTION NOTES
Structure
9.1 Introduction
9.2 Objectives
9.7 Let Us Sum Up
9.1 Introduction
Many mental health professionals are trying not only to cure mental health
problems but also to prevent them, or at least to reduce their effects.
Prevention efforts are classified into three subcategories:
1. Universal interventions: Efforts that are aimed at influencing the
general population.
2. Selective interventions: Efforts that are aimed at specific subgroups of
the population considered at risk for developing mental health problems-
for example, adolescents or ethnic minorities.
3. Indicated interventions: Efforts that are directed toward high-risk
individuals who are identified as having minimal but detectable symptoms
of mental disorder but who do not meet criteria for clinical diagnosis.
9.2 Objectives
On completion of this unit you will be able to
 Understand the goals and objectives of prevention
 Enlist the basic requirements to sustain and enhance mental health
 Discern the major role of society and culture in promoting mental
health
Universal strategies of prevention are aimed at the general population. The
term ‘universal’ is to be preferred to the traditional concept of primary
prevention because it specifies that the population to which the intervention
is applied is not preselected. Most universal prevention strategies do
identify high-risk populations, but unlike selected intervention programmes
they do not target a specific group that has characteristics that define its Self-Instructional Material
119
Prevention members as being at high risk within the population for developing the
NOTES disorder. Thus, the program is delivered universally. It is the population,
and not the individual within the population, that may carry the risk, which
is generally relatively low in these interventions.Universal interventions
perform two key tasks: 1) altering conditions that can cause or contribute to
mental disorders (risk factors) and 2) establishing conditions that foster
positive mental health (protective factors).Epidemiological studies help
investigators obtain information about the incidence and distribution of
various maladaptive behaviors. These findings can then be used to suggest
what preventive efforts might be most appropriate. For example, various
epidemiological studies and reviews have shown that certain groups are at
high risk for mental disorders: recently divorced people, physically abused,
the physically disabled people etc. Although findings such as these may be
the basis for immediate selective or indicated prevention, they may also aid
in universal prevention by telling us what to look for and where to look- in
essence, by focusing our efforts in the right direction. Universal prevention
is very broad and includes biological, psychosocial and sociocultural
efforts. Virtually any effort that is aimed at improving the human condition
would be considered as a part of universal prevention of mental disorders.
Biologically based universal strategies for prevention begin with promoting
adaptive lifestyles. Many of the goals for health psychology can be viewed
as Universal prevention strategies. Efforts towards improving diet,
establishing a routine of physical exercise, and developing overall good
health habits can do much to improve physical well-being. Physical Illness
always produces some sort of psychological stress that can result in such
problems at depression, so with respect to good mental health help
maintaining good physical health is prevention.
In viewing normality as optimal development and viewing high functioning
(rather than mere absence of pathology) as the goal, we imply that people
need opportunities to earn physical, intellectual, emotional and social
competencies.
1. The first requirement for psychosocial health is that the person develops
the skills needed for effective problem solving, for expressing emotions
constructively, and for engaging in satisfying relationship with others.
Failure to develop these protective skills places the individual at a serious
disadvantage in coping with the stresses and the unavoidable risk factors
for mental disorders.
2. The second requirement for psychosocial health is that a person acquires
an accurate frame of reference on which to build his or her identity. We
have seen repeatedly that when people assumptions about themselves or
their world are inaccurate, their behaviour is likely to be maladaptive.
Consider, for example, the young women who believe that being thin can
bring happiness and so becomes anorexic.
3. The third requirement for psychosocial health is that a person be
prepared for the types of problems likely to be encountered during given
life stages. For example, young people who want to marry and have
children must be prepared for the tasks of building a mutually satisfying
relationships and helping children develop their abilities.
In recent years, psychosocial measures aimed at prevention have received a
great deal of attention. The field of behavioural medicine has been
120
influential, with efforts being made to change the psychological factors Prevention
underlying unhealthy habits such as smoking, excessive drinking, and poor NOTES
eating habits.
Responsible psychologically healthy individuals are essential in order for
the community to thrive and be supportive. The psychosocial impaired
victims of disorganized communities lack the wherewithal to create better
communities to protect and sustain the psychological health of those who
come after them, and a persistently unprotective environment results.
Socio-cultural efforts toward universal prevention are focused on making
the community as safe and attractive as possible for the individual within it.
With our growing recognition of the role that pathological social
conditions play in producing maladaptive behaviour (in socially
impoverished communities), increased attention must be devoted to
creating social conditions that will foster healthy development and
functioning in individuals. Efforts to create these conditions include a
broad spectrum of measures ranging from public education and social
security to economic planning and social legislation directed at ensuring
adequate healthcare for all.

1. What is a universal intervention and what are the three types of
strategies that are used in universal interventions?
Preventing mental health problems through social change in the community
is difficult. Although the whole psychological climate can ultimately be
changed by a social movement such as the ones initiated by Gandhiji, Raja
Ram Mohan Roy, and PeriyarE.V.Ramaswamy, the payoff of such efforts
is generally far in the future and may be difficult or impossible to predict or
measure. Attempts to effect psychologically desirable social change are
also likely to involve ideological and political issues that may inspire
powerful opposition, including opposition from the government system.
Efforts to bring about change through targeting a smaller segment of the
population can have more effective results. For example, a recent review of
the research in reducing depression in children concludes that selective
intervention programs are more effective than universal intervention
programs in reducing the extent of depressive disorders. Selective
prevention interventions are generally considered to be secondary
prevention, although it might be more appropriate to put many of these
under the heading of primary prevention. Selective prevention
interventions are aimed at individuals who are at high risk of developing
the disorder or are showing very early signs or symptoms. Interventions
tend to focus on reducing risk and strengthening resilience. Risk is
obviously higher in these selected groups and is often the result of a
combination of risk factors rather than the intensity of any single factor.
Factors such as poverty, unemployment, inadequate transportation,
substandard housing, parental mental health problems, and marital conflict,
121
Prevention which may affect a particular child, could be addressed by selected
NOTES prevention programmes.
Anillustration of selective prevention strategies
Though difficult to formulate, mobilize, and carry out, selective
intervention can bring about major improvements. In this section, we will
look at the mobilization of prevention resources aimed at curtailing or
reducing the problem of teenage alcohol and drug abuse. Prominent social
forces such as advertising and marketing campaigns that are attractive to
youth, the influence of peer groups, and the ready availability of alcohol,
tobacco and even many illicit drugs are instrumental in promoting the early
use of alcohol in young people.
Alcohol use among youth is related to many social, emotional, and
behavioural problems. Early alcohol use is a strong predictor of lifetime
alcohol abuse or dependence. Because the factors that entice adolescents to
begin using alcohol and drugs are influenced by social factors, it is
tempting to think that if these forces could be counterbalanced with equally
powerful alternative influences, the rate of substance abuse might radically
decline. But this is easier said than done.
1. Intercepting and/or Reducing the Supply of Drugs Available.
The reduction of supply by policing our borders has had minimal impact on
the availability of drugs. These programs do little to affect the supply of the
two drive most abused by adolescents - alcohol and tobacco - which are, of
course, available in corner stores and even in adolescents home. Reducing
the supply of these drugs to adolescents is especially challenging given
mass media messages and other societal signals and these legal products
can bring about social acceptance, are essential for celebrations, and can
mark a young person's passage into adulthood, with limited cautions about
their potential to damage health.
2. Providing Treatment services for those who Develop Drug Problems.
Although much money is spent every year on treatment, treating substance
abuse is perhaps the least effective way to reduce the problem. Addictive
disorders are very difficult to overcome, and treatment failure or relapse
are the rule rather than the exception. Therapeutic programs for those
addicted to drugs or alcohol, though necessary, are not the answer to
eliminating or even significantly reducing the problems in our society.
3. Encouraging prevention.
By far the most desirable- and potentially the most effective-means of
reducing the drug problem in our country is through prevention methods
aimed at altering citizens to the problems that surround drugs and teaching
young people ways to avoid using them. Although past efforts have had
some limited success in discouraging adolescent drug use, many initially
promising prevention efforts have failed to bring about the desired
reduction in substance use.
In recent years prevention specialists have taken a more proactive position
and have attempted to establish programs that prevents the development of
abuse disorders before young people become so involved with drugs or
alcohol that future adjustment becomes difficult, if not impossible. These
recent prevention strategies have taken some diverse and promising
directions.
The most promising alcohol and drug prevention curricula are based on
behavioural theory; they target the risk (e.g, peer pressure, mass-media
122
messages) and protective (e.g, alcohol free activities, messages supporting Prevention
"no use" norms) factors associated with adolescents include NOTES

developmentally appropriate information about alcohol and other drugs;
are skill-based and interactive; and emphasize normative education that
increase the awareness that most students do not use alcohol, tobacco, or
other drugs. Individuals from the field can be invited to spread awareness
based on their practical knowledge about the implications of the behaviour.
Intervention programs identify high-risk teenagers and take special
measures to circumvent their further use of alcohol or other potentially
dangerous drugs. Programs such as these are often school-based efforts and
are not strictly prevention programs because they intervene with young
people who have already developed problems. Programs for early
intervention can be effective in identifying adolescents before their alcohol
or drug problems become entrenched. This research strategy involves
identifying High-Risk individuals and providing special approaches to
circumvent their problems.
Through their own drinking or positive verbalizations about alcohol,
parents may encourage or sanction alcohol use among teens. Some research
has shown that parental involvement and monitoring reduces substance use
among adolescents. Thus, many prevention programs focus upon family
interventions with good success.
Various extracurricular activities and youth programs have the potential to
reduce problem behaviours like alcohol and drug use, school dropouts,
violence, and juvenile delinquency. These programs may be especially
beneficial for high-risk teens who are unsupervised outside of school or
who, because of poverty, may not have access to opportunities like sports,
music, or other programs available to middle-class youth.
One recent study examined adolescent girls (seventh through ninth grade)
who were given an online test battery and 12 sessions of gender-specific
drug prevention strategies. At follow-up, girls receiving the Internet
intervention program lower rates of use for alcohol and drugs compared
with the control sample.
A consensus seems to be developing in the field that the most effective way
to prevent complex problems like adolescent alcohol and other drug use is
through the use of multicomponent programs that combine aspects of the
various strategies described previously. Typically, classroom curricula are
used as the core component to which other strategies (e.g., parent
programs, mass media, extracurricular activities, and community strategies
to reduce access to alcohol via enforcement of age of drinking laws) are
added.
Partly because of this lack of positive results for alcohol use, a team of
University of Minnesota researchers developed Project Northland - an
exemplary research-based set of interventions that aims to delay the onset
of drinking in young adolescents, reduce alcohol use among those already
drinking, and limit the number of alcohol-related problems during
adolescence. Project Northland included multiple years of
behaviouralcurricula, parental involvement and education, peer leadership
123
Prevention opportunities, community task forces, and community-wide media
NOTES campaigns. Interventions started with students in the sixth grade and
continued until high school graduation. The program included peer-led and
activity-driven learning strategies that involved students, parents, teachers,
and community members in support of “no use” messages, while at the
same time promoting alcohol-free norms for youth, providing fun
alternatives to alcohol use, and reducing youth access alcohol. Innovative
activities and games were used to ensure high participation rates in the
program, and comprehensive teacher and peer-leader trainings were core
features.
The success of prevention programs has come to the attention of educators,
and a number of efforts are under way to “export” these laboratory
programs for broader use in America’s schools. Perhaps the most
noteworthy is the National Registry of Effective Prevention Programs
(NREPP), a program of the U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration.
However, the jury is still out on the relative success of the various
substance-abuse prevention programs at reducing alcohol and drug
problems in adolescents. For example, an effort to implement the
Northland project in a large Midwestern inner city where problems with
gangs, violence, drug dealing and housing were perceived as more pressing
than underage drinking did not have a positive outcomes that were obtained
in the more rural environment of northern Minnesota. It will take time and
further research efforts to determine which of the strategies are superior to
others in reducing alcohol and drug problems in adolescents, and in which
settings.

2. What is selective intervention?
3. Whom does the selective intervention target?

Indicated intervention emphasizes the early detection and prompt treatment
of maladaptive behaviour in a person’s family and community setting. In
some cases - for example, in a crisis or after a disaster indicated prevention
involves immediate and relatively brief intervention to prevent any long-
term behavioural consequences of the traumatic events.
Indicated prevention interventions in part mirror the category of tertiary
prevention. These interventions are aimed at specific groups in which
prodromal symptoms of a disorder are already evident but the full disorder
has not yet developed. It is often difficult to distinguish between selective
and indicated prevention interventions in terms of the therapeutic activity
that might be involved. Parent training, for example, can be part of both
selective and indicated interventions for prevention of conduct problems.
Some intervention programmes are complex packages made up of
universal, selective and indicated prevention interventions.
While most people experiencing mental health problems seek or obtain
Self-Instructional Material help in an outpatient program, some individuals require admission to an
124
inpatient treatment program because of perceived danger they experience Prevention
in their daily lives. Inpatient admission to a psychiatric hospital can be a NOTES

significant step that is taken as a means of protecting the individual or
those close to her or him from harm by providing a secure environment to
allow the patient to recover from her or his extreme symptoms.
In cases where individuals might be considered dangerous to themselves or
others or where their symptoms are so severe that they are unable to care
for themselves in the community, psychiatric hospitalization may be
necessary in order to prevent the development of further problems and the
individual’s further psychological deterioration. Most of the traditional
forms of therapy can be used in residential or inpatient hospital setting. In
addition, in many mental hospitals these techniques are supplemented by
efforts to make the hospital environment itself a “therapeutic community”.
That is, the social environment is manipulated to provide the patient with
the greatest benefit. All the ongoing activities of the hospital are brought
into the total treatment program, and the environment, or milieu, is a
crucial aspect of the therapy. This approach is thus often referred to as
milieu therapy. Three general therapeutic principles guide this approach to
treatment:
1. Staff expectations are clearly communicated to patients. Both
positive and negative feedback are used to appropriate verbalization
and actions by patients.
2. Patients are encouraged to become involved in all decisions made,
and in all actions taken, concerning them. A self-care, do-it-
yourself attitude prevails.
3. All patients belong to social groups on the ward. The group
cohesiveness that results gives the patients support and
encouragement, and the related process of group pressure helps
shape their behaviour in positive ways.
In a therapeutic community, few restraints as possible are placed on
patients’ freedom, and patients are encouraged to take responsibility for
their behaviour and participate actively in their treatment programs. Open
wards permit patients to use the grounds and premises. Self-government
programs give patients responsibility for managing their own affairs and
those of the ward. All hospital personnel are expected to treat the patients
as human beings who merit consideration and courtesy. The interaction
among the patients - whether in group therapy sessions, social events, or
other activities - is planned in such a way as to be of therapeutic benefit. In
fact, it is becoming apparent that often the most beneficial aspect of a
therapeutic community is the interaction among the patients themselves.
Differences in social roles and backgrounds may make empathy between
staff and patients difficult, but fellow patients have been there - they have
had similar problems and breakdowns and have experienced the anxiety
and humiliation of being labeled “mentally ill” and being hospitalized.
Constructive relationships frequently develop among patients in a
supportive, encouraging milieu. However, although residential treatment
has improved over time, such treatment for children and adolescents
continues to face challenges.
Another successful method for helping patients take increased
responsibility for their own behaviour is the use of social-learning
programs. Such programs normally make use of learning principles and
125
Prevention techniques such as token economies to shape more socially acceptable
NOTES behaviour.
Although a strong case can be made for the use of psychiatric
hospitalization in stabilizing adjustment of people living with psychiatric
disorders, a persistent concern about hospitalization is that the mental
hospital may become a permanent refuge from the world. Over the past
four decades, considerable effort has been devoted to reducing the
population of inpatients by closing hospitals and treating patients who have
mental disorders as outpatients. This effort, which is often referred to as
deinstitutionalization, was initiated to prevent the negative effects, for
many psychiatric patients, of being confined to a mental hospital for long
periods of time as well as to lower health care costs. To keep the focus on
returning patients to the community and on preventing their return to the
institution, contemporary hospital staff try to establish close ties with
patients’ families and communities and to provide them with positive
expectations about the patients’ recovery.
Even where hospitalization has successfully modified maladaptive
behaviour and a patient has learned needed occupational and interpersonal
skills, readjustment in the community following release may still be
difficult. Many studies have shown that in the past, up to 45 percent of
individuals with schizophrenia have been readmitted within their first year
of discharge. Community-based treatment programs, now referred to as
“aftercare programs ”are live-in facilities that serve as a home base for
former patients as they make the transition back to adequate functioning in
the community. Typically, community-based facilities are run not by
professional mental health personnel but by residents themselves. Aftercare
programs can help smooth the transition from institutional to community
life and reduce the number of relapses. However, some individuals do not
function well in aftercare programs. Sometimes aftercare includes a
“halfway” period in which a released patient makes a gradual return to the
outside world in what were formerly known as “halfway houses”. Some
people who have been kept in hospital under the Mental Health Act can get
free help and support after they leave the hospital.
4. Explain milieu therapy.
5. What are aftercare programs?
Deinstitutionalization (or deinstitutionalization) is the process of replacing
long-stay psychiatric hospitals with less isolated community mental health
services for those diagnosed with a mental disorder or developmental
disability. In the late 20th century, it led to the closure of many psychiatric
hospitals, as patients were increasingly cared for at home, in halfway
houses and clinics, and in regular hospitals in the US. It is a government
policy that moved mental health patients out of state-run "insane asylums"
into federally funded community mental health centers. It began in the
1960s as a way to improve treatment of the mentally ill while also cutting
government budgets.
126
In 1955, the number peaked at 558,000 patients or 0.03 percent of the Prevention
population. If the same percentage of the population were institutionalized NOTES

today, that would be 750,000 mentally ill people.
Deinstitutionalization works in two ways. The first focuses on reducing the
population size of mental institutions by releasing patients, shortening
stays, and reducing both admissions and readmission rates. The second
focuses on reforming psychiatric care to reduce (or avoid encouraging)
feelings of dependency, hopelessness and other behaviors that make it hard
for patients to adjust to a life outside of care. Three societal and scientific
changes occurred that caused deinstitutionalization. First, the development
of psychiatric drugs treated many of the symptoms of mental illness. These
included chlorpromazine and clozapine.
Second, society accepted that the mentally ill need to be treated instead of
locked away. This change of heart began in the 1960s.
Third, federal funding such as Medicaid and Medicare went toward
community mental health centers instead of mental hospitals.
The modern deinstitutionalization movement was made possible by the
discovery of psychiatric drugs in the mid-20th century, which could
manage psychotic episodes and reduced the need for patients to be
confined and restrained. Another major impetus was a series of socio-
political movements that campaigned for patient freedom. Lastly, there
were financial imperatives, with many governments also viewing it as a
way to save costs.
The movement to reduce institutionalization was met with wide acceptance
in Western countries, though its effects have been the subject of many
debates. Critics of the policy include defenders of the previous policies as
well as those who believe the reforms did not go far enough to provide
freedom to patients. It has been a source of considerable controversy. Some
authorities consider the emptying of mental hospitals a positive expression
of society’s desire to free previously confined persons, maintaining that
deinstitutionalized patients show significant improvement compared with
those who remain hospitalized. Others, however, speak of the
‘abandonment’ of chronic patients to a cruel and harsh which for many
include homelessness, violent victimizations harassed, intimidated and
frightened by obviously disturbed persons wandering the streets of the
neighbourhood. Many of those released from institutions were severely
mentally ill. They were not good candidates for community centers due to
the nature of their illnesses. Long-term, in-patient care provides better
treatment for many with severe mental illnesses.
There wasn't enough federal funding for mental health centers. That meant
there weren't enough centers to serve those with mental health needs. It
also made it difficult to create any comprehensive programs. Mental health
professionals underestimated how difficult it was to coordinate community
resources scattered throughout a city for those with disorders.
The courts made it almost impossible to commit anyone against their will.
That’s true regardless of whether it was for the person’s own safety and
welfare or for that of others.
However Deinstitutionalization successfully gave more rights to the
mentally challenged. Many of those in mental hospitals lived in the
backwater for decades. They received varying levels of care. It also
changed the culture of treatment from "send them away" to integrate them
into society where possible. It especially benefited those with Down's
127
Prevention syndrome and other high-functioning mental disorders. In Europe,
NOTES particularly in Italy and the United Kingdom, the forms taken by
deinstitutionalization have been numerous and diverse, such as alternating
periods in the institution and in the community, host programs in the
institutions, and the creation of work cooperatives. Thus, the struggle
against institutionalization has not necessarily been one of radical
opposition—everything institutional or community-based. These efforts, in
their various forms, may have permitted the extension of the
deinstitutionalization movement into areas well beyond psychiatry.
6. What is deinstitutionalization?
9.6 Let Us Sum Up
Many mental health professionals are trying not only to cure mental health
problems but also to prevent them, or at least to reduce their efforts.
Prevention can be viewed as focusing on three levels:
1. universal interventions, which attempt to reduce the long-term
consequences of having had a disorder;
2. selective interventions, which are aimed at reducing the possibility
of disorder and fostering positive mental health efforts in
subpopulations that are considered at special risk;
3. Indicated interventions, which attempt to reduce the impact or
duration of a problem that has already occurred.
With the advent of many new psychotropic medications and changing
treatment philosophies, there has been a major effort to discharge
psychiatric patients into the community.
There has been a great deal of controversy over deinstitutionalization and
the failure to provide prompt and adequate follow-up of these patients in
the community as soon as possible.

1. What are some strategies for biological, psychological, and socio-
cultural universal interventions?
2. Define the term selective intervention. What selective intervention
programs have shown promise in helping prevent teenage alcohol
and drug abuse?
3. What is indicated intervention?
1. Universal interventions target the general population and are not directed
at a specific risk group. Universal prevention measures address an entire
population (national, local, community, school, or neighborhood) with
messages and programs aimed at preventing or delaying the use of alcohol,
tobacco, and other drugs. The mission of universal prevention is to deter
the onset of substance abuse by providing all individuals with the
information and skills necessary to prevent the problem. The entire
population is considered at risk and able to benefit from prevention
programs. The three strategies used are biological,psychosocial and socio-
cultural strategies.
128
2. Selective prevention interventions are aimed at individuals who are at Prevention
high risk of developing the disorder or are showing very early signs or NOTES
symptoms. Interventions tend to focus on reducing risk and strengthening
resilience.
3. Selective prevention measures target subsets of the total population that

are considered at risk for substance abuse by virtue of their membership in
a particular segment of the population. Selective prevention targets the
entire subgroup, regardless of the degree of risk of any individual within
the group
4. Milieu therapy is the treatment of mental disorder or maladjustment by

making substantial changes in a patient's immediate life circumstances and
environment in a way that will enhance the effectiveness of other forms of
therapy. The goal of milieu therapy is to manipulate the environment so
that all aspects of the client’s hospital experience are considered
therapeutic.
Within this therapeutic community setting the client is expected to learn
adaptive coping, interaction and relationship skills that can be generalized
to other aspects of his or her life.
5. Aftercare programs are live-in facilities that serve as a home base for
former patients as they make the transition back to adequate functioning in
the community.
6. Deinstitutionalization is the process of replacing long-stay psychiatric
hospitals with less isolated community mental health services for those
diagnosed with a mental disorder or developmental disability.

Pearson India Ltd.
of India Pvt. Ltd.
129
Assessment and Diagnosis
NOTES UNIT X: ASSESSMENT AND

DIAGNOSIS
Structure
10.1 Introduction
10.2 Objectives
10.4 Diagnosis
10.4.2 DSM IV – TR
10.4.3 ICD 10
10.5 Let Us Sum Up
10.1 Introduction
Clinical assessment is one of the most important and complex
responsibilities of mental health professionals. The extent to which a
person’s problems are understood and appropriately treated depends
largely on the adequacy of the psychological assessment. The goals of
psychological assessment include identifying and describing the
individual’s symptoms; determining the chronicity and severity of
problems; evaluating the potential causal factors in the person’s
background; and exploring the individual’s personal resources that might
be an asset in his or her treatment program.
10.2 Objectives
After going through this unit you will:
 Understand the need and importance of assessing psychological
disorders
 Understand in detail the two major classification systems and issues
 Be able to appreciate the usefulness of assessment in treatment and
prevention of psychological disorders
Assessment is simply the collecting of relevant information in an effort to
reach a conclusion. It goes on in every realm of life. Clinical assessment is
used to determine how and why a person is behaving abnormally and how
that person may be helped. It also enables clinicians to evaluate people’s
progress after they have been in treatment for a while and decide whether
the treatment should be changed.
The specific tools that are used to do an assessment depend on the

clinician’s theoretical orientation. Psychodynamic clinicians, for example,
use methods that assess a client’s personality and probe for any
unconscious conflicts he or she may be experiencing. This kind of
Self-Instructional Material assessment, called a personality assessment, enables them to piece together
130
a clinical picture in accordance with the principles of their model. Assessment and Diagnosis
Behavioral and cognitive clinicians are more likely to use assessment NOTES
methods that reveal specific dysfunctional behaviors and cognitions. The
goal of this kind of assessment, called a behavioral assessment, is to
produce a functional analysis of the person’s behaviors—an analysis of
how the behaviors are learned and reinforced. The hundreds of clinical
assessment techniques and tools that have been developed fall into three
categories: clinical interviews, tests, and observations. To be useful, these
tools must be standardized and must have clear reliability and validity.
A clinical interview is a face-to-face encounter. If during a clinical
interview a man looks as happy as can be while describing his sadness over
the recent death of his mother, the clinician may suspect that the man
actually has conflicting emotions about this loss. Almost all practitioners
use interviews as part of the assessment process.
Conducting the InterviewThe interview is often the first contact between
client and clinician. Clinicians use it to collect detailed information about
the person’s problems and feelings, lifestyle and relationships, and other
personal history. They may also ask about the person’s expectations of
therapy and motives for seeking it.
Beyond gathering basic background data, clinical interviewers give special
attention to whatever topics they consider most important. Psychodynamic
interviewers try to learn about the person’s needs and memories of past
events and relationships. Behavioral interviewers try to pinpoint the precise
nature of the abnormal responses, including information about the stimuli
that trigger
such responses and their consequences. Cognitive interviewers try to
discover assumptions
and interpretations that influence the person. Humanistic clinicians ask
about the person’s self-evaluation, self-concept, and values. Biological
clinicians gather a family history from the individual to help uncover
inherited tendencies and also look more directly for signs of biochemical or
brain dysfunction. And sociocultural interviewers ask about the family,
social, and cultural environments.
Interviews can be either unstructured or structured. In an unstructured
interview, the clinician asks open-ended questions, perhaps as simple as
“Would you tell me about yourself?” The lack of structure allows the
interviewer to follow interesting leads and explore relevant topics that
could not be anticipated before the interview. In a structured interview,
clinicians ask prepared questions. Sometimes they use a published
interview schedule—a standard set of questions designed for all interviews.
Many structured interviews include a mental status exam, a set of
questions and observations that systematically evaluate the client’s
awareness, orientation with regard to time and place,
attention span, memory, judgment and insight, thought content and
processes, mood, and appearance. A structured format ensures that
clinicians will cover the same kinds of important issues in all of their
interviews and enables them to compare the responses of different
individuals. Unstructured interviews typically appeal to psychodynamic
and humanistic clinicians, while structured formats are widely used by
behavioral and cognitive clinicians, who need to pinpoint behaviors,
attitudes, or thinking processes that may underlie abnormal behavior.
Limitations of Clinical Interviews
NOTES Although interviews often produce valuable information about people,
there are limits to what they can achieve. One problem is that they
sometimes lack validity, or accuracy. Individuals may intentionally mislead
in order to present themselves in a positive light or to avoid discussing
embarrassing topics. Or people may be unable to give an accurate report in
their interviews. Individuals who suffer from depression, for example, take
a pessimistic view of themselves and may describe themselves as poor
workers or inadequate parents when that isn’t the case at all.
Interviewers too may make mistakes in judgments which may distort the
information they gather. They usually rely too heavily on first impressions,
for example, and give too much weight to unfavorable information about a
client. Interviewer biases, including gender, race, and age biases, may also
influence the interviewers’ interpretations of what a client says. Interviews,
particularly unstructured ones, may also lack reliability. People respond
differently to different interviewers, providing, for example, less
information to a cold interviewer than to a warm and supportive one.
Similarly, a clinician’s race, sex, age, and appearance may influence a
client’s responses.
Psychophysiological TestsClinicians may also use psychophysiological
tests, which measure physiological responses as possible indicators of
psychological problems. This practice began three decades ago after
several studies suggested that states of anxiety are regularly accompanied
by physiological changes, particularly increases in heart rate, body
temperature, blood pressure, skin reactions (galvanic skin response), and
muscle contraction.
One psychophysiological test is the polygraph, popularly known as a lie
detector. Electrodes attached to various parts of a person’s body detect
changes in breathing, perspiration, and heart rate while the individual
answers questions. The clinician observes these functions while the person
answers “yes” to control questions—questions whose answers are known
to be yes, such as “Are your parents both alive?” Then the clinician
observes the same physiological functions while the person answers test
questions, such as “Did you commit this robbery?” If breathing,
perspiration, and heart rate suddenly increase, the person is suspected of
lying.
Like other kinds of clinical tests, psychophysiological tests have their
drawbacks. Many require expensive equipment that must be carefully
tuned and maintained. In addition, psychophysiological measurements can
be inaccurate and unreliable. The laboratory equipment itself—elaborate
and sometimes frightening— may arouse a participant’s nervous system
and thus change his or her physical responses. Physiological responses may
also change when they are measured repeatedly in a single session.
Galvanic skin responses, for example, often decrease during repeated
testing.
Neurological and Neuropsychological TestsSome problems in
personality or behavior are caused primarily by damage to the brain or
changes in brain activity. Head injury, brain tumors, brain malfunctions,
alcoholism, infections, and other disorders can all cause such impairment.
Self-Instructional Material If a psychological dysfunction is to be treated effectively, it is important to
know whether its primary cause is a physical abnormality in the brain.
132
A number of techniques may help pinpoint brain abnormalities. Some Assessment and Diagnosis
procedures, such as brain surgery, biopsy, and X ray, have been used for NOTES
many years. More recently, scientists have developed a number of
neurological tests, designed to measure brain structure and activity
directly. One neurological test is the electroencephalogram (EEG), which
records brain waves, the electrical activity taking place within the brain as
a result of neurons firing. In this procedure, electrodes placed on the scalp
transmit brain-wave impulses to a machine that records them. When the
electroencephalogram reveals an abnormal brain-wave pattern,clinicians
suspect the existence of brain injuries, tumors, seizures, or other brain
abnormalities, and they turn to more precise and sophisticated techniques
to determine the nature and scope of the problem.
In particular, there are a group of other neurological tests that actually take
“pictures” of brain structure or brain activity. These tests, called
neuroimaging techniques, include computerized axial tomography (CAT
scan or CT scan), positron emission tomography (PET scan), magnetic
resonance imaging (MRI), and functional magnetic resonance imaging
(fMRI). A CT scan is a procedure in which X rays of the brain’s structure
are taken at different angles and then the images are combined by a
computer. This kind of scan is considered superior to a conventional X ray
because it yields a three-dimensional image of the brain’s structure. Rather
than showing the structure of the brain, a PET scan reveals the functioning
of different areas in the brain. A person who undergoes this procedure is
administered a harmless radioactive compound, which travels to the brain.
Then, as the individual experiences particular emotions or performs
specific cognitive tasks (say, reading or speaking), his or her brain is
scanned for radiation. Higher radioactivity in various brain areas reflects
higher blood flow and neuron activity in those areas. The radioactivity
readings are converted by a computer into a motion picture, revealing
which brain areas are active during the individual’s emotional experiences
or cognitive behaviors.
An MRI is a procedure in which a computer gathers information about the
magnetic properties of hydrogen atoms in the brain and then produces a
very detailed picture of the brain’s structure. An fMRI goes still further,
producing a detailed picture of the functioning brain. In this procedure, an
MRI scanner detects rapid changes in the flow or volume of blood in areas
across the brain while an individual is experiencing emotions or
performing specific cognitive tasks. By interpreting these blood changes as
indications of neuron activity at sites throughout the brain, a computer then
generates images of which brain areas are active during the individual’s
emotional experiences or cognitive behaviors, thus offering a picture of the
functioning brain. Partly because fMRI-produced images of brain
functioning are so much clearer than PET scan images, the fMRI has
generated enormous enthusiasm among brain researchers since it was first
developed in 1990.
Though widely used, these techniques are sometimes unable to detect
subtle brain abnormalities. Clinicians have therefore developed
neuropsychological tests that measure cognitive, perceptual, and motor
performances on certain tasks and interpret abnormal performances as an
indicator of underlying brain problems. Brain damage is especially likely to
affect visual perception, memory, and visual-motor coordination, so
neuropsychological tests focus particularly on these areas. The Bender
Visual-Motor Gestalt Test (Bender, 1938), one of the first
neuropsychological tests, consists of nine cards, each displaying a simple
NOTES design. Patients look at the designs one at a time and copy each one on a
piece of paper. Later they try to redraw
the designs from memory. By the age of 12, most people can remember
and redraw the designs accurately. Notable errors in accuracy are thought
to reflect organic brain impairment. To achieve greater precision and
accuracy in their assessments of brain abnormalities, clinicians often use a
battery, or series, of neuropsychological tests, each targeting a specific skill
area.
Clinical Observations
In addition to interviewing and testing people, clinicians may
systematically observe their behavior. In one technique, called naturalistic
observation, clinicians observe clients in their everyday environments. In
another, analog observation, they observe them in an artificial setting, such
as a clinical office or laboratory. Finally, in self-monitoring, clients are
instructed to observe themselves.
Naturalistic and Analog Observations
Naturalistic clinical observations usually take place in homes, schools,
institutions such as hospitals and prisons, or community settings. Most of
them focus on parent-child, sibling-child, or teacher-child interactions and
on fearful, aggressive, or disruptive behavior. Often such observations are
made by participant observers, key persons in the client’s environment,
and
reported to the clinician.
When naturalistic observations are not practical, clinicians may resort to
analog observations,often aided by special equipment such as a videotape
recorder or one-way mirror. Analog observations have often focused on
children interacting with their parents, married couples attempting to settle
a disagreement, speech-anxious people giving a speech, and fearful people
approaching an object they find frightening.
There are limitations in clinical observations. They are not always reliable.
It is possible for various clinicians who observe the same person to focus
on different aspects of behavior, assess the person differently, and arrive at
different conclusions. Careful training of observers and the use of observer
checklists can help reduce this problem. Similarly, observers may make
errors that affect the validity, or accuracy, of their observations. The
observer may not be able to see or record all of the important behaviors and
events. Or the observer may experience, a steady decline in accuracy as a
result of fatigue. Another possible problem is observer bias—the
observer’s judgments may be influenced by information and expectations
he or she already has
about the person. The client’s behavior may be affected by the very
presence of the observer. If schoolchildren are aware that someone special
is watching them, for example, they may change their usual classroom
behavior, perhaps in the hope of creating a good impression. Finally,
clinical observations may lack external, validity. A child who behaves
aggressively in school is not necessarily aggressive at home or with friends
after school. Because behavior is often specific to particular situations,
observations in one setting cannot always be applied to other settings.
134
Self-Monitoring Assessment and Diagnosis
In self-monitoring, people observe themselves and carefully record the NOTES

frequency of certain behaviors, feelings, or cognitions as they occur over
time. How frequently, for instance, does a headache sufferer have a
headache? What kinds of circumstances bring those feelings about?
Self-monitoring is especially useful in assessing behavior that occurs so
infrequently that it is unlikely to be seen during other kinds of
observations. It is also useful for behaviors that occur so frequently that
any other method of observing them in detail would be impossible—for
example, smoking, drinking, or other drug use. Third, self-monitoring may
be the only way to observe and measure private thoughts or perceptions.
Like all other clinical assessment procedures, self-monitoring has
drawbacks. In this method too validity is often a problem. People do not
always receive proper instruction in this form of observation, nor do they
always try to record their observations accurately. Furthermore, when
people monitor themselves, they may change their behaviors
unintentionally. Smokers, for example, often smoke fewer cigarettes than
usual when they are monitoring themselves, drug users take drugs less
frequently, and teachers give more positive and fewer negative comments
to their students.
Tests are devices for gathering information about a few aspects of a
person’s psychological
functioning, from which broader information about the person can be
inferred. Clinicians use six kinds most often: projective tests, personality
inventories, response inventories, psychophysiological tests, neurological
and neuropsychological tests, and intelligence tests.
PROJECTIVE TESTS
Projective testsrequire that clients interpret vague stimuli, such as inkblots
or ambiguous pictures, or follow open-ended instructions such as “Draw a
person.” Theoretically, when clues and instructions are so vague, people
will “project” aspects of their personality into the task. Projective tests are
used primarily by psychodynamic clinicians to help assess the unconscious
drives and conflicts they believe to be at the root of abnormal functioning.
The most widely used projective tests are the Rorschach test, the Thematic
Apperception Test, sentence-completion tests, and drawings.
Rorschach test
In 1911, Hermann Rorschach, a Swiss psychiatrist, experimented with the
use of inkblots in his clinical work. He made thousands of blots by
dropping ink on paper and then folding the paper in half to create a
symmetrical but wholly accidental design. Rorschach found that everyone
saw images in these blots. In addition, the images a viewer saw seemed to
correspond in important ways with his or her psychological condition.
People diagnosed with schizophrenia, for example, tended to see images
that differed from those described by people suffering from depression.
Rorschach selected 10 inkblots and published them in 1921 with
instructions for their use in assessment. This set was called the Rorschach
Psychodynamic Inkblot Test. Rorschach died just eight months later, at the
age of 37, but his work was continued by others, and his inkblots took their
place among the most widely used projective tests of the twentieth century.
Clinicians administer the “Rorschach,” as it is commonly called, by
presenting one inkblot card at a time and asking respondents what they see,
what the inkblot seems to be, or what it reminds them of. In the early years,
Rorschach testers paid special attention to the themes and images that the
NOTES inkblots evoked, called the thematic content. Testers now also pay attention
to the style of the responses: Do the clients view the design as a whole or
see specific details? Do they focus on the blots or on the white spaces
between them? Do they use or ignore the shadings and colors in several of
the cards? Do they see human movement or animal movement in the
designs?
Thematic Apperception Test
The Thematic Apperception Test (TAT) is a pictorial projective test.
People who take the TAT are commonly shown 30 black-and-white
pictures of individuals in vague situations and are asked to make up a
dramatic story about each card. They must tell what is happening in the
picture, what led up to it, what the characters are feeling and thinking, and
what the outcome of the situation will be.
Clinicians who use the TAT believe that people always identify with one of
the characters on each card, called the hero. The stories are thought to
reflect the individuals’ own circumstances, needs, emotions, and sense of
reality and fantasy.
Sentence-completion test
The sentence-completion test, first developed in the 1920s, asks people to
complete a series of unfinished sentences, such as “I wish . . . ” or “My
father . . . ” The test is considered a good springboard for discussion and a
quick and easy way to pinpoint topics to explore.
Drawings
On the assumption that a drawing tells us something about its creator,
clinicians often ask clients to draw human figures and talk about them.
Evaluations of these drawings are based on the details and shape of the
drawing, solidity of the pencil line, location of the drawing on the paper,
size of the figures, features of the figures, use of background, and
comments made by the respondent during the drawing task. In the Draw-a-
Person (DAP) Test, the most popular of the drawing tests, individuals are
first told to draw “a person” and then are instructed to draw another person
of the opposite sex.
Advantages of Projective Tests
Until the 1950s, projective tests were the most common technique for
assessing personality. In
recent years, however, clinicians and researchers have relied on them
largely to gain “supplementary” insights. The tests have not consistently
demonstrated much reliability or validity. In reliability studies, different
clinicians have tended to score the same person’s projective test quite
differently. To address this problem and improve scoring consistency,
several standardized procedures for administering and scoring the tests
have been developed. For example, the Rorschach Comprehensive System
is a highly regarded scoring system that has often yielded impressive
reliability scores among clinicians who are trained in its use and
application. However, only a minority of projective test administrators
actually use such standardized procedures.
Research has also challenged the validity of projective tests. When
clinicians try to describe a client’s personality and feelings on the basis of
responses to projective tests, their conclusions often fail to match the self-
Self-Instructional Material report of the client, the view of the psychotherapist, or the picture gathered
from an extensive case history. Another validity problem is that projective
136
tests are sometimes biased against minority ethnic groups. For example, Assessment and Diagnosis
people are supposed to identify with the characters in the Thematic NOTES
Apperception Test (TAT) when they make up stories about them, yet no
members of minority groups/ or people from other race are represented in
the TAT pictures. In response to this problem, some clinicians have
developed other TAT-like testswith African American or Hispanic figures.
Personality Inventories
An alternative way to collect information about individuals is to ask them
to assess themselves. The personality inventory asks respondents a wide
range of questions about their behavior, beliefs, and feelings. In the typical
personality inventory, individuals indicate whether each of a long list of
statements applies to them. Clinicians then use the responses to draw
conclusions about the person’s personality and psychological functioning.
Personality inventories appear to have greater validity, or accuracy, than
projective tests. However, they can hardly be considered highly valid.
When clinicians have used these tests alone, they have not typically been
able to judge a respondent’s personality accurately. One problem is that the
personality traits that the tests seek to measure cannot be examined
directly. A person’s character, emotions, and needs cannot be fully known
from self-reports alone. Another problem is that despite the more diverse
sampling of standardization groups conducted by personality tests, there
are cultural limitations in certain tests. Responses indicative of
apsychological disorder in one culture may be normal responses in another.
Despite their limited validity, personality inventories continue to be
popular. Research indicates that they can help clinicians learn about
people’s personal styles and disorders as long as they are used in
combination with interviews or other assessment tools.
Response Inventories
Like personality inventories, response inventories ask people to provide
detailed information about themselves, but these tests focus on one specific
area of functioning. For example, one such test may measure affect
(emotion), another social skills, and still another cognitive processes.
Clinicians can use them to determine the role such factors play in a
person’s disorder. Affective inventories measure the severity of such
emotions as anxiety, depression, and anger. In one of the most widely used
affective inventories, the Beck Depression Inventory, people rate their level
of sadness and its effect on their functioning. Social skills inventories, used
particularly by behavioral and family-social clinicians, ask respondents to
indicate how they would react in a variety of social situations. Cognitive
inventories reveal a person’s typical thoughts and assumptions and can
uncover counterproductive patterns of thinking that may be at the root of
abnormal functioning.
Because response inventories collect information directly from the clients
themselves, they have strong face validity. Thus both the number of these
tests and the number of clinicians who use them have increased steadily in
the past 25 years. At the same time, however, these inventories have major
limitations. Unlike the personality inventories, they rarely include
questions to indicate whether people are being careless or inaccurate in
their accounts. Moreover, with the notable exceptions of the Beck
Depression Inventory and a few others, response inventories generally have
not been subjected to careful standardization, reliability, and validity
procedures.
Intelligence TestsAn early definition of intelligence described it as “the
NOTES capacity to judge well, to reason well and to comprehend well” (Binet&
Simon, 1916). Because intelligence is an inferred quality rather than a
specific physical process, it can be measured only indirectly. In 1905 the
French psychologist Alfred Binet and his associate Theodore Simon
produced an intelligence test consisting of a series of tasks requiring
people to use various verbal and nonverbal skills. The general score
derived from this and subsequent intelligence tests is termed an
intelligence quotient, or IQ, so called because initially it represented the
ratio of a person’s “mental” age (score obtained from the test) to his or her
“chronological” age (actual age), multiplied by 100. There are now more
than 100 intelligence tests available, including the widely used Wechsler
Adult Intelligence Scale, Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children, and
Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scale.
Though intelligence tests have shown high validity and reliability, they
have some shortcomings. Factors that have nothing to do with intelligence,
such as low motivation and high anxiety, can greatly influence test
performance. In addition, IQ tests may contain cultural biases in their
language or tasks that place people of one background at an advantage over
those of another. Similarly, members of some minority groups may have
little experience with this kind of test, or they may be uncomfortable with
test examiners of a majority ethnic background. Either way, their
performances may suffer.
1. What is the purpose of clinical assessment?
2. What are the commonly used psychological tests?
10.4 Diagnosis
Clinicians use the information from interviews, tests, and observations to
construct an integrated picture of the factors that are causing and
maintaining a client’s disturbance, which is referred to a clinical picture.
Such pictures are also influenced by the clinicians’ theoretical orientation.
With the assessment data and clinical picture in hand, clinicians are ready
to make a diagnosis (from the Greek word for “a discrimination”)—that is,
a determination that a person’s psychological problems constitute a
particular disorder. When clinicians decide, through diagnosis, that a
client’s pattern of dysfunction reflects a particular disorder, they are saying
that the pattern is basically the same as one that has been displayed by
many other people, has been observed and investigated in a variety of
studies, and perhaps has responded to particular forms of treatment. They
can then apply what is generally known about the disorder to the particular
individual they are trying to help. They can, for example, better predict the
future course of the person’s problem and the treatments that are likely to
be helpful.
When certain symptoms regularly occur together—a cluster of symptoms is
called a syndrome—and follow a particular course, clinicians agree that
those symptoms make up a particular mental disorder. When people
display this particular pattern of symptoms, diagnosticians assign them to
Self-Instructional Material that diagnostic category. A list of such categories, or disorders, with
138
descriptions of the symptoms and guidelines for assigning individuals to Assessment and Diagnosis
the categories, NOTES

is known as a classification system.
In 1883 Emil Kraepelin developed the first modern classification system
for abnormal behavior. His categories have formed the foundation for the
psychological part of the International Classification of Diseases (ICD),
the classification system now used by the World Health Organization. They
have also influenced the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental
Disorders (DSM), a classification system developed by the American
Psychiatric Association.
The DSM, like the ICD, has been changed over time. First published in
1952, the DSM underwent major revisions in 1968 (DSM-II), 1980 (DSM-
III), 1987 (DSM-IIIR), and 1994 (DSM-IV). DSM-IV lists approximately
400 mental disorders. Each entry describes the criteria for diagnosing the
disorder and its key clinical features. The system also describes related
features, which are often but not always present. The classification system
is further accompanied by text information (that is, background
information) such as research indications; age, culture, or gender trends;
and each disorder’s prevalence, risk, course, complications, predisposing
factors, and family patterns.
In 2000, the American Psychiatric Association published an update of the
text information that accompanies DSM-IV. This update, called the DSM-
IV Text Revision (DSM-IV-TR), also changed the diagnostic criteria for a
few disorders (certain sexual disorders).
Even with trustworthy assessment data and reliable and valid classification
categories, clinicians will sometimes arrive at a wrong conclusion. Like all
human beings, they are flawed information processors. They are influenced
disproportionately by information gathered early in the assessment process.
They sometimes pay too much attention to certain sources of information,
such as a parent’s report about a child, and too little to others, such as the
child’s point of view. Finally, their judgments can be distorted by any
number of personal biases, such as, gender, age, race, and socioeconomic
status, to name just a few.
Given the limitations of assessment tools, assessors, and classification
systems, studies sometimes uncover shocking errors in diagnosis,
especially in hospitals. Beyond the potential for misdiagnosis, the very act
of classifying people can lead to unintended results. Diagnostic labels can
become self-fulfilling prophecies. When people are diagnosed as mentally
disturbed, they may be viewed and reacted to correspondingly. If others
expect them to take on a sick role, they may begin to consider themselves
sick as well and act that way. Furthermore, our society attaches a stigma to
abnormality. People labeled mentally ill may find it difficult to get a job,
especially a position of responsibility, or to be welcomed into social
relationships. Once a label has been applied, it may stick for a long time.
Because of these problems, some clinicians would like to do away with
diagnoses. Others disagree. They believe we must simply work to increase
what is known about psychological disorders and improve diagnostic
techniques. They hold that classification and diagnosis are critical to
understanding and treating people in distress.
10.4.2 DSM IV – TR
The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM), is a
classification system developed by the American Psychiatric Association.
It has changed over time. First published in 1952, the DSM underwent
NOTES major revisions in 1968 (DSM-II), 1980 (DSM-III), 1987 (DSM-IIIR), and
1994 (DSM-IV). DSM-IV lists approximately 400 mental disorders.Each
entry describes the criteria for diagnosing the disorder and its key clinical
features. The system also describes related features, which are often but not
always present. The classification system is further accompanied by text
information (that is, background information) such as research indications;
age, culture, or gender trends; and each disorder’s prevalence, risk, course,
complications, predisposing factors, and family patterns.
In 2000, the American Psychiatric Association published an update of the
text information that accompanies DSM-IV. This update, called the DSM-
IV Text Revision (DSM-IV-TR), also changed the diagnostic criteria for a
few disorders (certain sexual disorders.
DSM requires clinicians to evaluate a client’s condition on five separate
axes, or branches of information, when making a diagnosis. First, they
must decide whether the person is displaying one or more of the disorders
found on Axis I, an extensive list of clinical syndromes that typically cause
significant impairment. Some of the most frequently diagnosed disorders
listed on this axis are the anxiety disorders and mood disorders:
Anxiety disorders People with anxiety disorders may experience general
feelings of anxiety and worry (generalized anxiety disorder), anxiety
centered on a specific situation or object ( phobias), periods of panic (panic
disorder), persistent thoughts or repetitive behaviors or both (obsessive-
compulsive disorder), or lingering anxiety reactions to unusually traumatic
events (acute stress disorder and posttraumatic stress disorder).
Mood disorders People with mood disorders feel extremely sad or elated
for long periods of time. These disorders include major depressive disorder
and bipolar disorders (in which episodes of mania alternate with episodes
of depression).
Next, diagnosticians must decide whether the person is displaying one of
the disorders listed on Axis II, which includes long-standing problems that
are frequently overlooked in the presence of the disorders on Axis I. There
are only two groups of Axis II disorders, mental retardation and
personality disorders.
Although people usually receive a diagnosis from either Axis I or Axis II,
they may receive diagnoses from both axes.
The remaining axes of DSM-IV-TR guide diagnosticians in reporting other
factors. Axis III asks for information concerning relevant general medical
conditions from which the person is currently suffering. Axis IV asks about
special psychosocial or environmental problems the person is facing, such
as school or housing problems.
And Axis V requires the diagnostician to make a global assessment of
functioning (GAF), that is, to rate on a 100-point scale the person’s
psychological, social, and occupational functioning overall.
Diabetes, for example, might be included under Axis III information and
recent breakup in relationship would be noted on Axis IV and GAF of
50/55 on Axis V would indicate a moderate level of dysfunction.
Because DSM-IV-TR uses several kinds of diagnostic information, each
defined by a different “axis,” it is known as a multiaxial system. The
diagnoses arrived at under this classification system are thought to be more
Self-Instructional Material informative and more carefully considered than those derived from the
early DSMs.
140
DSM -5, published in 2013, incorporated more theoretical shifts in Assessment and Diagnosis
diagnostic thinking for many years and has been the most controversial NOTES
alteration to diagnostic thinking to date. Most diagnostic categories in
DSM-5 contain a listing of subtypes and specifiers that allow the
diagnostician to further refine the diagnosis in order to provide more
specific subgroupings.
10.4.3 ICD 10
The official classification system of the World Health Organization (WHO)
for all physical and mental diseases is known as the International
Classification of Diseases (ICD). It was developed with the purpose of
having a standard format for the collection and comparison of mortality
statistics. First ICD was adopted in 1900 in a conference in Paris with
delegates from 26 countries. Another parallel list of classification of
diseases was adopted in 1909. Since then, ICD has been revised every 10
years or so. ICD-10, the latest revision was concluded in 1992. The
eleventh revision ICD-11 is underway.
Chapter V (F) of ICD-10 is concerned with mental and behavioural
disorders. It is available in three different formats – clinical descriptions
and diagnostic guidelines, diagnostic criteria for research, and a shorter and
simpler version for primary healthcare workers. ICD-10 follows
alphanumeric codes and mental disorders have been classified under 10
categories. The first letter, F, in the ICD list represents mental and
behavioural disorders. The numeral after F denotes the main category of
the mental disorder. For example, F20 to F29 classify the various kinds of
schizophrenia and schizotypal and delusional disorders. F20 is a code
specifically assigned to schizophrenia. A subtype of a particular disorder is
denoted with the use of a decimal point after the numeral. F.20.0 stands for
paranoid schizophrenia, while a digit following this shows the progressive
course of the disease (F20.01 denotes paranoid schizophrenia with
progressive deficit).
ICD-10 also has a provision for a multiaxial system of classification on
three different axes. Clinical diagnoses are represented on the first axis.
The second axis is for disablements with four dimensions – disablements
due to personal care, occupational functioning, functioning with family,
and broad social behaviour, respectively. The third axes takes into account
the contextual factors.
3. What is a syndrome?
4. Expand DSM and ICD.
10.5 Let Us Sum Up
Psychological assessment refers to a procedure by which clinicians, using
psychological tests, observation and interviews develop a summary of the
client’s symptoms and problems. Clinical diagnosis is the process through
which a clinician arrives at a general ‘summary classification’ of the
patient’s symptoms by following a clearly defined system such as DSM-5
or ICD-10.
Assessment is an ongoing process and may be important at various points
during treatment. In the initial clinical assessment, an attempt is usually Self-Instructional Material
made to identify the main dimensions of a client’s problem and to predict
the probable course of events under various conditions. Assessment before
NOTES treatment is also important for establishing baseline for various
psychological functions so that the effects of treatment can be measured.
1. What does clinical assessment of psychological disorders mean? Discuss
its usefulness.
2. Describe the evolution of DSM-5.
3. Write a note on ICD.
4. What are psychological tests?
5. Discuss the issues in classification.
1. Clinical assessmentis used to determine how and why a person is
behaving abnormally and how that person may be helped. It also
enables clinicians to evaluate people’s progress after they have been
in treatment for a while and decide whether the treatment should be
changed.
2. Projective tests, personality inventories, response inventories,
psychophysiological tests, neurological and neuropsychological
tests, and intelligence tests.
3. When certain symptoms regularly occur together—a cluster of
symptoms is called a syndrome
4. DSM - Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders
ICD - International Classification of Diseases

Ltd.
142
Anxiety Disorders
BLOCK IV: DISORDERS NOTES
UNIT XI: Anxiety Disorders
Structure
11.1 Introduction
11.2 Objectives

11.3.2 Causes
11.3.3 Treatment
11.4 Panic Disorder with and Without Agoraphobia
11.4.2 Causes
11.4.3 Treatment
11.5.2 Causes
11.5.3 Treatment
11.6.2 Causes
11.6.3 Treatment
11.7.2 Auses
11.7.3 Treatment
11.8 Let Us Sum Up
11.1 Introduction
The vague sense of being in danger is usually called anxiety, and it has the
same features—the same increase in breathing, muscular tension,
perspiration, and so forth—as fear. Although everyday experiences of fear
and anxiety are not pleasant, they often have an adaptive function: they
prepare us for action—for “fight or flight”—when danger threatens.
However, when anxiety becomes excessive and unnecessary it results in an
anxiety disorder.
11.2 Objectives
After completing this unit, you will understand:
 Different types of anxiety disorders, including generalized anxiety
disorder, phobias, panic disorder, and obsessive-compulsive
disorder along with post-traumatic stress disorder
 The causes of the above listed disorders
 Different treatment options available for anxiety disorders
People with generalized anxiety disorder experience excessive anxiety
under most circumstances and worry about practically anything. In fact, Self-Instructional Material
143
Anxiety Disorders
their problem is sometimes described as ‘free-floating anxiety’. They
NOTES typically feel restless, keyed up, or on edge; tire easily; have difficulty
concentrating; suffer from muscle tension; and have sleep problems. The
symptoms last at least six months. Nevertheless, most people with the
disorder are able, although with some difficulty, to carry on social
relationships and job activities. Generalized anxiety disorder is common in
Western society. Altogether, close to 6 percent of all people develop
generalized anxiety disorder sometime during their lives. It may emerge at
any age, but usually it first appears in childhood or adolescence. Women
diagnosed with the disorder outnumber men 2 to 1. Around one-quarter of
individuals with generalized anxiety disorder are currently in treatment.
DSM-5 criteria specify that the worry must occur on more days than not for
at least 6 months and it must be experienced as difficult to control. The
worry must be about a number of different events or activities, and its
content cannot be exclusively related to the worry associated with the
concurrent disorder, such as the possibility of having a panic attack. There
was much discussion among the task force working on revisions for DSM-
5 as to whether this is the optimal set of criteria for GAD (eg-6-month
duration requirement and excessive worry requirement) and whether this is
the optimal name for the disorder (versus generalized worry disorder or
pathological worry disorder). However, in the end a conservative approach
was taken and no changes were made from DSM-4 to DSM-5.
The general picture of people suffering from generalized anxiety disorder
is that they live in relatively constant future-oriented mood state of anxious
apprehension, chronic tension, worry, and diffuse uneasiness that they
cannot control. They also show marked vigilance for possible signs of
threat in the environment in the environment and constantly engage in
subtle avoidance activities like procrastination, checking, calling a loved
one frequently to check if he/she is safe. This apprehension is the essence
of GAD, leading Barlow and others to refer to GAD as the “basic” anxiety
disorder.
The nearly constant worries of people with GAD leave them continually
upset and discouraged. One study showed the common spheres of worry to
be family, work, finances and personal illness. Not only they have
difficulty in making decisions, they worry endlessly even after making it
over possible errors and unforeseen circumstances that may prove their
decision wrong. Ultimately, they fail to escape the illusory world created in
their thoughts and images and rarely experience the present moment that
possesses the potential to bring them joy. A recent study found that those
with GAD experienced a similar amount of role impairment and lessened
quality of life to those with major depression.
11.11.2 Causes
Sociocultural perspective:
According to sociocultural theorists, generalized anxiety disorder is most
likely to develop in people who are faced with societal conditions that are
truly dangerous. Studies have found that people in highly threatening
environments are indeed more likely to develop the general feelings of
tension, anxiety, and fatigue; the exaggerated startle reactions; and the
sleep disturbances found in this disorder. One of the most powerful forms
of societal stress is poverty. People without financial means are likely to
have less equality, less power, and greater vulnerability; to live in run-
144
down communities with high crime rates; to have fewer educational and Anxiety Disorders
job opportunities; and to run a greater risk for health problems. As NOTES
sociocultural theorists would predict, such people also have a higher rate of
generalized anxiety disorder.
Although poverty and various societal and cultural pressures may help
create a climate in which generalized anxiety disorder is more likely to
develop, sociocultural variables are not the only factors at work. After all,
most people in poor, war-torn, politically oppressed, or dangerous
environments do not develop this anxiety disorder. Even if sociocultural
factors play a broad role, theorists still must explain why some people
develop the disorder and others do not. The psychodynamic, humanistic-
existential, cognitive, and biological schools of thought have all tried to
explain why and have offered corresponding treatments.
Psychodynamic perspective:
Sigmund Freud (1933, 1917) believed that all children experience some
degree of anxiety as part of growing up, and all use ego defense
mechanisms to help control such anxiety. Children experience realistic
anxiety when they face actual danger; neurotic anxiety when they are
repeatedly prevented, by parents or by circumstances, from expressing their
id impulses; and moral anxiety when they are punished or threatened for
expressing their id impulses. According to Freud, some children experience
particularly high levels of such anxiety, or their defense mechanisms are
particularly inadequate, and these individuals may, in turn, develop
generalized anxiety disorder.
According to Freud, some children are overrun by neurotic or moral
anxiety, thus setting the stage for generalized anxiety disorder. Say that a
boy is spanked every time he cries for milk as an infant, messes his pants
as a 2-year-old, and explores his genitals as a toddler. He may eventually
come to believe that his various id impulses are very dangerous, and he
may experience overwhelming anxiety whenever he has such impulses.
Alternatively, a child’s ego defense mechanisms may be too weak to cope
with even normal levels of anxiety. Overprotected children, shielded by
their parents from all frustrations and threats, have little opportunity to
develop effective defense mechanisms. When they face the pressures of
adult life, their defense mechanisms may be too weak to cope with the
resulting anxieties.
Today’s psychodynamic theorists often disagree with specific aspects of
Freud’s explanation for generalized anxiety disorder. People who live in
dangerous environments experience greater anxiety and have a higher rate
of generalized anxiety disorder than those residing in other settings.Most
continue to believe, however, that the disorder can be traced to
inadequacies in the early relationships between children and their parents.
However, a major disadvantage is that studies on this issue have been
contradictory and not fully supporting either point of view.
Humanistic perspective:
Humanistic theorists propose that generalized anxiety disorder, like other
psychological disorders, arises when people stop looking at themselves
honestly and acceptingly. Repeated denials of their true thoughts,
emotions, and behavior make these people extremely anxious and unable to
fulfill their potential as human beings.
Rogers believed that children who fail to receive unconditional positive
regard from others may become overly critical of themselves and develop
145
Anxiety Disorders
harsh self-standards, what Rogers called conditions of worth. They try to
NOTES meet these standards by repeatedly distorting and denying their true
thoughts and experiences. Despite such efforts, however, threatening self-
judgments keep breaking through and causing them intense anxiety. This
onslaught of anxiety sets the stage for generalized anxiety disorder or some
other form of psychological dysfunction. In spite of such optimistic case
reports, controlled studies have failed to offer strong support for this
approach.
Cognitive perspective:
Initially, cognitive theorists suggested that generalized anxiety disorder is
primarily caused by maladaptive assumptions, a notion that continues to be
influential. Albert Ellis, for example, proposed that many people are guided
by irrational beliefs that lead them to act and react in inappropriate ways.
Ellis called these basic irrational assumptions. Similarly, cognitive theorist
Aaron Beck argued that people with generalized anxiety disorder
constantly hold silent assumptions (for example, “A situation or a person is
unsafe until proven to be safe” or “It is always best to assume the worst”)
that imply they are in imminent danger.
However, new wave cognitive theories like the ‘metacognitive theory’,
developed by the researcher Adrian Wells (2005), suggests that people with
generalized anxiety disorder implicitly hold both positive and negative
beliefs about worrying. On the positive side, they believe that worrying is a
useful way of appraising and coping with threats in life. And so they look
for and examine all possible signs of danger—that is, they worry
constantly.
At the same time, Wells argues, individuals with generalized anxiety
disorder also hold negative beliefs about worrying, and these negative
attitudes are the ones that open the door to the disorder. Because society
teaches them that worrying is a bad thing, the individuals come to believe
that their repeated worrying is in fact harmful (mentally and physically)
and uncontrollable. Now they further worry about the fact that they always
seem to be worrying (so-called metaworries). The net effect of all this
worrying: generalized anxiety disorder. This explanation has received
considerable research support.
Another explanation is the ‘intolerance of uncertainty’ theory, certain
individuals believe that any possibility of a negative event occurring, no
matter how slim, means that the event is likely to occur. Given this
intolerance of uncertainty, such persons are inclined to worry and are, in
turn, more prone to develop generalized anxiety disorder. Like the
metacognitive theory of worry, considerable research supports this theory.
Finally, a third new explanation for generalized anxiety disorder, the
avoidance theory, developed by researcher Thomas Borkovec, suggests
that people with this disorder have greater bodily arousal (higher heart rate,
perspiration, respiration) than other people and that worrying actually
serves to reduce this arousal, perhaps by distracting the individuals from
their unpleasant somatic feelings. In short, the avoidance theory holds that
people with generalized anxiety disorder worry repeatedly in order to
reduce or avoid uncomfortable states of bodily arousal. Borkovec’s
explanation has also been supported in numerous studies.
Biological perspective:
This perspective is primarily supported by family pedigree studies, in
which researchers determine how many and which relatives of a person
146
with a disorder have the same disorder. If biological tendencies toward Anxiety Disorders
generalized anxiety disorder are inherited, people who are biologically NOTES
related should have similar probabilities of developing this disorder.
Studies have in fact found that biological relatives of persons with
generalized anxiety disorder are more likely than nonrelatives to have the
disorder also. Approximately 15 percent of the relatives of people with the
disorder display it themselves—much more than the 6 percent lifetime
prevalence rate found in the general population. And the closer the relative
(an identical twin, for example, as opposed to a fraternal twin or other
sibling), the greater the likelihood that he or she will also have the disorder.
Of course, investigators cannot have full confidence in biological
interpretations of such findings. Because relatives are likely to share
aspects of the same environment, their shared disorders may reflect
similarities in environment and upbringing rather than similarities in
biological makeup. And, indeed, the closer the relatives, the more similar
their environmental experiences are likely to be.
GABA INACTIVITY: Investigators discovered that benzodiazepine
receptors ordinarily receive gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), a common
and important neurotransmitter in the brain. GABA carries inhibitory
messages: when GABA is received at a receptor, it causes the neuron to
stop firing. On the basis of such findings, biological researchers eventually
pieced together several scenarios of how fear reactions may occur. One of
the leading scenarios began with the notion that in normal fear reactions,
key neurons throughout the brain fire more rapidly, triggering the firing of
still more neurons and creating a general state of excitability throughout the
brain and body. Perspiration, breathing, and muscle tension increase. This
state is experienced as fear or anxiety. Continuous firing of neurons
eventually triggers a feedback system—that is, brain and body activities
that reduce the level of excitability. Some neurons throughout the brain
release the neurotransmitter GABA, which then binds to GABA receptors
on certain neurons and instructs those neurons to stop firing. The state of
excitability ceases, and the experience of fear or anxiety subsides. Some
researchers concluded that a malfunction in this feedback system can cause
fear or anxiety to go unchecked. In fact, when investigators reduced
GABA’s ability to bind to GABA receptors, they found that animal
subjects reacted with a rise in anxiety. This finding suggested that people
with generalized anxiety disorder may have ongoing problems in their
anxiety feedback system. Perhaps they have too few GABA receptors, or
perhaps their GABA receptors do not readily capture the neurotransmitter.
However, there are some issues with this finding. The first problem is that
recent biological discoveries have complicated the picture. It has been
found, for example, that other neurotransmitters, such as serotonin and
norepinephrine, may also play important roles in anxiety and generalized
anxiety disorder, acting alone or in conjunction with GABA. The second
problem is that some of this research on the biology of anxiety has been
done on laboratory animals. Finally, biological theorists are faced with the
problem of establishing a causal relationship. The biological responses of
anxious persons may be the result, rather than the cause, of their anxiety
disorders.
147
Anxiety Disorders
11.11.3 TREATMENT
NOTES Psychodynamic therapies:
Psychodynamic therapists use the same general techniques to treat all
psychological problems: free association and the therapist’s interpretations
of transference, resistance, and dreams. Freudian psychodynamic therapists
use these methods to help clients with generalized anxiety disorder become
less afraid of their id impulses and more successful in controlling them.
Other psychodynamic therapists particularly object relations therapists, use
them to help anxious patients identify and settle the childhood relationship
problems that continue to produce anxiety in adulthood. Controlled studies
have typically found psychodynamic treatments to be of only modest help
to persons with generalized anxiety disorder. An exception to this trend is
short-term psychodynamic therapy, which has in some cases significantly
reduced the levels of anxiety, worry, and social difficulty of patients with
this disorder.
Humanistic approach:
Practitioners of Rogers’s treatment approach, client-centered therapy, try to
show unconditional positive regard for their clients and to empathize with
them. The therapists hope that an atmosphere of genuine acceptance and
caring will help clients feel secure enough to recognize their true needs,
thoughts, and emotions. When clients eventually are honest and
comfortable with themselves, their anxiety or other symptoms will subside.
Cognitive therapies:
CHANGING MALADAPTIVE ASSUMPTIONS: In Ellis’s technique of
rational-emotive therapy, therapists point out the irrational assumptions
held by clients, suggest more appropriate assumptions, and assign
homework that gives the individuals practice at challenging old
assumptions and applying new ones. Studies do suggest that this approach
and similar cognitive approaches bring at least modest relief to persons
suffering from generalized anxiety. Beck’s similar but more systematic
approach, called, simply, cognitive therapy, is an adaptation of his
influential and very effective treatment for depression. Researchers have
found that, like Ellis’s rational emotion therapy, it often helps reduce
generalized anxiety to more tolerable levels.
FOCUSING ON WORRYING: Alternatively, some of today’s new-wave
cognitive therapists specifically guide clients with generalized anxiety
disorder to recognize and change their dysfunctional use of worrying. They
begin by educating the clients about the role of worrying in their disorder
and have them observe their bodily arousal and cognitive responses across
various life situations. In turn, the clients come to appreciate the triggers of
their worrying, their misconceptions about worrying, and their misguided
efforts to control and predict their emotions and their lives by worrying. As
their insights grow, clients are expected to see the world as less threatening
(and so less arousing), try out and adopt more constructive ways of dealing
with arousal, and worry less about the fact that they worry so much.
The approach, mindfulness-based cognitive therapy (very similar to the
previous approach) was developed by the psychologist Steven Hayes and
his colleagues. Therapists help clients to become aware of their streams of
thoughts, including their worries, as they are occurring and to accept such
thinking as mere events of the mind. By accepting their thoughts rather
than trying to eliminate them, the clients are expected to be less upset and
affected by them. Mindfulness-based cognitive therapy has also been
148
applied to a range of other psychological problems such as depression, Anxiety Disorders
posttraumatic stress disorder, personality disorders, and substance abuse, NOTES

often with promising results.
Biological treatments:
ANTI-ANXIETY DRUG THERAPY: Studies indicate that
benzodiazepines often provide temporary relief for people with generalized
anxiety disorder. However, clinicians have come to realize the potential
dangers of these drugs. First, when the medications are stopped, many
persons’ anxieties return as strong as ever. Second, we now know that
people who take benzodiazepines in large doses for an extended time can
become physically dependent on them. Third, the drugs can produce
undesirable effects such as drowsiness, lack of coordination, memory loss,
depression, and aggressive behavior. Finally, the drugs mix badly with
certain other drugs or substances.
In recent decades, still other kinds of drugs have become available for
people with generalized anxiety disorder. In particular, it has been
discovered that a number of antidepressant medications, drugs that are
usually used to lift the moods of depressed persons, are also helpful to
many people with generalized anxiety disorder. Only certain kinds of
antidepressant drugs seem to reduce the symptoms of generalized anxiety
disorder—namely, those that operate by increasing the activity of the
neurotransmitter serotonin. Like GABA, serotonin is a neurotransmitter
that carries messages between neurons. However, serotonin acts at different
neurons and brain areas than GABA.
RELAXATION TRAINING: A nonchemical biological technique
commonly used to treat generalized anxiety disorder is relaxation training.
The notion behind this approach is that physical relaxation will lead to a
state of psychological relaxation. In one version, therapists teach clients to
identify individual muscle groups, tense them, release the tension, and
ultimately relax the whole body. With continued practice, they can bring on
a state of deep muscle relaxation at will, reducing their state of anxiety.
Research indicates that relaxation training is more effective than no
treatment or placebo treatment in cases of generalized anxiety disorder.
The improvement it produces, however, tends to be modest (Leahy, 2004;
Butler et al., 1991), and other techniques that are known to relax people,
such as meditation, often seem to be equally effective.
BIOFEEDBACK: In biofeedback, therapists use electrical signals from the
body to train people to control physiological processes such as heart rate or
muscle tension. Clients are connected to a monitor that gives them
continuous information about their bodily activities. By attending to the
therapist’s instructions and the signals from the monitor, they may
gradually learn to control even seemingly involuntary physiological
processes. The most widely applied method of biofeedback for the
treatment of anxiety uses a device called an electromyograph (EMG),
which provides feedback about the level of muscular tension in the body.
Electrodes are attached to the client’s muscles—usually the forehead
muscles—where they detect the minute electrical activity that accompanies
muscle tension. The device then converts electric potentials coming from
the muscles into an image, such as lines on a screen, or into a tone whose
pitch changes along with changes in muscle tension. Thus clients “see” or
“hear” when their muscles are becoming more or less tense. Through
repeated trial and error, the individuals become skilled at voluntarily
149
Anxiety Disorders
reducing muscle tension and, theoretically, at reducing tension and anxiety
NOTES in everyday stressful situations. Research finds that, in most cases, EMG
biofeedback, like relaxation training, has only a modest effect on a person’s
anxiety level.
Check your progress-1

1. What are some of the biological treatment methods used on
those with GAD?
11.12 Panic Disorder With And Without Agoraphobia
Sometimes an anxiety reaction takes the form of a smothering, nightmarish
panic in which people lose control of their behavior and, in fact, are
practically unaware of what they are doing. Anyone can react with panic
when a real threat looms up. Some people, however, experience panic
attacks—periodic, short bouts of panic that occur suddenly, reach a peak
within 10 minutes, and gradually pass. Lots of people are capable of
experiencing a panic attack when faced with something they dread. Indeed,
more than one-quarter of all individuals have one or more panic attacks at
some point in their lives. Some people, however, have panic attacks
repeatedly and unexpectedly without apparent reason. They may be
suffering from ‘panic disorder’.
11.12.1 CLINICAL DESCRIPTION
According to the DSM-5 criteria for panic disorder, the person must have
experienced recurrent, unexpected attacks and must have been persistently
worried about having another attack for at least a month (anticipatory
anxiety). For such an event to qualify as a full blown panic attack, there
must be abrupt onset of at least 4 of 13 symptoms, most of which are
physical, although three are cognitive: (1) depersonalization (a feeling of
being detached from one’s body) or derealization (a feeling that the
external world is unreal); (2) fear of dying; (3) fear of “going crazy” or
“losing control”. Panic attacks are fairly brief but intense, with symptoms
developing abruptly and usually reaching peak intensity within 10 minutes’
the attacks subside in 20-30 minutes and rarely last more than an hour.
These attacks are often “uncued” in the sense that they do not appear to be
provoked by identifiable aspects of the immediate situation. They may also
occur during sleep (known as ‘nocturnal panic’). However, they may also
be situationally predisposed.
Since most symptoms of a panic attack are physical, it is not surprising that
as many as 85% of people having a panic attack may show up repeatedly in
emergency rooms for what they are convinced as some cardiac, respiratory
or neurological issue.
Panic disorder is often accompanied by agoraphobia (from the Greek word

for “fear of the marketplace”) and some cases it may not be present. These
people are afraid to leave the house and travel to public places or other
locations where escape might be difficult or help unavailable should panic
symptoms develop. The intensity of agoraphobia may fluctuate. In severe
cases, people become virtual prisoners in their own homes. Their social life
Self-Instructional Material dwindles, and they cannot hold a job.
150
Anxiety Disorders
11.12.2 CAUSES NOTES

Biological perspective:
Several studies produced evidence that norepinephrine activity is irregular
in people who suffer from panic attacks. For example, the ‘locus
coeruleus’, an area in the midbrain, is rich in neurons that use
norepinephrine. When this area is electrically stimulated in monkeys, the
monkeys have a panic-like reaction, suggesting that panic reactions may be
related to increases in norepinephrine activity in the locus coeruleus. A
possible reason for this malfunction could be one’s genetic predisposition.
However, research conducted in recent years indicates that the root of

panic attacks is probably more complicated than a single neurotransmitter
or single brain area. Researchers have determined that emotional reactions
of various kinds are tied to brain circuits—networks of brain structures that
work together, triggering each other into action and producing a particular
kind of emotional reaction. It turns out that the circuit that produces panic
reactions includes brain areas such as the amygdala, ventromedial nucleus
of the hypothalamus, central gray matter, and locus coeruleus.
While most of today’s researchers agree that this brain circuit probably
functions improperly in people who experience panic disorder, they
disagree as to where in the circuit the problem lies. Many researchers
continue to believe that the locus coeruleus and the neurotransmitter
norepinephrine are the key culprits. However, other investigators argue that
dysfunctioning by other brain structures or neurotransmitters in the circuit
are primarily responsible for panic disorder.
Cognitive theorists believe that panic-prone people may be very sensitive

to certain bodily sensations; when they unexpectedly experience such
sensations, they misinterpret them as signs of a medical catastrophe. The
panic-prone grow increasingly upset about losing control, fear the worst,
lose all perspective, and rapidly plunge into panic. For example, many
people with panic disorder seem to “over breathe,” or hyperventilate, in
stressful situations. The abnormal breathing makes them think that they are
in danger of suffocation, so they panic. Such individuals further develop
the belief that these and other “dangerous” sensations may return at any
time and so set themselves up for future panic attacks.
In ‘biological challenge tests’, researchers produce hyperventilation or
other biological sensations by administering drugs or by instructing clinical
research participants to breathe, exercise, or simply think in certain ways.
Those with panic disorder seem to be more prone to misinterpretation. One
possibility is that panic-prone individuals generally experience, through no
fault of their own, more frequent or more intense bodily sensations than
other people do. Still other clinical theorists suggest that people are more
prone to misinterpret bodily sensations (and, in turn, to experience panic
attacks) if they have poor coping skills or lack social support. Perhaps their
childhoods were filled with unpredictable events, lack of control, chronic
illnesses in the family, or parental overreactions to their children’s bodily
symptoms.
151
Anxiety Disorders
11.12.3 TREATMENT
NOTES Drug therapies:
It appears that any antidepressant drugs that restore proper activity of
norepinephrine in the locus coeruleus and other parts of the panic brain
circuit are able to help prevent or alleviate the symptoms of panic disorder.
Such drugs bring at least some improvement to 80 percent of patients who
have panic disorder. Approximately half recover markedly or fully, and the
improvements can last indefinitely, as long as the drugs are continued. In
recent years, alprazolam (Xanax) and other powerful benzodiazepine drugs
have also proved very effective. Apparently, the benzodiazepines help
people with panic disorder by indirectly reducing the activity of
norepinephrine throughout the brain. Clinicians have also found these
antidepressant drugs or powerful benzodiazepines to be helpful in most
cases of panic disorder with agoraphobia. Some people with this disorder,
however, need a combination of medication and behavioral exposure
treatment to overcome their agoraphobic fears fully.
Cognitive therapy:
Cognitive therapists try to correct people’s misinterpretations of their body
sensations. The first step is to educate clients about the general nature of
panic attacks, the actual causes of bodily sensations, and the tendency of
clients to misinterpret their sensations. The next step is to teach clients to
apply more accurate interpretations during stressful situations, thus short-
circuiting the panic sequence at an early point. Therapists may also teach
clients to cope better with anxiety—for example, by applying relaxation
and breathing techniques—and to distract themselves from their sensations.
Cognitive therapists may also use biological challenge procedures (called

interoceptive exposure when applied in therapy) to induce panic sensations,
so that clients can apply their new skills under watchful supervision.
Cognitive therapy has proved to be at least as helpful as antidepressant
drugs or alprazolam in the treatment of panic disorder, sometimes even
more so. In view of the effectiveness of both cognitive and drug treatments,
many clinicians have tried combining them. It is not yet clear, however,
whether this strategy is more effective than cognitive therapy alone.

2. Name a few drugs used to treat panic disorder.

A specific phobia is a persistent fear of a specific object or situation. When
sufferers are exposed to the object or situation, they typically experience
immediate fear. Common specific phobias are intense fears of specific
animals or insects, heights, enclosed spaces, thunderstorms, and blood.
More than 12 percent of individuals develop such phobias at some point
during their lives, and many people have more than one at a time. Women
with the disorder outnumber men by at least 2 to 1. The impact of a
specific phobia on a person’s life depends on what arouses the fear. People
whose phobias center on dogs, insects, or water will keep encountering the
Self-Instructional Material objects they dread. Their efforts to avoid them must be elaborate and may
152
greatly restrict their activities. The vast majority of people with a specific Anxiety Disorders
phobia do not seek treatment. They try instead to avoid the objects they NOTES
fear.

According to DSM-5 a person is diagnosed as having a specific phobia if
she/he shows strong and persistent fear that is triggered by the presence of
a specific object or situation. When individuals with specific phobias
encounter a phobic stimulus, they often show an immediate fear response
that often resembles a panic attack except for the presence of a clear
external trigger. They also experience anxiety when they anticipate an
encounter with the phobic object. They often even avoid seemingly
innocent representations of it such as photographs or television images.
Generally, people with specific phobias recognize that their fear is
somewhat excessive or unreasonable although occasionally they may not
have this insight.
Avoidance is a cardinal characteristic of phobias; it occurs both because the

phobic response itself is so unpleasant and because of the phobic person’s
irrational appraisal of the likelihood that something terrible will happen. If
people who suffer from phobias attempt to approach their phobic situation,
they are overcome with fear or anxiety, which may vary from mild feelings
of apprehension and distress to full-fledged activation of the fight-flight
response.
One category of specific phobias that has a number of interesting and

unique characteristics is ‘blood-injection-injury phobia’. People with this
phobia show a unique physiological response when confronted with the
sight of blood or injury. This includes initial acceleration, followed by
dramatic drop in both heart rate and blood pressure which is frequently
accompanied by nausea, dizziness or fainting. This pattern is not found in
other phobic reactions.
11.13.2 Causes
Psychological factors:
According to the psychodynamic viewpoint, phobias represent a defense
against anxiety that stems from repressed impulses from the id. Because it
is dangerous to “know” the repressed id impulse, the anxiety is displaced
onto some external object or situation that has a symbolic relationship to
the real object.
Later, Wolpe and Rachman developed the learning theory explanation in

which they said that the principles of classical conditioning appeared to
account for the acquisition of irrational fears and phobias. However, direct
traumatic conditions were not the only way that people acquired irrational,
phobic fears. Simply watching a phobic person behave fearfully with
his/her phobic object can facilitate learning. In one experiment, rhesus
monkeys that were laboratory-reared showed fear of snakes simply through
observing a wild-reared monkey behave fearfully with snakes. This fear
was acquired only after 4-8 minutes of exposure and there were no signs
that the fear diminished 3 months later. This suggests that mass media may
also pay a role in vicarious conditioning of fears and phobias.
153
Anxiety Disorders
NOTES Individual factors:

Differences in life experiences of individuals strongly affect whether or not
conditioned fears or phobias actually develop. For example, children who
have more positive experiences with a dog are less likely to develop dental
anxiety after a bad and painful experience with the dentist. This shows the
importance of the individual’s prior familiarity with an object or situation
in determining whether a phobia develops. Events that occur during a
conditioning experience, as well as before it is also important in
determining the level of fear that is conditioned. For example, if the event
is seen as uncontrollable or inescapable, such as being attacked by a dog
that one cannot escape from after being bitten, is more powerful than
something that is seen as escapable or to some extent controllable. For
example, the ‘inflation effect’ suggests that a person who acquired a mild
fear of driving following a minor crash might be expected to develop a full-
blown phobia if he/she were later physically assaulted, even though no
automobile was present during the assault.
It has also been shown that our cognitions or thoughts can maintain our
phobias once they have been acquired. People with phobias are constantly
on the alert for their phobic objects or situations and for other stimuli
relevant to their phobia. This cognitive bias may maintain and strengthen
their fears with the passage of time.
Evolutionary explanation:
Primates and humans seem to be evolutionarily prepared to associate
certain objects like snakes, spiders and enclosed spaces with frightening or
unpleasant events. This is called ‘prepared learning’- one explanation for
the existence of phobias. According to this theory, these fears are not
innate or inborn but are rather resistant to extinction. Researchers also say
that this “preparedness” gave a certain selective advantage to our ancestors.
Biological factors:
Genetic and temperamental variables affect the speed and strength of
conditioning of fear. For example, Lonsdorf and colleague found that
individuals who are carriers of one or two variants on the serotonin
transporter gene (the s allele, which has been linked to heightened
neuroticism) show superior conditioning relative to individuals who do not
carry the s allele. However, those with one of two variants of the COMT
met/met genotype did not show superior conditioning but did show
enhanced resistance to extinction. In terms of temperament, those with the
behaviorally inhibited temperament, especially at 21 months of age were at
higher risk for developing multiple specific phobias by 7 or 8.
11.13.3 Treatment
A form of behavior therapy called ‘exposure therapy’ which involves
controlled exposure to the stimuli or situations that elicit phobic fear is the
best treatment for specific phobias. In this therapy, clients are symbolically
or increasingly placed under “real-life” conditions in the situations that
they find most frightening. One variant of this procedure is also called
‘participant modelling’ in which the therapist calmly models ways of
interacting with phobic stimulus or situations. For certain phobias such as
154
small-animal phobias, flying phobia, claustrophobia, and blood-injury Anxiety Disorders
phobia, exposure therapy is often highly effective when administered in a NOTES

single long session. Recently, therapists have also started using virtual
reality as means of phobia extinction.
In terms of cognitive techniques, studies have found that using these

techniques alone have not produced results as good as those using
exposure-based techniques. Similarly, medication treatments are
ineffective by themselves, anti-anxiety medications may interfere with the
effects of exposure therapy. Recently however, studies have shown that a
drug called ‘d-cycloserine’, which is known to facilitate extinction of
conditioned fear in animals may enhance the effects of exposure therapy.
This drug, however, by itself, has no effect.
3. What is ‘blood-injection-injury’ phobia?

The diagnosis for PTSD entered the DSM in 1980. At this time,
psychiatrists began to realize that many veterans were scarred emotionally
and were unable to return to normal civilian life after their military service
in Vietnam. Initially, PTSD was viewed as a normal response to an
abnormal stressor. But overtime the definitions have changed.
In PTSD a traumatic event is thought to cause a ‘pathological memory’ that
is the central characteristic. These memories are often fragments of
experience and often concerned with events that happened just before the
major emotional impact. The symptoms of PTSD fall into 4 categories-
1. Intrusion- Recurrent re-experiencing of the traumatic event through
nightmares, intrusive images, and physiological reactivity to
reminders of the trauma.
2. Avoidance- Avoidance of thoughts, feelings or reminders of the
trauma.
3. Negative cognitions and mood- This includes feelings of
detachment and negative emotional states such as shame and
anger, or distorted blame of oneself or others.
4. Arousal and reactivity- Hypervigilance, excessive response when
startled, aggression, and reckless behavior.
The difference in prevalence of PTSD in men and women is
interesting as men are much more likely to be exposed to traumatic
events. This sex difference reflects the fact that women are more
likely to be exposed to certain kinds of traumatic events, such as
rape, that may be more inherently traumatic. However, rates of
PTSD vary based on the severity of the trauma.
11.14.2 Causes
Biological factors:
Investigators have learned that traumatic events trigger physical changes in
the brain and body that may lead to severe stress reactions and, in some
cases, to stress disorders. They have, for example, found abnormal activity Self-Instructional Material
155
Anxiety Disorders
of the hormone cortisol and the neurotransmitter/hormone norepinephrine
NOTES in the urine, blood, and saliva of combat soldiers, rape victims,
concentration camp survivors, and survivors of other severe stresses.
Two areas in the brain in particular seem to be affected—the hippocampus

and the amygdala. Clearly, a dysfunctional hippocampus may help produce
the intrusive memories and ongoing arousal that characterize posttraumatic
stress disorder. The excessive arousal generated by extraordinary traumatic
events may lead to stress disorders in some people, and the stress disorders
may produce yet further brain abnormalities, locking in the disorders all the
more firmly. It may also be that posttraumatic stress disorder leads to the
transmission of biochemical abnormalities to the children of persons with
the disorder. Many theorists believe that people whose biochemical
reactions to stress are unusually strong are more likely than others to
develop acute and posttraumatic stress disorders. More direct genetic
studies are currently under way to determine whether a particular gene or
combination of genes predisposes individuals to PTSD.
Individual risk factors:

When it comes to PTSD, there are two important things- risk for
experiencing trauma and risk for PTSD. Not everyone has equal risk when
it comes to the likelihood that he/she will experience a traumatic event.
Risk factors that increase the likelihood of being exposed to trauma include
being male, having less than a college education, having conduct problems
in childhood, having a family history of a psychiatric disorder, and scoring
high on measures of extraversion and neuroticism. As for females, the
chance of developing PTSD is higher. Other individual risk factors
identified by researchers include lower levels of social support,
neuroticism, having preexisting problem with depression and anxiety, as
well as having a family history of depression, anxiety and substance abuse.
Apart from that, if people believe that their symptoms are a sign of
weakness or if they believe that others will be ashamed of them for because
they are experiencing symptoms, they are at an increased risk for
developing PTSD.
Sociocultural factors:
Vulnerability to this disorder is related to factors such as a person’s coping
style, general attitudes, sense of control, childhood experiences, and social
support system, and these factors frequently vary from culture to culture.
However, the overall rate of PTSD has been surprisingly stable from group
to group. But now the wind is shifting. A more careful look at the research
literature suggests that there may indeed be important cultural differences
in the occurrence of posttraumatic stress disorder.
One case in point: Studies of combat veterans from the wars in Vietnam
and Iraq have found higher rates of posttraumatic stress disorder among
Hispanic American veterans than among white American and African
American veterans. Several explanations have been suggested for this. One
centers on the initial reactions of Hispanic Americans to traumatic events.
It appears that an early dissociative reaction (altered state of consciousness)
is one of the strongest predictors that an individual will go on to develop
PTSD. Another explanation holds that as part of their cultural belief
system, many Hispanic Americans tend to view traumatic events as
156
inevitable and unalterable, a coping response that may heighten their risk Anxiety Disorders
for posttraumatic stress disorder. And still another explanation suggests NOTES
that their culture’s emphasis on social relationships and social support may
place Hispanic American victims at special risk when traumatic events
deprive them—temporarily or permanently—of important relationships and
support systems.
11.14.3 Treatment
Therapists have used a variety of techniques to reduce veterans’
posttraumatic symptoms. Among the most common are drug therapy,
behavioral exposure techniques, insight therapy, family therapy, and group
therapy. Typically, the approaches are combined, as no one of them
successfully reduces all the symptoms. Antianxiety drugs help control the
tension that many veterans experience. In addition, antidepressant
medications may reduce the occurrence of nightmares, panic attacks,
flashbacks, and feelings of depression. Behavioral exposure techniques,
too, have helped reduce specific symptoms, and they have often led to
improvements in overall adjustment.
A widely applied form of exposure therapy is ‘eye movement

desensitization and reprocessing’ (EMDR), in which clients move their
eyes in a saccadic, or rhythmic, manner from side to side while flooding
their minds with images of the objects and situations they ordinarily try to
avoid. Case studies and controlled studies suggest that this treatment can
often be helpful to persons with posttraumatic stress disorder. Veterans
may also benefit from group therapy, often provided in a form called rap
groups, in which individuals meet with others like themselves to share
experiences and feelings, develop insights, and give mutual support.
Psychological debriefing is also used as an immediate treatment method. It

is actually a form of crisis intervention that has victims of trauma talk
extensively—a session typically lasts three to four hours—about their
feelings and reactions within days of the critical incident. Because such
sessions are expected to prevent or reduce stress reactions, they are
commonly applied to victims who have not yet manifested any symptoms
at all, as well as those who have. During the sessions, often conducted in a
group format, counselors guide the individuals to describe the details of the
recent trauma and the thoughts that had accompanied the unfolding event
vividly, to vent and relive the emotions provoked at the time of the event,
and to express their lingering reactions. The clinicians then clarify to the
victims that their reactions are perfectly normal responses to a terrible
event, offer stress management tips, and, when necessary, refer the victims
to professionals who can provide long-term counseling.
4. What are the 4 categories of symptoms in PTSD?
Obsessions are persistent thoughts, ideas, impulses, or images that seem to
invade a person’s consciousness. Compulsions are repetitive and rigid
behaviors or mental acts that people feel they must perform in order to Self-Instructional Material
157
Anxiety Disorders
prevent or reduce anxiety. People with OCD have occurrence of unwanted
NOTES and intrusive obsessive thoughts or distressing images. These are usually
accompanied by compulsive behaviors performed to undo or neutralize the
obsessive thoughts or images as a way of preventing some dreaded
situation or event.

According to DSM-V, a diagnosis of obsessive-compulsive disorder is
called for when obsessions or compulsions feel excessive or unreasonable,
cause great distress, take up much time, or interfere with daily functions.
The disorder is classified as an anxiety disorder because the obsessions
cause intense anxiety, while the compulsions are aimed at preventing or
reducing anxiety. In addition, anxiety rises if individuals try to resist their
obsessions or compulsions. These obsessive thoughts involve
contamination fears, fears of harming oneself or others, and pathological
doubt.Touching, verbal, and counting compulsions are also
common.Obsessions are thoughts that feel both intrusive (“ego dystonic”)
and foreign (“ego alien”) to the people who experience them. Attempts to
ignore or resist these thoughts may arouse even more anxiety, and before
long they come back more strongly than ever. OCD is often one of the
most disabling mental disorder that leads to lower quality of life and a great
deal of functional impairment. Between 1 and 2 percent of the people in the
United States and other countries throughout the world suffer from
obsessive-compulsive disorder in any given year. Between 2 and 3 percent
develop the disorder at some point during their lives. It is equally common
in men and women and among people of different races and ethnic groups.
The disorder usually begins by young adulthood and typically persists for
many years, although its symptoms and their severity may fluctuate over
time. It is estimated that more than 40 percent of people with obsessive-
compulsive disorder seek treatment.
11.15.2 Auses
Psychodynamic perspective:
According to psychodynamic theorists, three ego defense mechanisms are
particularly common in obsessive-compulsive disorder: isolation, undoing,
and reaction formation. People who resort to isolation simply disown their
unwanted thoughts and experience them as foreign intrusions. People who
engage in undoing perform acts that are meant to cancel out their
undesirable impulses. Those who wash their hands repeatedly, for example,
may be symbolically undoing their unacceptable id impulses. People who
develop a reaction formation take on a lifestyle that directly opposes their
unacceptable impulses. A person may live a life of compulsive kindness
and devotion to others in order to counter unacceptably aggressive
impulses. Sigmund Freud traced obsessive-compulsive disorder to the anal
stage of development (occurring at about 2 years of age). He proposed that
during this stage some children experience intense rage and shame as a
result of negative toilet-training experiences. Other psychodynamic
theorists have argued instead that such early rage reactions are rooted in
feelings of insecurity. Either way, these children repeatedly feel the need to
express their strong aggressive id impulses while at the same time knowing
they should try to restrain and control the impulses. If this conflict between
the id and ego continues, it may eventually blossom into obsessive-
158
compulsive disorder. Overall, research has not clearly supported the Anxiety Disorders
psychodynamic explanation. NOTES
Behavioral perspective:
Behaviorists have concentrated on explaining and treating compulsions
rather than obsessions. They propose that people happen upon their
compulsions quite randomly. In a fearful situation, they happen just
coincidentally to wash their hands, say, or dress a certain way. When the
threat lifts, they link the improvement to that particular action. After
repeated accidental associations, they believe that the action is bringing
them good luck or actually changing the situation, and so they perform the
same actions again and again in similar situations. The act becomes a key
method of avoiding or reducing anxiety.
Cognitive theorists begin their explanation of obsessive-compulsive
disorder by pointing out that everyone has repetitive, unwanted, and
intrusive thoughts. Anyone might have thoughts of harming others or being
contaminated by germs, for example, but most people dismiss or ignore
them with ease. Those who develop this disorder, however, typically blame
themselves for such thoughts and expect that somehow terrible things will
happen. To avoid such negative outcomes, they try to neutralize the
thoughts—thinking or behaving in ways meant to put matters right or to
make amends. Neutralizing acts might include requesting special
reassurance from others, deliberately thinking “good” thoughts, washing
one’s hands, or checking for possible sources of danger.
Researchers have also found that those who are likely to develop OCD tend
to be (1) to be more depressed than other people, (2) to have exceptionally
high standards of conduct and morality, (3) to believe that their intrusive
negative thoughts are equivalent to actions and capable of causing harm to
themselves or others, and (4) generally to believe that they should have
perfect control over all of their thoughts and behaviors.
Biological approach:
In recent years two lines of research have uncovered evidence that
biological factors play a key role in obsessive-compulsive disorder, and
promising biological treatments for the disorder have been developed as
well. The research points to (1) abnormally low activity of the
neurotransmitter serotonin and (2) abnormal functioning in key regions of
the brain.
ABNORMAL SEROTONIN ACTIVITY: Serotonin, like GABA and

norepinephrine, is a brain chemical that carries messages from neuron to
neuron. Some researchers concluded that the disorder is caused by low
serotonin activity. Although serotonin is the neurotransmitter most often
cited in explanations of obsessive-compulsive disorder, recent studies have
suggested that other neurotransmitters, particularly glutamate, GABA, and
dopamine, may also play important roles in the development of this
disorder (Lambert & Kinsley, 2005). Some researchers even argue that,
with regard to obsessive-compulsive disorder, serotonin may act largely as
159
Anxiety Disorders
a neuromodulator, a chemical whose primary function is to increase or
NOTES decrease the activity of other key neurotransmitters.
ABNORMAL BRAIN STRUCTURE AND FUNCTIONING: Another line

of research has linked obsessive-compulsive disorder to abnormal
functioning by specific regions of the brain, particularly the orbitofrontal
cortex (just above each eye) and the caudate nuclei (structures located
within the brain region known as the basal ganglia). These regions are part
of a brain circuit that converts sensory information into thoughts and
actions. The circuit begins in the orbitofrontal cortex, where sexual,
violent, and other primitive impulses normally arise. These impulses next
move on to the caudate nuclei, which act as filters that send only the most
powerful impulses on to the thalamus, the next stop on the circuit. If
impulses reach the thalamus, the person is driven to think further about
them and perhaps to act. Many theorists now believe that either the
orbitofrontal cortex or the caudate nuclei of some people are too active,
leading to a constant eruption of troublesome thoughts and actions.
Additional parts of this brain circuit have also been identified in recent
years, including the cingulate cortex and, once again, the amygdala. Of
course, it may turn out that these regions also play key roles in obsessive-
compulsive disorder.
11.15.3 Treatment
Psychodynamic approach:
When treating patients with obsessive-compulsive disorder,
psychodynamic therapists try to help the individuals uncover and overcome
their underlying conflicts and defenses, using the customary techniques of
free association and therapist interpretation. Research has offered little
evidence, however, that a traditional psychodynamic approach is of much
help.
Behavioral approach:
In a behavioral treatment called exposure and response prevention (or
exposure and ritual prevention), first developed by psychiatrist Victor
Meyer (1966), clients are repeatedly exposed to objects or situations that
produce anxiety, obsessive fears, and compulsive behaviors, but they are
told to resist performing the behaviors they feel so bound to perform.
Because people find it very difficult to resist such behaviors, therapists
may set an example first. Many behavioral therapists now use exposure and
response prevention in both individual and group therapy formats. Some of
them also have people carry out self-help procedures at home. Between 55
and 85 percent of clients with obsessive-compulsive disorder have been
found to improve considerably with exposure and response prevention,
improvements that often continue indefinitely.
Cognitive approach:
Cognitive therapists focus treatment on the cognitive processes that help
produce and maintain obsessive thoughts and compulsive acts. Initially,
they provide psychoeducation, teaching clients about their
misinterpretations of unwanted thoughts, excessive sense of responsibility,
and neutralizing acts. They then move on to help the clients identify,
challenge, and change their distorted cognitions. Many cognitive therapists
also include habituation training in their sessions, directing clients to call
forth their obsessive thoughts again and again. The clinicians expect that
with such repetitions, the obsessive thoughts will lose their power to
160
frighten or threaten the clients, and thus will produce less anxiety and Anxiety Disorders
trigger fewer new obsessive thoughts and compulsive acts. NOTES

In cognitive-behavioral treatments, clients are taught to view their
obsessive thoughts as inaccurate occurrences rather than as valid and
dangerous cognitions for which they are responsible and upon which they
must act. As they become better able to identify and understand such
thoughts—to recognize them for what they are—they also become less
inclined to act on them, more willing and able to subject themselves to the
rigors of exposure and response prevention, and more likely to make gains
in behavioral techniques (in the previous approach).
Biological therapies:
Two antidepressant drugs, clomipramine (Anafranil) and fluoxetine
(Prozac) are generally used in treatment. These drugs not only increase
brain serotonin activity but also help produce more normal activity in the
orbitofrontal cortex and caudate nuclei. Studies have found that
fluvoxamine (Luvox), and other similar antidepressant drugs also bring
improvement to between 50 and 80 percent of those with obsessive-
compulsive disorder.
Nowadays, more and more individuals with obsessive-compulsive disorder
are now being treated by a combination of behavioral, cognitive, and drug
therapies. According to research, such combinations often yield higher
levels of symptom reduction and bring relief to more clients than do each
of the approaches alone.
5. Define obsessions and compulsions.
11.16 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit, you have been introduced to the clinical picture, causes and
treatment of Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Panic disorder with or without
agoraphobia, Specific phobia, Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder and
Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder.
1. Describe generalized anxiety disorder in detail.
2. Describe panic disorder with and without agoraphobia in detail.
3. Write about specific phobias in detail.
4. Write about PTSD in detail.
5. Describe obsessive-compulsive disorder in detail.
1. Anti-anxiety drug therapy, relaxation training and biofeedback
2. Antidepressants, alprazolam (Xanax) and other powerful
benzodiazepines
3. People with this phobia show a unique physiological response when
confronted with the sight of blood or injury. This includes initial
acceleration, followed by dramatic drop in both heart rate and
blood pressure which is frequently accompanied by nausea,
dizziness or fainting. This pattern is not found in other phobic
reactions.
161
Anxiety Disorders
4. Intrusion, avoidance, negative cognitions and mood, arousal and
NOTES reactivity
5. Obsessions are persistent thoughts, ideas, impulses, or images that
seem to invade a person’s consciousness. Compulsions are
repetitive and rigid behaviors or mental acts that people feel they
must perform in order to prevent or reduce anxiety.
Pearson India Ltd.
of India Pvt. Ltd.
162
Mood Disorders
UNIT XII: MOOD DISORDERS NOTES
Structure
12.1 Introduction
12.2 Objectives
12.3 Mood Disorders
12.5 Causes
12.6 Treatment
12.7 Suicide
12.5 Risk Factors
12.6 Treatment
12.7 Let Us Sum Up
12.7 Introduction
Most of us feel depressed from time to time. However, mood disorders
involve much more severe alterations in mood for much longer periods of
time. In such cases, the disturbances of mood are intense and persistent
enough to be clearly maladaptive and often lead to serious problems in
relationships and work performance.
12.8 Objectives
After going through this unit, you will be able to
 Understand the meaning of mood disorders
 Enlist the various types and symptoms of mood disorders
 Understand treatment methods for mood disorders
 Know about suicide- it’s risk factors, prevention and treatment
12.9 Mood Disorders
People with mood disorders have mood problems that tend to last for
months or years, dominate their interactions with the world, and disrupt
their normal functioning. Depression and mania are the key moods in these
disorders. Most people with a mood disorder suffer only from depression, a
pattern called unipolar depression. They have no history of mania and
return to a normal or nearly normal mood when their depression lifts.
Others experience periods of mania that alternate with periods of
depression, a pattern called bipolar disorder.
Unipolar depression:
Around 17 percent of all adults experience an episode of severe unipolar
depression at some point in their lives. People of any age may suffer from
unipolar depression. In most countries, however, people in their forties are
more likely than those in any other age group to have the disorder. Women
are at least twice as likely as men to experience episodes of severe unipolar
depression.
The symptoms, which often exacerbate one another, span five areas of
functioning: emotional, motivational, behavioral, cognitive, and physical.
Emotional symptoms- Most people who are depressed feel sad and
dejected. They describe themselves as feeling “miserable,” “empty,” and
“humiliated.” They tend to lose their sense of humor, report getting little
pleasure from anything, and in some cases display anhedonia, an inability Self-Instructional Material
163
Mood Disorders to experience any pleasure at all. A number also experience anxiety, anger,
NOTES
or agitation. This sea of misery may lead to crying spells.
Motivational symptoms- Depressed people typically lose the desire to
pursue their usual activities. Almost all report a lack of drive, initiative, and
spontaneity. They may have to force themselves to go to work, talk with
friends, eat meals, or have sex. This state has been described as a “paralysis
of will”.
Behavioral symptoms- Depressed people are usually less active and less
productive. They spend more time alone and may stay in bed for long
periods.
Cognitive symptoms- Depressed people hold extremely negative views of
themselves. They consider themselves inadequate, undesirable, inferior,
perhaps evil. They also blame themselves for nearly every unfortunate
event, even things that have nothing to do with them, and they rarely credit
themselves for positive achievements.
Physical symptoms- People who are depressed frequently have such
physical ailments as headaches, indigestion, constipation, dizzy spells, and
general pain (Fishbain, 2000). In fact, many depressions are misdiagnosed
as medical problems at first. Disturbances in appetite and sleep are
particularly common.
There are two categories of mood disorders- depressive disorders and
bipolar disorders.
1. Name some of the cognitive symptoms in people with unipolar
depression.

People who experience a major depressive episode without having any
history of mania receive a diagnosis of ‘major depressive disorder’. The
disorder may be additionally categorized as recurrent if it has been
preceded by previous episodes; seasonal if it changes with the seasons (for
example, if the depression recurs each winter); catatonic if it is marked by
either immobility or excessive activity; postpartum if it occurs within four
weeks of giving birth; or melancholic if the person is almost totally
unaffected by pleasurable events (APA, 2000). It sometimes turns out that
an apparent case of major depressive disorder is, in fact, a depressive
episode occurring within a larger pattern of bipolar disorder—a pattern in
which the individual’s manic episode has not yet appeared. When the
person experiences a manic episode at a later time, the diagnosis is changed
to bipolar disorder.
People who display a longer-lasting (at least two years) but less disabling
pattern of unipolar depression may receive a diagnosis of dysthymic
disorder. When dysthymic disorder leads to major depressive disorder, the
sequence is called ‘double depression’.
2. What does the term ‘double depression’ indicate?
164
Mood Disorders
12.11 BIPOLAR DISORDER
People with a bipolar disorder experience both the lows of depression and NOTES
the highs of mania. Many describe their life as an emotional roller coaster,
as they shift back and forth between extreme moods. A number of sufferers
eventually become suicidal.
People with bipolar disorders generally go through manic episodes. Unlike
people sunk in the gloom of depression, those in a state of mania typically
experience dramatic and inappropriate rises in mood. The symptoms of
mania span the same areas of functioning—emotional, motivational,
behavioral, cognitive, and physical—as those of depression, but mania
affects those areas in an opposite way. A person in the throes of mania has
active, powerful emotions in search of an outlet. The mood of euphoric joy
and well-being is out of all proportion to the actual happenings in the
person’s life. In the motivational realm, people with mania seem to want
constant excitement, involvement, and companionship. They
enthusiastically seek out new friends and old, new interests and old, and
have little awareness that their social style is overwhelming, domineering,
and excessive. The behavior of people with mania is usually very active.
They move quickly, as though there were not enough time to do everything
they want to do. In the cognitive realm, people with mania usually show
poor judgment and planning, as if they feel too good or move too fast to
consider possible pitfalls. Filled with optimism, they rarely listen when
others try to slow them down, interrupt their buying sprees, or prevent
them from investing money unwisely. They may also hold an inflated
opinion of themselves, and sometimes their self-esteem approaches
grandiosity. During severe episodes of mania, some have trouble remaining
coherent or in touch with reality. Finally, in the physical realm, people with
mania feel remarkably energetic. They typically get little sleep yet feel and
act wide awake. Even if they miss a night or two of sleep, their energy
level may remain high.
DSM-V distinguishes two kinds of bipolar disorders—bipolar I and
bipolar II. People with bipolar I disorder have full manic and major
depressive episodes. Most of them experience an alternation of the
episodes; for example, weeks of mania followed by a period of wellness,
followed, in turn, by an episode of depression. Some people, however,
have mixed episodes, in which they swing from manic to depressive
symptoms and back again on the same day. In bipolar II disorder,
hypomanic—that is, mildly manic— episodes alternate with major
depressive episodes over the course of time. Some people with this pattern
accomplish huge amounts of work during their mild manic periods.
Surveys from around the world indicate that between 1 and 2.6 percent of
all adults suffer from a bipolar disorder at any given time (Merikangas et
al., 2007; Kessler et al., 2005). As many as 4 percent experience one of the
bipolar disorders over the course of their lives. Bipolar I disorder seems to
be a bit more common than bipolar II disorder (Rihmer& Angst, 2005;
Kessler et al., 1994). The disorders appear to be equally common in women
and men and among all socioeconomic classes and ethnic groups (Shastry,
2005; APA, 2000). However, women may experience more depressive
episodes and more rapid cycling than men.
When a person experiences numerous periods of hypomanic symptoms and
mild depressive symptoms, DSM-V assigns a diagnosis of ‘cyclothymic Self-Instructional Material
disorder’. The symptoms of this milder form of bipolar disorder continue
165
Mood Disorders for two or more years, interrupted occasionally by normal moods that may
NOTES
last for only days or weeks. This disorder, like bipolar I and bipolar II
disorders, usually begins in adolescence or early adulthood and is equally
common among women and men.
12.11 Causes
Psychodynamic theorists suggested that mania, like depression, emerges
from the loss of a love object. Whereas some people introject the lost
object and become depressed, others deny the loss and become manic. To
avoid the terrifying conflicts generated by the loss, they escape into a
dizzying round of activity (Lewin, 1950). Although case reports sometimes
fit this explanation (Krishnan et al., 1984; Cohen et al., 1954), only a few
controlled studies have found a relationship between loss early or later in
life and the onset of manic episodes.
The biological insights have come from research into neurotransmitter
activity, ion activity, brain structure, and genetic factors.
Neurotransmitter activity:
Studies have found a relationship between low norepinephrine activity and
unipolar depression. In another study patients with a bipolar disorder were
given ‘reserpine’, the blood pressure drug known to reduce norepinephrine
activity in the brain, and the manic symptoms of some subsided. Low
activity of serotonin, acting again as a neuromodulator, opens the door to a
mood disorder and permits the activity of norepinephrine (or perhaps other
neurotransmitters) to define the particular form the disorder will take. That
is, low serotonin activity accompanied by low norepinephrine activity may
lead to depression; low serotonin activity accompanied by high
norepinephrine activity may lead to mania.
Ion activity:
Positively charged sodium ions (Na+) sit on both sides of a neuron’s cell
membrane. When the neuron is at rest, more sodium ions sit outside the
membrane. When the neuron receives an incoming message at its receptor
sites, pores in the cell membrane open, allowing the sodium ions to flow to
the inside of the membrane, thus increasing the positive charge inside the
neuron. This starts a wave of electrical activity that travels down the length
of the neuron and results in its “firing.” After the neuron “fires,” potassium
ions (K+) flow from the inside of the neuron across the cell membrane to
the outside, helping to return the neuron to its original resting state. If
messages are to be relayed effectively down the axon, the ions must be able
to travel easily between the outside and the inside of the neural membrane.
Some theorists believe that irregularities in the transport of these ions may
cause neurons to fire too easily (resulting in mania) or to stubbornly resist
firing (resulting in depression).
Brain structure:
The basal ganglia and cerebellum of these individuals tend to be smaller
than those of other people. In addition, their dorsal raphe nucleus, striatum,
amygdala, and prefrontal cortex have some structural abnormalities. It is
not clear what role such structural abnormalities play in bipolar disorders.
the structural problems may simply be the result of the neurotransmitter or
ion abnormalities or of the medications that many patients with bipolar
disorders now take.
166
Mood Disorders
Genetic factors:
Many theorists believe that people inherit a biological predisposition to NOTES
develop bipolar disorders. Family pedigree studies support this idea.
Researchers have also conducted genetic linkage studies to identify
possible patterns in the inheritance of bipolar disorders. After studying the
records of Israeli, Belgian, and Italian families that had shown high rates of
bipolar disorders across several generations, one team of researchers
seemed to have linked bipolar disorders to genes on the X chromosome.
Other research teams, however, later used techniques from molecular
biology to examine genetic patterns in large families, and they linked
bipolar disorders to genes on chromosomes 1, 4, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 18,
21, and 22 (Maier et al., 2005; Baron, 2002).
4. What is the difference between mania and depression with respect to
neurotransmitters?
12.12 Treatment
Treatments for unipolar depression:
Believing that unipolar depression results from unconscious grief over real
or imagined losses, compounded by excessive dependence on other people,
psychodynamic therapists seek to help clients bring these underlying issues
to consciousness and work them through. In a typical behavioral approach,
therapists (1) reintroduce depressed clients to pleasurable events and
activities, (2) appropriately reinforce their depressive and nondepressive
behaviors, and (3) help them improve their social skills. While
reintroducing pleasurable events into a client’s life, the therapist makes
sure that the person’s various behaviors are rewarded correctly.
Behaviorists argue that when people become depressed, their negative
behaviors—crying, ruminating, complaining, or self-depreciation—keep
others at a distance, reducing chances for rewarding experiences and
interactions. To change this pattern, therapists guide clients to monitor their
negative behaviors and to try new, more positive ones (Farmer &
Chapman, 2008; Addis & Martell, 2004). In addition, the therapist may use
a contingency management approach, systematically ignoring a client’s
depressive behaviors while praising or otherwise rewarding constructive
statements and behavior, such as going to work. Sometimes family
members and friends are recruited to help with this feature of treatment.
The cognitive approach follows four phases and usually requires fewer
than 20 sessions. These steps are-
1) Increasing activities and elevating mood
2) Challenging automatic thoughts- The individuals are instructed to
recognize and record automatic thoughts as they occur and to bring
their lists to each session. Therapist and client then test the reality
behind the thoughts, often concluding that they are groundless.
3) Identifying negative thinking and biases
4) Changing primary attitudes
Therapists who use family and social approaches to treat depression help
clients change how they deal with the close relationships in their lives. The
most effective family-social approaches are interpersonal psychotherapy Self-Instructional Material
167
Mood Disorders and couple therapy. Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT) is a treatment for
NOTES
unipolar depression that is based on the belief that clarifying and changing
one’s interpersonal problems will help lead to recovery. Couple therapy is
a therapy format in which the therapist works with two people who share a
long-term relationship.
Biological approaches include electroconvulsive therapy, or ECT.
Clinicians and patients alike vary greatly in their opinions of ECT. Some
consider it a safe biological procedure with minimal risks; others believe it
to be an extreme measure that can cause troublesome memory loss and
even neurological damage. Despite the heat of this controversy, ECT is
used frequently, largely because it is an effective and fast-acting
intervention for unipolar depression.
Antidepressants mainly of the MAO inhibitors (mono amine oxidase
inhibitors), SSRI (selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors) and tricyclic
category are also used. MAO category includes drugs like iproniazid (a
drug being tested on patients with tuberculosis, had an interesting effect: it
seemed to make the patients happier). There is, however, a potential danger
with regard to these drugs. People who take them experience a dangerous
rise in blood pressure if they eat foods containing the chemical tyramine,
including such common foods as cheeses, bananas, and certain wines. Thus
people on MAO inhibitors must stick to a rigid diet. In recent years, a new
MAO inhibitor has become available in the form of a skin patch that allows
for slow, continuous absorption of the drug into the client’s body. As for
SSRI’s, fluoxetine (trade name Prozac), sertraline (Zoloft), and
escitalopram (Lexapro). Newly developed selective norepinephrine
reuptake inhibitors, such as atomoxetine (Strattera), which increase
norepinephrine activity only, and serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake
inhibitors, such as venlafaxine (Effexor), which increase both serotonin and
norepinephrine activity, are also now available.
Other invasive techniques include-
1) Vagus nerve stimulation- A treatment procedure for depression in
which an implanted pulse generator sends regular electrical signals
to a person’s vagus nerve; the nerve, in turn, stimulates the brain.
2) Transcranial magnetic stimulation- A treatment procedure for
depression in which an electromagnetic coil, which is placed on or
above a person’s head, sends a current into the individual’s brain.
3) Deep brain stimulation- A treatment procedure for depression in
which a pacemaker powers electrodes that have been implanted in
Brodmann Area 25, thus stimulating that brain area.
Treatments for bipolar disorders:
Lithium and other mood stabilizers:
In 1949 an Australian psychiatrist, John Cade, hypothesized that manic
behavior is caused by a toxic level of uric acid in the body. He set out to
test this theory by injecting guinea pigs with uric acid, but first he
combined it with lithium to increase its solubility. To Cade’s surprise, the
guinea pigs became not manic but quite lethargic after their injections.
Cade suspected that the lithium had produced this effect. When he later
administered lithium to 10 human beings who had mania, he discovered
that it calmed and normalized their mood. Many countries began using
lithium for bipolar disorders soon after, but, it was not until 1970 that the
FDA approved it. Determining the correct lithium dosage for a given
patient is a delicate process requiring regular analyses of blood and urine
168
Mood Disorders
samples and other laboratory tests. Too low a dose will have little or no
effect on the bipolar mood swings, but too high a dose can result in lithium NOTES
intoxication, which can cause nausea, vomiting, sluggishness, tremors,
dizziness, slurred speech, seizures, kidney dysfunction, and even death.
Some patients respond better to the other mood stabilizing drugs, such as
the anti-seizure drugs carbamazepine or valproate, or to a combination of
such drugs. The mood stabilizers also help those with bipolar disorder
overcome their depressive episodes, though to a lesser degree than they
help with their manic episodes. However, researchers do not fully
understand how mood stabilizing drugs operate. They suspect that the
drugs change synaptic activity in neurons, but in a way different from that
of antidepressant drugs. Antidepressant drugs affect a neuron’s initial
reception of neurotransmitters whereas, mood stabilizers appear to affect a
neuron’s second messengers. In one of the most important systems,
chemicals called ‘phosphoinositides’ are produced once neurotransmitters
are received. Research suggests that lithium, and perhaps the other mood
stabilizers as well, affect this particular messenger system. Alternatively, it
may also be that the mood stabilizers correct bipolar functioning by
directly changing sodium and potassium ion activity in neurons.
Adjunctive psychotherapy:
Psychotherapy alone is rarely helpful for persons with bipolar disorders. At
the same time, clinicians have learned that mood stabilizing drugs alone are
not always sufficient either. A number of patients stop taking mood
stabilizers on their own because they are bothered by the drugs’ unwanted
effects, feel too well to recognize the need for the drugs, miss the euphoria
felt during manic episodes, or worry about becoming less productive when
they take the drugs.
In view of these problems, many clinicians now use individual, group, or
family therapy as an adjunct to mood stabilizing drugs. Few controlled
studies have tested the effectiveness of such adjunctive therapy, but those
that have been done, along with numerous clinical reports, suggest that it
helps reduce hospitalization, improves social functioning, and increases
patients’ ability to obtain and hold a job.
5. What are some of the invasive techniques used to treat unipolar
depression?
12.13 Suicide
Today suicide is one of the leading causes of death in the world. Millions
of other people throughout the world make unsuccessful attempts to kill
themselves; such attempts are called “parasuicides”. Actually, it is difficult
to obtain accurate figures on suicide, and many investigators believe that
estimates are often low. For one thing, suicide can be difficult to
distinguish from unintentional drug overdoses, automobile crashes,
drownings, and other accidents. Many apparent “accidents” were probably
intentional. For another, since suicide is frowned on in our society,
relatives and friends often refuse to acknowledge that loved ones have
taken their own lives. Self-Instructional Material
169
Mood Disorders Suicide is not classified as a mental disorder by DSM-V, but clinicians are
NOTES
aware of the high frequency with which psychological dysfunction—a
breakdown of coping skills, emotional turmoil, a distorted view of life—
plays a role in this act. People from all walks of life commit suicide, and
they do so for a wide range of reasons. The public is often misinformed
about the symptoms and causes of suicide.
Edwin Shneidman (2005, 1993, 1981, 1963), one of the most influential
writers on this topic, defines suicide as an intentioned death—a self-
inflicted death in which one makes an intentional, direct, and conscious
effort to end one’s life. Accordingly, Shneidman has distinguished four
kinds of people who intentionally end their lives: the death seeker, death
initiator, death ignorer, and death darer.
1) Death seekers clearly intend to end their lives at the time they
attempt suicide. This singleness of purpose may last only a short
time. It can change to confusion the very next hour or day, and then
return again in short order.
2) Death initiators also clearly intend to end their lives, but they act
out of a belief that the process of death is already under way and
that they are simply hastening the process. Some expect that they
will die in a matter of days or weeks. Many suicides among the
elderly and very sick fall into this category.
3) Death ignorers do not believe that their self-inflicted death will
mean the end of their existence. They believe they are trading their
present lives for a better or happier existence. Many child suicides
fall into this category, as do those of adult believers in a hereafter
who commit suicide to reach another form of life.
4) Death darers experience mixed feelings, or ambivalence, in their
intent to die even at the moment of their attempt, and they show this
ambivalence in the act itself. Many death darers are as interested in
gaining attention, making someone feel guilty, or expressing anger
as in dying per se.
When individuals play indirect, covert, partial, or unconscious roles in their
own deaths, Shneidman (2001, 1993, 1981) classifies them in a suicide-like
category called ‘subintentional death’. Seriously ill people who
consistently mismanage their medicines may belong in this category.

6. According to Shneidman, what are the 4 categories of people that try to
intentionally end their lives?
12.14 Risk Factors

Stressful events and situations:
The stressors that help lead to suicide do not always need to be as horrific
as those tied to combat. Common forms of immediate stress seen in cases
of suicide are the loss of a loved one through death, divorce, or rejection
(Ajdacic-Gross et al., 2008); loss of a job (Yamasaki et al., 2005); and the
stress associated with hurricanes or other natural disasters, even among
very young children.
170
Mood Disorders
People whose illnesses cause them great pain or severe disability may try
to commit suicide, believing that death is unavoidable and imminent NOTES
(Schneider &Shenassa, 2008; Hendin, 2002, 1999). Victims of an abusive
or repressive environment from which they have little or no hope of escape
sometimes commit suicide. For example, prisoners of war, inmates of
concentration camps, abused spouses, abused children, and prison inmates
have tried to end their lives. They may also believe that the suffering and
problems are more than they can endure. Some jobs create feelings of
tension or dissatisfaction that may precipitate suicide attempts. Research
has found particularly high suicide rates among psychiatrists and
psychologists, physicians, nurses, dentists, lawyers, police officers,
farmers, and unskilled laborers.
Mood and thought changes:
Shneidman (2005, 2001) suggests that the key to suicide is “psychache,” a
feeling of psychological pain that seems intolerable to the person. The most
common change is an increase in sadness. Also common are increases in
feelings of anxiety, tension, frustration, anger, or shame.
Suicide attempts may also be preceded by shifts in patterns of thinking.
Individuals may become preoccupied with their problems, lose perspective,
and see suicide as the only effective solution to their difficulties
(Shneidman, 2005, 2001, 1987). They often develop a sense of
hopelessness. Hopelessness is a pessimistic belief that one’s present
circumstances, problems, or mood will not change. Thus, some clinicians
believe that a feeling of hopelessness is the single most likely indicator of
suicidal intent, and they take special care to look for signs of hopelessness
when they assess the risk of suicide. Many people who attempt suicide fall
victim to dichotomous thinking, viewing problems and solutions in rigid
either/or terms.
Alcohol and other drug use:
Studies indicate that as many as 70 percent of the people who attempt
suicide drink alcohol just before the act. It may be that the use of alcohol
lowers the individuals’ fears of committing suicide, releases underlying
aggressive feelings, or impairs their judgment and problem-solving ability.
Mental disorders:
Research suggests that as many as half of all suicide victims had been
experiencing severe depression, 20 percent chronic alcoholism, and 10
percent schizophrenia. Correspondingly, as many as 15 percent of people
with each of these disorders try to kill themselves. People who are both
depressed and dependent on alcohol seem particularly prone to suicidal
impulses. It is also the case that many people with borderline personality
disorder try to harm themselves or make suicidal gestures as part of their
disorder. Suicide is the leading cause of premature death among people
with schizophrenia. The popular notion is that when such persons kill
themselves, they must be responding to an imagined voice commanding
them to do so or to a delusion that suicide is a grand and noble gesture.
Research indicates, however, that suicides by people with schizophrenia
more often reflect feelings of demoralization or fears of further mental
deterioration.
Modelling behavior:
It is not unusual for people, particularly teenagers, to try to commit suicide
after observing or reading about someone else who has done so. Research Self-Instructional Material
suggests that suicides by entertainers, political figures, and other well-
171
Mood Disorders known persons are regularly followed by unusual increases in the number
NOTES
of suicides across the nation. The word-of-mouth publicity that attends
suicides in a school, workplace, or small community may also trigger
suicide attempts. For example, during the year after a widely publicized,
politically motivated suicide by self-burning in England, for example, 82
other people set themselves on fire, with equally fatal results.

7. What are the two major mood or thought changes implicated in suicide
intention and what do they mean?
12.15 Treatment
Treatment of suicidal people falls into two major categories: treatment after
suicide has been attempted and suicide prevention.
Treatment after a suicide:
After a suicide attempt, most victims need medical care. Some are left with
severe injuries, brain damage, or other medical problems. Once the
physical damage is treated, psychotherapy or drug therapy may begin, on
either an inpatient or outpatient basis. The goals of therapy are to keep
people alive, help them achieve a nonsuicidal state of mind, and guide
them to develop better ways of handling stress (Reinecke et al., 2008;
Shneidman, 2001). Various therapies have been employed, including drug,
psychodynamic, cognitive, cognitive-behavioral, group, and family
therapies. Research indicates that cognitive and cognitive-behavioral
therapies may be particularly helpful for suicidal individuals
(Ghahramanlou-Holloway et al., 2008; Tarrier et al., 2008). These
approaches focus to a large degree on the painful thoughts, sense of
hopelessness, dichotomous thinking, poor coping skills, and other
cognitive and behavioral features that characterize the functioning of
suicidal persons. Using elements of Beck’s cognitive therapy (see pages
280–283), therapists may help their suicidal clients to assess, challenge,
and change many of their negative attitudes and illogical thinking
processes (Brown et al., 2005).
Suicide prevention:
Suicide prevention programs and hotlines respond to suicidal people as
individuals in crisis—that is, under great stress, unable to cope, feeling
threatened or hurt, and interpreting their situations as unchangeable. Thus
the programs offer crisis intervention: they try to help suicidal people see
their situations more accurately, make better decisions, act more
constructively, and overcome their crises (Van Orden et al., 2008;
Frankish, 1994). Because crises can occur at any time, the centers advertise
their hot lines and also welcome people who walk in without appointments.
Today suicide prevention takes place not only in special settings but also in
therapists’ offices. Suicide experts encourage all therapists to look for and
address signs of suicidal thinking and behavior in their clients, regardless
of the broad reasons that the clients are seeking treatment. Although
specific techniques vary from therapist to therapist or from prevention
Self-Instructional Material center to prevention center, the general approach used by Suicide
172
Mood Disorders
Prevention Centers reflects the goals and techniques of many clinicians and
organizations. During the initial contact at the center, the counselor has NOTES
several tasks:
1) Establishing a positive relationship- As callers must trust
counselors in order to confide in them and follow their suggestions,
counselors try to set a positive and comfortable tone for the
discussion. They convey that they are listening, understanding,
interested, nonjudgmental, and available.
2) Understanding and clarifying the problem- Counselors first try to
understand the full scope of the caller’s crisis and then help the
person see the crisis in clear and constructive terms
3) Assessing suicide potential- Crisis workers fill out a questionnaire,
often called a lethality scale, to estimate the caller’s potential for
suicide. It helps them determine the degree of stress the caller is
under, relevant personality characteristics, how detailed the suicide
plan is, the severity of symptoms, and the coping resources
available to the caller.
4) Assessing and mobilizing the caller’s resources- Although they may
view themselves as ineffectual, helpless, and alone, people who are
suicidal usually have many strengths and resources, including
relatives and friends.
5) Formulating a plan- Together the crisis worker and caller develop a
plan of action. In essence, they are agreeing on a way out of the
crisis, an alternative to suicidal action. Most plans include a series
of follow-up counseling sessions over the next few days or weeks,
either in person at the center or by phone.
8. What are the 5 steps a counsellor must follow when dealing with a
suicidal client?
12.16 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit, we have given an introduction to mood disorders, it’s
symptoms and treatment. We have discussed depressive disorders and
bipolar disorders in further detail and have talked about the symptoms and
treatment. We have also gone through suicide; risk factors and ways to
treat or prevent suicide.
1) Write a note on the possible causes of bipolar disorder
2) What are some of the risk factors of suicide?
3) Write a note on treatment with respect to suicide.
4) Write a note on treatment of mood disorders.
1. Depressed people hold extremely negative views of themselves.
They consider themselves inadequate, undesirable, inferior,
perhaps evil. They also blame themselves for nearly every Self-Instructional Material
173
Mood Disorders unfortunate event, even things that have nothing to do with them,
NOTES
and they rarely credit themselves for positive achievements.
2. People who display a longer-lasting (at least two years) but less
disabling pattern of unipolar depression may receive a diagnosis of
dysthymic disorder. When dysthymic disorder leads to major
depressive disorder, the sequence is called ‘double depression’
3. DSM-V distinguishes two kinds of bipolar disorders—bipolar I and
bipolar II. People with bipolar I disorder have full manic and major
depressive episodes. Most of them experience an alternation of the
episodes; for example, weeks of mania followed by a period of
wellness, followed, in turn, by an episode of depression. Some
people, however, have mixed episodes, in which they swing from
manic to depressive symptoms and back again on the same day. In
bipolar II disorder, hypomanic—that is, mildly manic— episodes
alternate with major depressive episodes over the course of time.
Some people with this pattern accomplish huge amounts of work
during their mild manic periods.
4. Low serotonin activity accompanied by low norepinephrine activity
may lead to depression; low serotonin activity accompanied by
high norepinephrine activity may lead to mania.
5. Vagus nerve stimulation, transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS),
and deep brain stimulation.
6. Death seekers, death initiators, death ignorers and death darers.
7. (i) Hopelessness is a pessimistic belief that one’s present
circumstances, problems, or mood will not change. (ii) Many
people who attempt suicide fall victim to dichotomous thinking,
viewing problems and solutions in rigid either/or terms.
8. (i) Establishing a positive relationship (ii) Understanding and
clarifying the problem (iii) Assessing suicide potential (iv)
Assessing and mobilizing the caller’s resources (v) formulating a
plan.
Pearson India Ltd.
of India Pvt. Ltd.
174
Eating disorders
UNIT XIII: EATING DISORDERS NOTES
Structure
13.1 Introduction
13.2 Objectives
13.8 Let Us Sum Up
13.1 Introduction
It has not always done so, but most society today equates thinness with
health and beauty. For many, thinness has become an obsession. Most of us
are as preoccupied with how much we eat as with the taste and nutritional
value of our food. Thus it is not surprising that during the past few years
we have also witnessed an increase in eating disorders that have at their
core a morbid fear of gaining weight. Sufferers of anorexia nervosa, are
convinced that they need to be extremely thin, and they lose so much
weight that they may starve themselves to death. People with bulimia
nervosa go on frequent eating binges, during which they uncontrollably
consume large quantities of food, and then force themselves to vomit or
take other extreme steps to keep from gaining weight. Clinicians now
understand that the similarities between anorexia nervosa and bulimia
nervosa can be as important as the differences between them. For example,
many people with anorexia nervosa binge as they persist in losing
dangerous amounts of weight; some later develop bulimia nervosa.
Conversely, people with bulimia nervosa sometimes develop anorexia
nervosa as time goes on. Eating disorders are more common in women than
men. They can develop at any age, although typically emerge in
adolescence or early adulthood. Anorexia nervosa usually begins at an
early age then bulimia nervosa. Many more people suffer from less severe
forms of disturbed eating patterns.
13.2 Objectives
On completion of this unit, you will be able to understand:
 The nature and causes of eating disorders
 The symptoms and treatment of different eating disorders
Bulimia nervosa is characterized by uncontrollable binge eating and efforts
to prevent resulting weight gain by using inappropriate behaviors such as
self-induced vomiting and excessive exercise. Bulimia nervosa was
recognized as a psychiatric syndrome relatively recently. The British
psychiatrist G. F. M. Russell (1997) proposed the term in 1979, and it was Self-Instructional Material
adopted into the DSM in 1987. The word bulimia comes from the Greek
175
Eating disorders bous (which means "ox"), and limos (hunger). It is meant to denote a
hunger of such proportions that the person could eat an ox.
NOTES
The clinical picture of the binge-eating/purging type of anorexia nervosa
has much in common with bulimia nervosa. By definitions, the person with
anorexia nervosa is severely underweight. This is not true of the person
with bulimia nervosa.
Consequently, if the person who binges or purges also meets
criteria for anorexia nervosa, the diagnosis is anorexia nervosa (binge-
eating/purging type) and not bulimia nervosa.
People with anorexia nervosa and bulimia nervosa share a common fear or
being or becoming fat. However, unlike patients with anorexia nervosa,
those with bulimia nervosa are typically of normal weight or sometimes
even slightly overweight. The fear of becoming fat helps explain the
development of bulimia nervosa. Bulimia typically begins with restricted
eating motivated by the desire to be slender. During these early stages, the
person diets and eats low-calorie foods. Over time, however, the early
resolve to restrict gradually erodes, and the person starts to eat "forbidden
foods' such as potato chips, pizza, cake, ice cream, and chocolate. Of
course, some patients binge on whatever food is available, including such
things as raw cookie dough. After the binge, in an effort to manage the
breakdown of self-control, the person begins to vomit, fast, exercise
excessively, or abuse laxatives. This pattern then persists because, even
though those with bulimia nervosa are disgusted by their behaviour, the
purging alleviates the fear of gaining weight that comes for eating.
Whereas people with anorexia nervosa often deny the seriousness
of their disorder and are surprised by the shock and concern with which
others view their emaciated conditions, those with bulimia nervosa are
often preoccupied with shame, guilt, and self-deprecation. They make
efforts to conceal their behavior as they struggle (often unsuccessfully) to
master their urges to binge.
Criteria for Bulimia Nervosa DSM-5
Recurrent episodes of binge eating - An episode of binge eating is
characterized by both of the following:
1. Eating, in a discrete period of time (e.g, within any 2-hour
period), an amount of food that is definitely larger than what
most individuals would eat in a similar period of time under
similar circumstances.
2. Sense of lack of control over eating during the episode (e.g. a
feeling that one cannot stop eating or control what or how much
one is eating).
Recurrent inappropriate compensatory behaviors in order to prevent weight
gain, such as self-induced vomiting; misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or other
medications; fasting; or excessive exercise.
The binge eating and inappropriate compensatory behaviors both occur, on
average, at least once a week for 3 months.
Self-evaluation is unduly influenced by body shape and weight.
The disturbance does not occur exclusively during episodes of anorexia
nervosa.
176
Check your Progress – 1 Eating disorders

1. What is Bulimia nervosa?
2. Trace the etymology of Bulimia.
The term anorexia nervosa literally means "lack of appetite induced by
nervousness." At the heart of anorexia nervosa is an intense fear of gaining
weight or becoming fat, combined with behaviors that result in a
significantly low body weight. The DSM-5 criteria for anorexia nervosa are
shown in the DSM criteria box. An important change from DSM-IV to
DSM-5 is that in DSM amenorrhea (cessation of menstruation) is no longer
required tor a person to be given the diagnosis. Amenorrhea is also not a
criterion that can be used for males, nor can it be assessed in prepubescent
girls or in women who use hormonal contraceptives.
The disorder did not receive its current name until 1873, when
Charles Lasegue in Paris and Sir William Gull in London independently
described the clinical syndrome. In his last publication on the condition,
Gull (1888) described a 14-year-old girl who began "without apparent
cause, to evince a repugnance to food; and soon afterwards declined to take
any whatever, except half a cup of tea or coffee." After being prescribed to
eat light food every few hours, the patient made a good recovery.
Criteria for anorexia nervosa DSM-5
A. Restriction of energy intake relative to requirements, leading to a
significantly low body weight in the context of age, sex,
developmental trajectory, and physical health. Significantly low
weight is defined as a weight that is less than minimally normal or,
for children and adolescents, less than that minimally expected.
B. Intense fear of gaining weight or of becoming fat or persistent
behavior that interferes with weight gain, even though at a
significantly low weight.
C. Disturbance in the way in which one's body weight or shape is
experienced, undue influence of body weight or shape on self-
evaluation, or persistent lack of recognition of the seriousness of the
current low body weight.
Even though they may look painfully thin or even emaciated, many
patients with anorexia nervosa deny having any problem. Indeed, they may
come to feel fulfilled by their weight loss. Despite this quiet satisfaction,
however, they may feel ambivalent about their weight. Efforts may be
made to conceal their thinness by wearing baggy clothes or carrying hidden
bulky objects so that they will weigh more when measured by others.
Patients with anorexia nervosa may even resort to drinking large amounts
of water to increase their weight temporarily
There are two types of anorexia nervosa: the restricting type and the binge-
eating/ purging type. The central difference between these two subtypes
concerns the way in which patients maintain their very low weight. In the
restricting type, every effort is made to limit the quantity of food
consumed. Caloric intake is tightly controlled. Patients often try to avoid
eating in the presence of other people. Self-Instructional Material
177
Eating disorders Patients with the binge-eating/purging type of anorexia nervosa differ from
patients with restricting anorexia nervosa because they either binge, purge,
NOTES
or binge and purge. A binge involves an out-of-control consumption of an
amount of food that is far greater than what most people would eat in the
same amount of time and under the same circumstances. These binges may
be followed by efforts to purge, or remove from their bodies, the food they
have eaten. Methods of purging commonly include self-induced vomiting
or misusing laxatives, diuretics, and enemas. Other compensatory
behaviors that do not involve purging are excessive exercise or fasting.

3. What does the term ‘anorexia nervosa’ mean?
4. What is the difference between the two types of anorexia nervosa?
A new addition to DSM-5 is the diagnosis of binge eating disorder (BED).
BED is a distinct clinical syndrome. Although BED has some clinical
features in common with bulimia nervosa, there is an important difference.
After a binge (which may be at a level comparable to that of a patient with
bulimia nervosa), the person with BED does not engage in any form of
inappropriate "compensatory" behavior. This might include purging, using
laxatives, or even exercising to limit weight gain. There is also much less
dietary restraint in BED than is typical of either bulimia nervosa or
anorexia nervosa. Not surprisingly, binge-eating disorder is associated with
being over-weight or even obese
although weight is not a factor involved in making the diagnosis.
Interestingly, individuals with binge-eating disorder are more likely to have
overvalued ideas about the importance of weight and shape than
overweight or obese patients who do not have binge-eating disorder. In this
respect, they also resemble people with bulimia nervosa
Criteria for Binge-Eating Disorder DSM-5
A. Recurrent episodes of binge eating. An episode of binge eating is
characterized by both of the following:
1. Eating, in a discrete period of time (e.g., within any 2-hour
period), an amount of food that is definitely larger than what
most people would eat in a similar period of time under similar
circumstances.
2. A sense of lack of control over eating during the episode (e.g. a
feeling that one cannot stop eating or control what or how much
one is eating).
B. The binge-eating episodes are associated with three (or more) of the
following:
1. Eating much more rapidly than normal.
2. Eating until feeling uncomfortably full.
3. Eating large amounts of food when not feeling physically
hungry.
4. Eating alone because of feeling embarrassed by how much one is
eating.
5. Feeling disgusted with oneself, depressed, or very guilty
afterward.
178
Eating disorders
C. Marked distress regarding binge eating is present.
D. The binge eating occurs, on average, at least once a week for 3 NOTES
months.
E. The binge eating is not associated with the recurrent use of
inappropriate compensatory behavior as in bulimia nervosa and does
not occur exclusively during the course of bulimia nervosa or anorexia
nervosa.
There is no single cause of eating disorders. In all probability, they reflect
the complex interaction between genetic and environmental factors.
Biological, sociocultural, family, and individual variables likely all play a
role.
Genetic factors play an important role in eating disorders. Genes may make
some people more susceptible to binge eating or to sociocultural
influences, or may underlie personality styles (eg, perfectionism) that
increase risk for eating disorders.
The neurotransmitter serotonin has been implicated in eating disorders.

This neurotransmitter is also involved in mood disorders, which are highly
comorbid with eating disorders.
Sociocultural influences are integral in the development of eating
disorders. Our society places great value on being thin. Western values
concerning thinness may be spreading. This may help explain why eating
disorders are now found throughout the world.
Individual risk factors such as internalizing the thin ideal, body

dissatisfaction, dieting, negative affect, and perfectionism have been
implicated in the development of eating disorders.
Many patients with anorexia nervosa disorder look extremely unwell. Their
hair on the scalp thins and becomes brittle, as do their nails. Their skin
becomes very dry, and downy hair (called lanugo) starts to grow on the
face, neck, arms, back, and legs. Many patients also develop a yellowish
tinge to their skin, especially on the palms of their hands and bottoms of
their feet.
Because they are so undernourished, people with this disorder have a
difficult time coping with cold temperatures. Their hands and feet are often
cold to the touch and have a purplish-blue tinge due to problems with
temperature regulation and lack of oxygen to the extremities. As a
consequence of chronically low blood pressure, patients often feel tired,
weak, dizzy, and faint. Thiamin (vitamin B1) deficiency may also be
present; this could account for some of the depression and cognitive
changes documented in low-weight anorexia patients.
Although many of these problems resolve when patients gain weight,
anorexia nervosa may result in increased risk for osteoporosis in later life.
The failure to eat healthily during this time may result in more brittle and
fragile bones forever.
People with anorexia nervosa can die from heart arrhythmias (irregular
heartbeats). Sometimes this is caused by major imbalances in key
electrolytes such as potassium. Chronically low levels of potassium
179
Eating disorders (hypokalemia) can also result in kidney damage and renal failure severe
enough to require dialysis.
NOTES
Abuse of laxatives, which occurs in 10 to 60 percent of patients with eating
disorders, makes all of these problems much worse. Laxatives are used to
induce diarrhea so that the person feels thinner or to remove unwanted
calories from the body. Laxative abuse can lead to dehydration, electrolyte
imbalances, and kidney disease as well as damage to the bowels and
gastrointestinal tract.
Bulimia nervosa is much less lethal than anorexia nervosa. Bulimia nervosa
also creates a number of medical concerns. Purging can cause electrolyte
imbalances and low potassium puts the patient at risk for heart
abnormalities. Another complication is damage to the heart muscle, which
may be due to using ipecac syrup (a poison that causes vomiting). More
typically, however, patients develop calluses on their hands from sticking
their fingers down their throats to make themselves sick. In extreme cases,
where objects such as a toothbrush are used to induce vomiting, tears to the
throat can occur.
Because the contents of the stomach are acidic, patients damage their teeth
when they throw up repeatedly. Brushing teeth immediately after vomiting
damages them even more. Mouth ulcers and dental cavities are a common
consequence of repeated purging, as are small red dots around the eyes that
are caused by the pressure of throwing up. Finally, patients with bulimia
very often have swollen parotid (salivary) glands caused by repeatedly
vomiting. These are known as "puffy cheeks" or "chipmunk cheeks'" by
many bulimia sufferers.
Individuals with anorexia nervosa view the disorder as a chronic condition
and are generally pessimistic about their potential for recovery. They have
a high dropout rate from therapy.
The most immediate concern with patients who have anorexia nervosa is to
restore their weight to a level that is no longer life threatening. In severe
cases, this requires hospitalization and extreme measures such as
intravenous feeding. This is followed by rigorous control of the patient's
caloric intake so as to progress toward a targeted range of weight gain
(Andersen et al.. 1997). Normally, this short-term effort is successful.
However, without treatment designed to address the psychological issues
that fuel the anorexic behavior, any weight gain will be temporary and the
patient will soon need medical attention again.
Medications
Antidepressants are sometimes used in the treatment of anorexia nervosa,
although there is no evidence that they are especially effective. In contrast,
research suggests that treatment with an antipsychotic medication called
olanzapine may be beneficial. Antipsychotic medications (which help with
disturbed thinking) are routinely used in the treatment of schizophrenia).
These medications also provide benefits in the treatment of anorexia
nervosa, which is characterized by distorted beliefs about body shape and
size. More importantly, one side effect of olanzapine is weight gain.
Although this is a problem for patients with schizophrenia, in the treatment
of anorexia nervosa weight gain is obviously much more desirable.
180
Eating disorders
Family Therapy NOTES

For adolescents with anorexia nervosa, family therapy is considered to be
the treatment of choice. Family meals are observed by the therapist, and
efforts are made to guide the parents as a functioning support team in the
termination phase of treatment, focus is on the development of more
healthy relationships between the patient and parents.
COGNITIVE-BEHAVIORAL THERAPY
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy (CBT), which involves changing behavior
and maladaptive styles of thinking, has proved to be very effective in
treating bulimia nervosa. Because anorexia nervosa shares many features
with bulimia nervosa, CBT is often used with anorexia nervosa patients as
well A major focus of the treatment involves modifying distorted beliefs
concerning weight and food, as well as distorted beliefs about the self that
may have contributed to the disorder (e.g, “People will reject me unless I
am thin”).
Medication
It is quite common for patients with Bulimia Nervosa to be treated with
antidepressants medications. Antidepressants seem to decrease the
frequency of binges as well as improve patient’s mood and preoccupation
with shape and weight.
Cognitive behavioral therapy
The leading treatment for Bulimia Nervosa is CBT. The behavioral
component of CBT for bulimia nervosa focuses on normalizing eating
patterns. This includes meal planning, nutritional education, and ending
binging and purging cycles by teaching the person to eat small amounts of
food more regularly. The cognitive element of the treatment is aimed at
changing the cognitions and behaviors that initiate or perpetuate a binge
cycle. This is accomplished by challenging the dysfunctional thought
patterns typically present in bulimia nervosa, such as the all-or-nothing or
dichotomous thinking described earlier. For instance, CBT challenges the
tendency to divide all foods into "good' and "bad' categories. This is done
by providing factual information, as well as by arranging tor the patients to
demonstrate to themselves that ingesting bad food does not inevitably lead
to a total loss of control over eating. Treatment with CBT clearly helps to
reduce the severity of symptoms in patients with bulimia nervosa.
BED has attracted a lot of attention from researchers, and a number of
different treatment approaches have been suggested. Due to the high level
of comorbidity between binge-eating disorder and depression,
antidepressant medications are sometimes used to treat this disorder. Other
categories of medications, such as appetite suppressants and anticonvulsant
medications have also been a focus of interest. Interpersonal therapy (IPT),
which is sometimes used in the treatment of depression, seems to be
helpful for binge eating disorder.
5. What kind of distorted beliefs characterize the thinking of people
with eating disorders? Self-Instructional Material
181
Eating disorders
13.8 Let Us Sum Up
NOTES Three different kinds of eating disorders are included in DSM-5: anorexia
nervosa, bulimia nervosa and binge eating disorder. Both anorexia nervosa
and bulimia nervosa are characterized by an intense fear of becoming fat
and by a drive for thinness. Patients with anorexia nervosa are severely
underweight.
Anorexia nervosa is very difficult to treat. Treatment is long term, and
many patients resist getting well. For younger patients, family therapy
appears to be very beneficial. Olanzapine is also helpful. The treatment of
choice for bulimia nervosa is CBT. CBT is also helpful for binge-eating
disorder. Interpersonal therapy (IPT) seems to be helpful for binge eating
disorder.
1. Write a brief account of various eating disorders.
2. How is anorexia nervosa different from Bulimia nervosa?
3. What are the potential disastrous medical complications of eating
disorder?
4. Describe the different treatment options available for managing
eating disorders.
1. Bulimia nervosa is an eating disorder characterized by
uncontrollable binge eating and efforts to prevent resulting weight
gain by using inappropriate behaviors such as self-induced
vomiting and excessive exercise.
2. The word bulimia comes from the Greek bous (which means "ox"),
and limos (hunger). It is meant to denote a hunger of such
proportions that the person could eat an ox.
3. The term anorexia nervosa literally means "lack of appetite induced
by nervousness."
4. There are two types of anorexia nervosa: the restricting type and the
binge-eating/ purging type. In the restricting type, every effort is
made to limit the quantity of food consumed. Caloric intake is
tightly controlled. Patients with the binge-eating/purging type of
anorexia nervosa either binge, purge, or binge and purge.
5. People will reject me unless I am thin.
Pearson India Ltd.
of India Pvt. Ltd.
182
Sleep disorders
UNIT XIV : SLEEPDISORDERS NOTES
Structure
14.1 Objectives
14.2 Dys-Somnias
14.5 Narcolepsy
14.6 Breathing Related Sleep Disorders
14.7 Circadian Rhythm Sleep Disorders
14.8 Treatment
14.8.1 PSYCHOLOGICAL TREATMENT
14.8.2 BEHAVIOURAL TREATMENT
14.9 Let Us Sum Up
14.1 Objectives
After going through this unit you will be able to:
 Understand the meaning of dys-somnias
 Know the characteristics of primary insomnia, primary
hypersomnia, narcolepsy, breathing related disorders and circadian
rhythm disorders.
 Know ways to treat these sleep disorders.
14.2 Dys-Somnias
The dyssomnias (insomnia, hypersomnia, breathing-related sleep disorder,
narcolepsy, and circadian rhythm sleep disorder) involve disturbances in
the amount, quality, or timing of sleep. Generally, there are 2 types of
dyssomnias.
Extrinsic dyssomnias are sleep disorders that originate from external causes
and may include: Insomnia, Sleep apnea, Narcolepsy, Restless legs
syndrome, Periodic Limb movement disorder, Hypersomnia, Toxin-
induced sleep disorder and Kleine-Levin syndrome. Intrinsic dyssomnias
are sleep disorders that originate from internal causes and may include:
Altitude insomnia, Substance use insomnia, Sleep-onset association
disorder, Nocturnal paroxysmal dystonia and Limit-setting sleep disorder.
Insomnia complaints typically include difficulty initiating and/or
maintaining sleep, and they usually include extended periods of nocturnal
wakefulness and/or insufficient amounts of nocturnal sleep. Both a
symptom and a diagnostic category, the insomnia diagnoses are best
referred to by their subcategory terms. The insomnia disorders can be
either primary or secondary. Primary insomnia is sleeplessness or the
perception of poor quality sleep that is not caused by medical or psychiatric
diseases, conditions, genetics, or illnesses; or environmental causes (such
as drug abuse, medication, shift-work). Primary insomnias can have both
intrinsic and extrinsic factors involved in their etiology, but they are not
regarded as being secondary to another disorder. Secondary forms occur
when the insomnia is a symptom of a medical or psychiatric illness, Self-Instructional Material
183
Sleep disorders another sleep disorder, or substance abuse. At present, the DSM-V has
changed the name of this disorder to ‘insomnia disorder’ from ‘primary
NOTES
insomnia’.
1. What are the types of dys-somnias? Give some examples.
No matter what the cause, those who struggle with an insomnia disorder
may ultimately develop a dependence upon any medication prescribed to
them that aids in falling asleep or staying asleep. Though most of these
medications are only designed to be used for a couple of weeks, many
patients take them longer, developing a tolerance that requires them to take
more and more of the pills in order to experience their effects.
Dependence upon medications like these – especially zolpidem, or
Ambien, one of the most commonly prescribed sleep aid drugs – can cause
a host of unwanted side effects as well. Some patients report periods of
partial arousal during the night that they don’t remember characterized by
performing activities that can include driving, making and eating food,
moving furniture, and having sex.

2. What is insomnia disorder?

Primary hypersomnia is thought to be caused by problems in the brain
systems that control sleep and waking functions. Secondary hypersomnia is
the result of conditions that cause fatigue or insufficient sleep.
For the primary hypersomnia disorders, classification is based mostly on
symptoms and sleep testing results. Also known as ‘idiopathic
hypersomnia’, primary hypersomnia disorder is defined by hypoarousal, or
a state of being less awake and alert and experiencing lesser cognitive and
motor function as well as emotional capacity. In simpler terms, those who
are living with primary hypersomnia disorder are often very sleepy and
experience longer episodes of non-REM (rapid eye movement) sleep as
compared to the general public.
The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders specifies that
primary hypersomnia is characterized by excessive sleepiness but is
not narcolepsy or another sleep disorder. Those who struggle with disorder
often wake so often during the night despite spending long periods of time
in nocturnal sleep that they experience “sleep drunkenness” when they get
up the next day.
Many patients find it so difficult to wake up and feel alert in the morning
that they take stimulant drugs in the hopes of giving themselves a boost.
Drugs like crystal meth, cocaine and prescription stimulants that provide
this effect may be utilized by patients to help them overcome the
grogginess that stops them from functioning. Unfortunately, this does
nothing to address the primary hypersomnia disorder and can ultimately
Self-Instructional Material cause a drug addiction that can be fatal.
184
Sleep disorders
NOTES
3. What is idiopathic hypersomnia?
14.5 Narcolepsy
Narcolepsy is a sleep disorder characterized by excessive sleepiness, sleep
paralysis, hallucinations, and in some cases episodes of cataplexy (partial
or total loss of muscle control, often triggered by a strong emotion such as
laughter).
People with narcolepsy feel very sleepy during the day and may
involuntarily fall asleep during normal activities. In narcolepsy, the normal
boundary between awake and asleep is blurred, so characteristics of
sleeping can occur while a person is awake. For example, cataplexy is the
muscle paralysis of REM sleep occurring during waking hours. It causes
sudden loss of muscle tone that leads to a slack jaw, or weakness of the
arms, legs, or trunk. People with narcolepsy can also experience dream-
like hallucinations and paralysis as they are falling asleep or waking up, as
well as disrupted night time sleep and vivid nightmares.
Narcolepsy with cataplexy (It is a sudden and involuntary loss of muscle
tone that occurs while the patient is awake. This muscle weakness can
impact the entire body, specific limbs or certain areas of the body. It can
last for a few seconds, or it can last for a few minutes) is caused by the loss
of a chemical in the brain called ‘hypocretin’. Hypocretin acts on the
alerting systems in the brain, keeping us awake and regulating sleep wake
cycles. In narcolepsy, the cluster of cells that produce hypocretin—located
in a region called the hypothalamus—is damaged or completely destroyed.
Without hypocretin, the person has trouble staying awake, and
also experiences disruptions in the normal sleep-wake cycles.
Many patients find the difficulties associated with narcolepsy so
overwhelming that they abuse drugs and alcohol to deal with the
frustrations they experience in everyday life. Some adopt the use of
stimulant drugs in the hopes that it will help them overcome the sleep
episodes that occur randomly throughout the day. Still others are prescribed
medications to treat the disorder that are addictive. In all of these cases, a
co-occurring addiction issue is a possibility, and the risks associated with
drug and alcohol abuse often serve to exacerbate the problems caused by
narcolepsy.
4. What is cataplexy?
14.6 Breathing Related Sleep Disorders
Disordered ventilation during sleep is the characteristic feature of these
disorders. Central apnea syndromes include those in which respiratory
effort is diminished or absent in an intermittent or cyclical fashion as a
result of central nervous system dysfunction. Other central sleep apnea
forms are associated with underlying pathologic or environmental causes,
such high-altitude periodic breathing. Self-Instructional Material
185
Sleep disorders Primary central sleep apnea is a disorder of unknown cause characterized
by recurrent episodes of cessation of breathing during sleep without
NOTES
associated ventilatory effort. A complaint of excessive daytime sleepiness,
insomnia, or difficulty breathing during sleep is reported. This diagnosis
requires that 5 or more apneic episodes per hour of sleep be seen by
polysomnography. Central sleep apnea due to high-altitude periodic
breathing is characterized by sleep disturbance that is caused by cycling
periods of apnea and hyperpnea without ventilatory effort. The cycle length
is typically between 12 and 34 seconds. Five or more central apneas per
hour of sleep are required to make the diagnosis. Most people will have
this ventilatory pattern at elevations greater than 7600 meters, and some at
lower altitudes. A secondary form of central sleep apnea due to drug or
substance (substance abuse) is most commonly associated with users of
long-term opioid use
Primary sleep apnea of infancy is a disorder of respiratory control most
often seen in preterm infants (apnea of prematurity), but it can occur in
predisposed infants (apnea of infancy). This may be a developmental
pattern, or it may be secondary to other medical disorders. Respiratory
pauses of 20 seconds or longer are required for the diagnosis.
The obstructive sleep apnea syndromes include those in which there is an
obstruction in the airway resulting in increased breathing effort and
inadequate ventilation. Upper airway resistance syndrome has been
recognized as a manifestation of obstructive sleep apnea syndrome and
therefore is not included as a separate diagnosis. Obstructive sleep apnea in
adults is characterized by repetitive episodes of cessation of breathing
(apneas) or partial upper airway obstruction (hypopneas). These events are
often associated with reduced blood oxygen saturation. Snoring and sleep
disruption are typical and common. Excessive daytime sleepiness or
insomnia can result. Five or more respiratory events (apneas, hypopneas, or
respiratory effort-related arousals) per hour of sleep are required for
diagnosis. Increased respiratory effort occurs during the respiratory event.
At least 1 obstructive event, of at least 2 respiratory cycles of duration per
hour of sleep, is required for diagnosis.
Sleep-related hypoventilation/hypoxemic syndromes comprise 5 disorders
associated with hypoventilation or hypoxemia during sleep. Sleep-related
non obstructive alveolar hypoventilation, refers to decreased alveolar
hypoventilation resulting in sleep-related arterial oxygen desaturation in
patients with normal mechanical properties of the lungs. Congenital central
alveolar hypoventilation syndrome is a failure of automatic central control
of breathing in infants who do not breathe spontaneously or whose
breathing is shallow and erratic. It is a failure of the central automatic
control of breathing. The hypoventilation begins in infancy and it is worse
in sleep than in wakefulness. Sleep-related hypoventilation/hypoxemia due
to a medical condition is a subgroup of 3 disorders of impaired lung
function or chest wall mechanics. Sleep-related hypoventilation/hypoxemia
related to pulmonary parenchymal or vascular pathology is due to disorders
of interstitial lung disease, such as interstitial pneumonitis, or disorders
such as sickle-cell anemia or other hemoglobinopathies. Sleep-related
hypoventilation/hypoxemia due to lower airway obstruction is seen in
patients with lower airway disease, such as chronic obstructive lung disease
and emphysema, bronchiectasis, alpha1-antitrypsin deficiency.
186
Check your Progress – 5 Sleep disorders
5. What is primary central sleep apnea?
14.7 Circadian Rhythm Sleep Disorders

The circadian rhythm sleep disorders have a specific diagnostic category
because they share a common underlying chronophysiologic basis. The
major feature of these disorders is a persistent or recurrent misalignment
between the patient’s sleep pattern and the pattern that is desired or
regarded as the societal norm. Maladaptive behaviors influence the
presentation and severity of the circadian rhythm sleep disorders. The
underlying problem in the majority of the circadian rhythm sleep disorders
is that the patient cannot sleep when sleep is desired, needed, or expected.
The wake episodes can occur at undesired times as a result of sleep
episodes that occur at inappropriate times, and therefore, the patient may
complain of insomnia or excessive sleepiness. For several of the circadian
rhythm sleep disorders, once sleep is initiated, the major sleep episode is
normal in duration with normal REM and nREM cycling.
The delayed sleep phase type, which is more commonly seen in
adolescents, is characterized by a delay in the phase of the major sleep
period in relation to the desired sleep time and wake time. The advanced
sleep phase type, which is more commonly seen in older adults, is
characterized by an advance in the phase of the major sleep period in
relation to the desired sleep time and wake time. An alteration in the
homeostatic regulation of sleep may be responsible. However, the delayed
and advanced sleep phase types can have a predominant influence caused
by the individual’s choice to remain awake late into the night or by going
to bed earlier, which is associated with behavioral, social, or professional
demands. The irregular sleep–wake type, a disorder that involves a lack of
a clearly defined circadian rhythm of sleep and wakefulness, is most often
seen in institutionalized older adults and is associated with a lack of
synchronizing agents, such as light, activity, and social activities. The free
running type, or non-trained type (formerly known as the non-24-h sleep–
wake syndrome), occurs because there is a lack of entrainment to the 24-h
period, and the sleep pattern often follows that of the underlying free-
running pacemaker with a sequential shift in the daily sleep pattern.
The jet lag type, or jet lag disorder, is related to a temporal mismatch
between the timing of the sleep–wake cycle generated by the endogenous
circadian clock produced by a rapid change in time zones. The severity of
the disorder is influenced by the number of time zones crossed and the
direction of travel, with eastward travel usually being more disruptive. Shift
work type is characterized by complaints of insomnia or excessive
sleepiness that occurs in relation to work hours being scheduled during the
usual sleep period. Circadian rhythm sleep disorders due to a medical
condition is related to an underlying primary medical or neurological
disorder. A disrupted sleep–wake pattern leads to complaints of insomnia
or excessive daytime sleepiness.
Another circadian rhythm sleep disorder not due to a known physiological
condition is an irregular or unconventional sleep–wake pattern that can be
187
Sleep disorders the result of social, behavioral, or environmental factors. Noise, lighting, or
other factors can predispose an individual to developing this disorder.
NOTES
The appropriate timing of sleep within the 24-h day can be disturbed in
many other sleep disorders, particularly those associated with the
complaint of insomnia. Patients with narcolepsy may have a pattern of
sleepiness that is identical to that described as being caused by an irregular
sleep–wake type. However, because the primary sleep diagnosis is
narcolepsy, the patient should not receive a second diagnosis of a circadian
rhythm sleep disorder unless the disorder is unrelated to the narcolepsy.
For example, a diagnosis of jet lag type could be stated along with a
diagnosis of narcolepsy, if appropriate. Similarly, patients with mood
disorders or psychoses can, at times, have a sleep pattern similar to that of
delayed sleep phase type. A diagnosis of delayed sleep phase type would
be coded only if the disorder is not directly associated with the psychiatric
disorder.
Some disturbance of sleep timing is a common feature in patients who have
a diagnosis of inadequate sleep hygiene. Only if the timing of sleep is the
predominant cause of the sleep disturbance and is outside the societal
norm, then the patient would be given a diagnosis of a circadian rhythm
sleep disorder. Limit-setting sleep disorder is also associated with an
altered time of sleep within the 24-h day. If the setting of limits is a
function of the caretaker, then the sleep disorder is more appropriately
diagnosed as a limit-setting sleep disorder.

6. What is jet-lag disorder?
14.8 Treatment
14.8.1 PSYCHOLOGICAL TREATMENT
Generally, a combination of psychological and behavioral treatments is
used for treating sleep disorders. CBT (cognitive-behavioral therapy) uses
both psychological behavioral techniques to help all kinds of sleep
disorders- mainly insomnia. Some of the techniques used by therapists are
as follows:
Sleep restriction therapy (SRT) reduces the time you spend lying in bed
awake by eliminating naps and forcing you to stay up beyond your normal
bedtime. This method of sleep deprivation can be especially effective for
insomnia.
Stimulus control therapy helps to identify and change sleep habits that
prevent you from sleeping well. This means training you to use your
bedroom for just sleep and sex, rather than working or watching TV, and
maintaining consistent sleep-wake times, even on weekends.
Improving your sleep environment and sleep hygiene. Sleep hygiene
involves improving your daytime habits to include exercising regularly,
avoiding nicotine and caffeine late in the day, and learning to unwind at
night.
Remaining passively awake, also known as “paradoxical intention”.
Since worrying about not being able to sleep generates anxiety that keeps
188
Sleep disorders
you awake, letting go of this worry and making no effort to sleep may,
paradoxically, help you to unwind and fall asleep. NOTES
Relaxation training. When practiced regularly, relaxation techniques such
as mindfulness meditation, progressive muscle relaxation, and breathing
exercises can help you relax at night, relieving tension and anxiety and
preparing you for sleep.
Biofeedback uses sensors that measure specific physiological functions—
such as heart rate, breathing, and muscle tension. Biofeedback teaches you
to recognize and control your body’s anxiety response that impacts sleep
patterns.
Hypnosis can also sometimes be used in CBT for sleep disorders. While
you’re in a state of deep relaxation, the hypnotherapist uses different
therapeutic techniques to help you change negative thought patterns or
unhelpful habits and promote restful sleep.
14.8.2 BEHAVIOURAL TREATMENT
Cognitive behavioral therapy is the most widely-used therapy for sleep
disorders. It may be conducted individually, in a group of people with
similar sleeping problems, or even online. Since the causes and symptoms
of sleep disorders vary considerably, CBT should always be tailored to
your specific problems. Cognitive behavioral therapy for insomnia (CBT-
I), for example, is a specific type of therapy designed for people who are
unable to get the amount of sleep they need to wake up feeling rested and
refreshed.
The length of therapy also depends on the type and severity of the sleep
disorder. While CBT is rarely an immediate or easy cure, it is relatively
short-term. The cognitive aspects of CBT include thought challenging—
otherwise known as cognitive restructuring—in which the person
challenges the negative thinking patterns that contribute to your sleep
problems, replacing them with more positive, realistic thoughts.
Cognitive behavioral therapy for insomnia can benefit nearly anyone with
sleep problems. CBT-I can help people who have primary insomnia as well
as people with physical problems, such as chronic pain, or mental health
disorders, such as depression and anxiety. What's more, the effects seem to
last. And there is no evidence that CBT-I has negative side effects. CBT-I
requires steady practice, and some approaches may cause the client to lose
sleep at first. But stick with it, and they are likely to see lasting results.
7. Name some cognitive-behavioral techniques used to treat sleep
disorders.
14.9 Let Us Sum Up
In this unit, we have seen what dyssomnias mean and what its
characteristics are. We have explored features of various disorders such as
primary insomnia, primary hypersomnia, narcolepsy, breathing related
disorders and circadian rhythm disorders and we have looked at ways to
diagnose and treat such disorders.
1. Write a note on breathing related sleep disorders.
2. Write a note on circadian rhythm sleep disorders. Self-Instructional Material
189
Sleep disorders 3. Narcolepsy- a disorder with serious consequences. Explain.
4. Write briefly about psychological and behavioral methods that can
NOTES
be used to treat sleep disorders.
1. Extrinsic dyssomnias are sleep disorders that originate from
external causes and may include: Insomnia, Sleep apnea,
Narcolepsy, Restless legs syndrome, Periodic Limb movement
disorder, Hypersomnia, Toxin-induced sleep disorder and Kleine-
Levin syndrome. Intrinsic dyssomnias are sleep disorders that
originate from internal causes and may include: Altitude insomnia,
Substance use insomnia, Sleep-onset association disorder,
Nocturnal paroxysmal dystonia and Limit-setting sleep disorder.
2. Primary insomnia is sleeplessness or the perception of poor quality
sleep that is not caused by medical or psychiatric diseases,
conditions, genetics, or illnesses; or environmental causes (such as
drug abuse, medication, shift-work).
3. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders
specifies that primary hypersomnia is characterized by excessive
sleepiness but is not narcolepsy or another sleep disorder. It is
characterized by hypoarousal, or a state of being less awake and
alert and experiencing lesser cognitive and motor function as well
as emotional capacity.
4. It is a sudden and involuntary loss of muscle tone that occurs while
the patient is awake. This muscle weakness can impact the entire
body, specific limbs or certain areas of the body. It can last for a
few seconds, or it can last for a few minutes.
5. Primary central sleep apnea is a disorder of unknown cause
characterized by recurrent episodes of cessation of breathing
during sleep without associated ventilatory effort. A complaint of
excessive daytime sleepiness, insomnia, or difficulty breathing
during sleep is reported. This diagnosis requires that 5 or more
apneic episodes per hour of sleep be seen by polysomnography.
6. Jet lag disorder is related to a temporal mismatch between the
timing of the sleep–wake cycle generated by the endogenous
circadian clock produced by a rapid change in time zones. The
severity of the disorder is influenced by the number of time zones
crossed and the direction of travel, with eastward travel usually
being more disruptive.
7. Sleep restriction therapy (SRT), stimulus control therapy,
biofeedback, hypnosis, relaxation training, using paradoxical
intention technique and helping to improve sleep environment and
hygiene.
1. Robert C. Carson &James N. Butcher. (2007). Abnormal Psychology.
Pearson Education Inc. New Delhi.
2. Barlow and Durand. (2006). Abnormal Psychology. New York. Pearson
India Ltd.
3. Sarason and Sarason. (2010). Abnormal Psychology: The Problem of
Maladaptive Behaviour (11th Edition). New Delhi. Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd.
190
Model Question
Distance Education – CBCS – (2018-19 Academic Year Onwards)
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
B.Sc(Psychology)., NOTES
11934 - PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Time : 3 Hours Marks :75
PART – A (10X 2 = 20 Marks)
I. Answer all questions.
1 What is the meaning of abnormal behaviour?
2 What is transference?
3 What is eclecticism?
4 What are different types of obsessions and compulsions that
are experienced by people with OCD?
5 How is fear different from phobia?
6 What is learned helplessness?
7 Expand DSM and ICD.
8 What is anorexia nervosa?
9 What does ‘deinstitutionalization’ mean?
10 What is circadian rhythm?
PART – B (5X 5 = 25 Marks)
II .Answer all questions choosing either (a) or (b).
11. a. What are the sociocultural factors that cause abnormal behaviour?
(or)
b. What are the psychosocial reasons for abnormal behaviour?
12. a. Write a note on phobia.
(or)
b. What is a panic disorder?
13. a. How do symptoms of depression manifest in five areas of
functioning?
(or)
b. Write a note on body dysmorphic disorder.
14. a. Describe the clinical features of Borderline personality disorder.
(or)
b. Describe dissociative amnesia.
15. a. Write a short note on various eating disorders.
(or)
b. What are the symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder?
PART – B (3X10 = 30 Marks)
III. Answer any 3 out of 5 questions.
16. What did the humanitarian approach emphasize about treatment of
abnormal behaviour?
17. Describe in detail the assumptions and techniques underlying cognitive
behaviour therapy.
18. Discuss the clinical picture and treatment of schizophrenia.
19. Discuss various sleep disorders.
20. Discuss the various ways in which psychological disorders may be
assessed.
193

PG - M.Sc. - Psycology - 36333 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PG - M.Sc. - Psycology - 36333 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PG - M.Sc. - Psycology - 36333 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY

[ACCREDITED WITH ‘A+’ Grade by NAAC (CGPA:3.64) in the Third Cycle

KARAIKUDI – 630 003

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

Copy Right Reserved For Private use only

“The Copyright shall be vested with Alagappa University”

UNIT III Pages 15-26

UNIT VIII Pages 98-118

UNIT IX Pages 119 -129

BLOCK IV: DISORDERS

UNIT XIII Pages 175-182

UNIT II: ANXIETY DISORDERS 8-14

UNIT - III SOMATOFORM AND DISSOCIATIVE DISORDERS 15-26

UNIT IV: PERSONALITY DISORDERS 27-56

UNIT V: SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION 57-79

UNIT VII: PERSONALITY DISORDERS 87-97

BLOCK III: THERAPY AND ASSESSMENT

UNIT IX: PREVENTION 119-129

UNIT X: ASSESSMENT AND DIAGNOSIS 130-142

BLOCK IV: DISORDERS

UNIT XII: MOOD DISORDERS 163-174

UNIT XIII: EATING DISORDERS 175-182

UNIT XIV : SLEEPDISORDERS 183-190

Model Question Paper 191

1. Name the indicators of abnormality.

2. Define mental disorders according to the DSM 5.

1.4 Historical Conceptions of Abnormal Behaviour

3. What were Hippocrates’ contributions to psychopathology?

4. Describe the methods used by the Greeks and Romans to treat

1.5 Biological Viewpoint

6. What are the categories of explanation of abnormal behaviour from

2. Abnormal psychology also called psychopathology deals with

6. Genetic Vulnerabilities, brain dysfunction and neuroplasticity

7. It reflects a wide range of opinions on how to understand human

Check your Progress – 2

6. What are the biological factors that affect social phobia?

2.6.1 Psychological Causal Factors

also experience these sensations an intense, disturbing and highly

According to the information given above, it can be seen that somatic

cognition. The individuals with this disorder mostly have an attentional

In DSM-IV, many who were diagnosed with hypochondriasis also reported

when hypochondriasis is without any physical symptoms (or very mild

their efforts. Any sort of negative reinforcement was removed to eliminate

Check your Progress – 2

3.6 Factitious Disorder:

Check your Progress – 3

years. Only a minority of people develop this disorder after 25.

4.3 Clinical Features:

personality disorders (APA, 2013). Directly related or not, people with an

Note: a. Write your answer in the space given below NOTES

3. Which personality disorder is known as the attenuated form of

4. Name the common, extreme versions of personality traits in Histrionic

People with borderline personality disorder display great instability,

disorders such as dissociative identity disorder. Paris offered an interesting

5. What are the characteristics of Borderline personality disorder?

validation they desire, they are inclined to be hypercritical or retaliatory.

fearful attachment patterns in temperamentally inhibited children.

as therapy for depressed people, including the transference of dependency

7. What are the features which overlap between Histrionic and